Skoda Octavia (2016/05) Owner Manual
Below you will find brief information for Octavia Octavia. This manual covers important aspects of vehicle operation including safety guidelines, seat belt usage, airbag system details, child seat installation instructions, and proper seating positions. It also includes vehicle maintenance, troubleshooting tips, and technical data to ensure safe and efficient usage of Octavia vehicles.
PDF
Document
Advertisement
Advertisement
SIMPLY CLEVER OWNER´S MANUAL ŠKODA Octavia Documentation of vehicle delivery Date of vehicle deliverya) ŠKODA partners Stamp and signature of the vendor I confirm that I have taken delivery of the specified vehicle in good condition, have received information on how to operate it correctly, and have had the terms of the warranty explained to me. Signature of the customer Does the vehicle have an extended warranty? Yes No Limitations of the ŠKODA extended warrantya) Years: Affix the vehicle data carrier here 5E0012720AJ a) or km/mileage: or. miles: Due to the requirements of the country-specific regulations which are generally binding, the date of first registration can be given instead of the date of the vehicle handover. 1. vehicle owner 2. vehicle owner This vehicle with the official registration number (filled in by the vendor) belongs to: This vehicle with the official registration number belongs to: Title, Name / Company: Title, Name / Company: Address: Address: Telephone: Telephone: ŠKODA partners ŠKODA partners Service consultant: Service consultant: Telephone: 5E0012720AJ Telephone: Preface You have opted for a ŠKODA – our sincere thanks for your confidence in us. The description of the vehicle operation, important information about safety, vehicle care, maintenance and self-help, as well as technical vehicle data, are included in this Owner's Manual. The operation of some functions and vehicle systems is carried out via Infotainment. Please do not read just this manual, but also the Infotainment Owner's Manual carefully as well. Operation in accordance with the two instruction manuals is a prerequisite for the correct use of the vehicle. When using the vehicle, the general binding country-specific legal requirements (e.g. transporting children, deactivating the airbag, tyre use, road traffic, etc.) must always be observed. Please always pay attention when driving! As the driver you are fully responsible for road safety. We hope you enjoy driving your ŠKODA, and wish you a pleasant journey at all times. Your ŠKODA AUTO Table of Contents Materials defect liability and ŠKODA warranty for new cars 5 On-board literature 7 Notes 8 Structure of the Owner's Manual and further information 9 Abbreviations Safety Passive Safety General information Correct and safe seated position 11 11 11 Seat belts Using seat belts Inertia reel and belt pretensioners 14 14 16 Airbag system Description of the airbag system Airbag deactivation 17 17 20 Transporting children safely Child seat Fastening elements 21 21 24 Using the system cockpit Overview 29 28 Instruments and warning lights Instrument cluster Warning lights 30 30 32 Information system Driver information system Operation of the information system 41 41 42 Driving data (Multifunction display) MAXI DOT-Display Service interval display SmartGate 43 45 47 48 Unlocking and opening Unlocking and locking Anti-theft alarm system Boot lid with manual operation Electric boot lid Window operation Panoramic tilt / slide sunroof 50 50 54 55 56 58 60 Lights and visibility Lights Interior lighting Visibility Windscreen wipers and washers Rear view mirror 63 63 68 69 71 72 Seats and head restraints Front seats Rear seats Headrests Seat heaters 75 75 78 79 80 Useful features Interior fittings Electrical sockets Ashtray and cigarette lighter Tablet holder 81 81 89 90 91 Transport of cargo Luggage compartment and transporting objects Variable loading floor in the luggage compartment (Estate) 92 92 99 Net partition Transport on the roof rack Heating and ventilation Heating, manual air conditioning system, Climatronic Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventilation) 101 102 103 103 107 Driving Starting-off and Driving Starting and stopping the engine START-STOPsystem Brakes and Parking Manual shifting of gears and pedals Automatic gearbox Running in and economical driving Avoiding damage to your vehicle 109 109 111 112 114 115 117 119 Assist systems General information Braking and stabilisation systems OFF ROADmode Parking aid (ParkPilot) Reversing camera Park Assist Cruise Control System Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Front Assist Selection of the driving mode (Driving Mode Selection) Proactive passenger protection (Crew Protect Assist) Lane Departure Warning (Lane Assist) Traffic sign recognition 120 120 121 123 125 128 129 132 134 138 Table of Contents 140 143 143 145 3 Fatigue detection Tyre pressure monitoring 147 148 Towing device and trailer Hitch Using hitch 149 149 154 General Maintenance 160 160 162 164 Inspecting and replenishing Fuel Engine compartment Engine oil Coolant Brake fluid Vehicle battery 168 168 172 174 176 177 177 Wheels Wheels and tyres Operating in winter conditions 180 180 183 Do-it-yourself 4 Table of Contents Fuses and light bulbs Fuses Bulbs 196 197 198 198 202 Technical data Care and maintenance Service work, adjustments and technical alterations Service intervals Cleaning and care Emergency equipment, and self-help Emergency equipment Changing a wheel Breakdown kit Jump-starting Towing the vehicle Remote - replacing battery Emergency unlocking / locking of doors Replacing windscreen wiper blades 185 185 186 190 192 193 195 Technical data Basic vehicle data Vehicle-specific details per engine type Index 208 208 216 Materials defect liability and ŠKODA warranty for new cars Materials defect liability Your ŠKODA Partner, as a vendor, is liable to you for material damage to your new ŠKODA car, ŠKODA Genuine Parts or ŠKODA Genuine Accessories in accordance with statutory regulations and the purchase agreement. ŠKODA warranty for new cars As well as the materials defect liability, ŠKODA AUTO grants you the ŠKODA warranty for new cars (hereinafter referred to as “ŠKODA warranty),” according to the conditions described below. As part of the ŠKODA warranty, ŠKODA AUTO will provide the following services. ▶ Free repair of faulty components or vehicle defects that occur within two years from the start of the ŠKODA warranty. ▶ Free repair of paint work defects on your vehicle that occur within three years from the start of the ŠKODA warranty. ▶ Free repair of corrosion caused by rust on the bodywork of your vehicle that occurs within twelve years from the start of the warranty. Only corrosion of body panels from the inside to the outside is included in the definition of corrosion caused by rust on the bodywork and covered by the ŠKODA warranty. The start of warranty is the date on which the new car is handed over to the initial purchaser by the ŠKODA Partner1). This date must be noted down by the ŠKODA Partner in the Owner's Manual for your vehicle » in the section on the documentation of the vehicle handover. Vehicle repairs may be carried out either by replacing the faulty part or by repairing it. Replaced parts become the property of the ŠKODA Service Partner. There shall be no further claims arising from the ŠKODA warranty. In particular, there shall be no claims for replacement, cancellation, provision of a courtesy vehicle for the duration of repairs or compensation for damages. 1) If your ŠKODA vehicle was purchased from a ŠKODA Partner in a country of the European Economic Area (i.e. the countries of the European Union, Norway, Iceland and Liechtenstein) or in Switzerland, claims arising from the ŠKODA warranty must also be made through a ŠKODA Service Partner in one of these countries. If your ŠKODA vehicle was purchased from a ŠKODA Partner outside the European Economic Area and Switzerland, claims arising from the ŠKODA warranty must also be made through a ŠKODA Service Partner outside the European Economic Area and Switzerland. A prerequisite for carrying out work under the ŠKODA warranty is that all service work has been carried out in a timely and technically correct manner and in accordance with the ŠKODA AUTO's provisions. It must be proven that service work has been carried out properly and in accordance with the ŠKODA AUTO's provisions when making a claim on the ŠKODA warranty. In the event of a missed service or failure to carry out a service according to the ŠKODA AUTO's provisions, you may still be entitled to warranty claims as long as you can prove that the missed service or the failure to carry out a service according to the ŠKODA AUTO's provisions was not the cause of the defect. Natural wear and tear to your vehicle is not covered by the ŠKODA warranty. The ŠKODA warranty also does not cover faults to bodywork, installations or conversions provided by third parties, or vehicle faults caused as a result. The same applies to accessories that were not installed and/or delivered ex-factory. In addition, this warranty does not apply if the defect was caused by one of the following. ▶ Unauthorised use, improper handling (e.g. use in racing competitions or overloading), improper care and maintenance or unauthorised modifications to your vehicle. ▶ Non-compliance with instructions in the Owner's Manual or other factorysupplied instructions. ▶ External causes or influences (e.g. accidents, hail, flooding etc.). Due to the requirements of the country-specific regulations which are generally binding, the date of first registration can be given instead of the date of the vehicle handover. Materials defect liability and ŠKODA warranty for new cars 5 ▶ Parts fitted on or in the vehicle, whose use has not been approved by ŠKODA AUTO, or modification of the vehicle in a manner not approved by ŠKODA AUTO (e.g. tuning). ▶ Damage caused by you that was not immediately seen to by a specialist garage or was not rectified properly. It is the customer’s responsibility to prove that he/she is not the cause of the damage. This ŠKODA warranty does not affect the purchaser's statutory rights from materials defect liability from the vehicle vendor and other potential claims from product liability laws. Mobility warranty The mobility warranty provides a sense of security when travelling in your vehicle. If your vehicle breakdown on the road due to an unexpected failure, services for keeping you moving are provided under the mobility guarantee, which include the following services for you: Breakdown at the roadside and towing to ŠKODA Service partners, technical assistance on the telephone or on-site start-up. If your vehicle is not repaired on the same day, the ŠKODA Service Partner may provide further services as required, such as replacement transportation (bus, train etc.) or a courtesy vehicle etc. More information regarding terms and conditions for the provision of a mobility warranty for your vehicle can be obtained from your ŠKODA Partner. They will also provide you with detailed terms and conditions for the mobility warranty with respect to your vehicle. In the event that there is no mobility warranty coverage in place for your vehicle, you should check with any ŠKODA Service Partner about the possibility of a supplementary agreement. Optional ŠKODA extended warranty If you opted for a ŠKODA extended warranty when purchasing your new car, the two-year ŠKODA warranty is extended by the period you chose or until the chosen mileage limit has been reached, whichever occurs first. The paint warranty and the warranty against corrosion described above are unaffected by the ŠKODA extended warranty. The ŠKODA extended warranty does not apply to external and internal foils. The information on the detailed conditions of the ŠKODA extended warranty is provided by your ŠKODA partner. 6 Materials defect liability and ŠKODA warranty for new cars Note The ŠKODA extended warranty is only available in some countries. On-board literature Online user manuals You will always find this Owner's Manual in the on-board literature. Depending on the equipment installed, the on-board literature may also contain theInfotainment Owner's Manual. Owner´s Manual This Owner's Manual applies to all body variants of the vehicle and all related model versions as well as all equipment levels. This Owner's Manual describes all possible equipment variants without identifying them as special equipment, model variants or market-dependent equipment variants. Consequently, this vehicle does not contain all of the equipment components described in this Owner's Manual. The range of equipment installed in your vehicle depends on the purchase contract for the vehicle. For questions regarding the scope of equipment, please contact a ŠKODA Partner. The illustrations in this Owner's Manual are for illustrative purposes only. The illustrations can differ in minor details from your vehicle; they are only intended to provide general information. ŠKODA AUTO pursues a policy of ongoing product and model development with all vehicles. Changes to the scope of delivery with regard to design, equipment and technology are therefore possible at any time. The information listed in this Owner's Manual corresponds to the information available at the time of going to press. Fig. 1 Read in the QR code» Fig. 1using the respective application on your external device (e.g. Telephone, tablet) orenter the following address in the web browser to open the website with a model overview of the ŠKODA brand. http://go.skoda.eu/owners-manuals ▶ Select the desired model - a menu for the user manuals is displayed. ▶ Select the construction period as well as the language. ▶ Select the desired manual - it can be displayed either online or in pdf format. Therefore legal claims cannot be made based on the technical data, illustrations and information contained in this Owner's Manual. We recommend that web pages that are referred to in this Owner's Manual are displayed using the classic view. Not all necessary information may be displayed correctly if the mobile view is chosen. Infotainment Owner's Manual The Infotainment Owner's Manual contains a description of the Infotainment service and possibly also some functions and vehicle systems. On-board literature 7 Notes Terms used “Specialist” - Workshop - a workshop that carries out specialist service tasks for ŠKODA vehicles. A specialist can be a ŠKODA Partner, a ŠKODA Service Partner, or an independent workshop. “ŠKODA service partners” - A workshop that has been contractually authorised by ŠKODA AUTO or its sales partner to service ŠKODA vehicles and to sell ŠKODA Genuine Parts. “ŠKODA partners” - A company that has been authorised by ŠKODA AUTO or its sales partner to sell new ŠKODA vehicles and, when applicable, to service them using ŠKODA Genuine Parts and sell ŠKODA Genuine Parts. Text notes “Press” - Short press (e.g. a button) within 1 s “Hold” - Long press (e.g. a button) for more than 1 s Explanation of symbols Reference to the introductory module of a chapter with important infor mation and safety warnings Situations in which the vehicle must be stopped as soon as possible ® Trademark Telephone operation in the MAXI DOT display Text display in the segment display → Marker to the next operation step WARNING Texts with this symbol draw attention to threats of a serious accident, injury or loss of life. CAUTION Texts with this symbol draw attention to the risk of vehicle damage or possible inoperability of some systems. Note Texts with this symbol contain additional information. 8 Notes Structure of the Owner's Manual and further information Structure of the manual The Owner's Manual is hierarchically divided into the following areas. ■ Section (e.g. Operating instructions) - the title of the section is shown down in the left-hand corner ■ Main chapter (e.g. Checking and refilling) - the title of the main chapter is shown down in the right-hand corner ■ Chapter (e.g. Engine oil) ■ Topic introduction - Module overview within the chapter, introductory information about the chapter content and, where appropriate, relevant to the whole chapter ■ Module (e.g. Checking and refilling) Information search When searching for information in the Owner's Manual, we recommend using the Index at the end of the manual. Direction indications All direction indications such as “left”, “right”, “front” and “rear” relate to the forward direction of travel of the vehicle. Units of measurement The volume, weight, speed and length data is given in metric units, unless otherwise indicated. Display In this Owner's Manual, the screen on the MAXI DOT display is used as the display illustration, unless specified otherwise. Help in an emergency In case of breakdown, the breakdown service contact information required can be found in the following places. ▶ Contact details for the ŠKODA Partner (e.g. window sticker) ▶ Infotainment (Telephone - breakdown service / information service menu) ▶ ŠKODA mobile application ▶ ŠKODA web pages Structure of the Owner's Manual and further information 9 Abbreviations Abbreviation Engine revolutions per minute ABS Anti-lock brake system ACC Adaptive cruise control Definition Nm Newton meter, measuring unit for the engine torque PIN personal identification number Qi Standard for wireless charging of external devices TDI CR Diesel engine with turbo charging and common-rail injection system AG Automatic gearbox TSA Trailer stabilisation AGM Vehicle battery type TSI Petrol engine with turbo charging and direct injection TCS Traction control VIN Vehicle identification number CNG compressed natural gas W Watt, unit of power CO2 Carbon dioxide Wi-Fi Wireless data network COC Declaration of conformity XDS Functional expansion of the electronic differential lock DPF Diesel particle filter DSG Automatic double clutch gearbox DSR Active driver-steering recommendation EDL Electronic differential lock ECE Economic Commission for Europe EPC EPC fault light ESC Electronic Stability Control RD Rim depth EU European Union G-TEC Labelling for natural gas vehicles HBA Hydraulic brake assist HHC Uphill start assist KESSY keyless unlocking, starting and locking kW 10 Definition rpm Abbreviation Kilowatt, measuring unit for output LED Lighting element type MCB Multi-collision brake MG Manual gearbox MPI Gasoline engine with a multi-point fuel injection MSR Engine drag torque control N1 Panel van intended exclusively or mainly for the transportation of goods Abbreviations ▶ Protect children using a suitable child seat » page 21, Transporting children Safety safely. ▶ Adopt the correct seated position. Tell your passengers to assume the cor- Passive Safety rect seated position » page 11, Correct and safe seated position. General information Driving safety Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Before setting off Driving safety 11 11 In this section of the instructions you will find important information on the subject of passive safety. We have combined everything here which you should be familiar with, for example, regarding seat belts, airbags, safety of children and anything similar. Other important safety information can also be found in the subsequent sections of this Owner's Manual. Therefore, the Owner's Manual should always be kept in the vehicle. Before setting off For your own safety and the safety of the people travelling with you, please pay attention to the following points before setting off. ▶ Check the lights and turn signal lights are functioning correctly. ▶ Check the wiper function and the wiper blades for wear. Check the windscreen washer fluid level. ▶ Ensure that all of the windows offer good visibility to the outside. ▶ Adjust the rear-view mirror so that vision to the rear is guaranteed. Ensure that the mirrors are not covered. ▶ Check the tyre inflation pressure. ▶ Check the engine oil, brake fluid and coolant level. ▶ Secure all items of luggage. ▶ Do not exceed the permissible axle loads and permissible gross weight of the vehicle. ▶ Close all doors as well as the bonnet and boot lid. ▶ Ensure that no objects can obstruct the pedals. For safety in traffic, the following precautions must be observed. ▶ Do not become distracted from concentrating on the traffic situation, (e.g. by your passengers or mobile phone calls). ▶ Never drive when your driving ability is impaired, (e.g. due to medication, alcohol, drugs or similar). ▶ Keep to the traffic regulations and the permissible speed limit. ▶ Always adjust the driving speed to the road, traffic and weather conditions. ▶ Take regular breaks on long journeys (at least every two hours). Correct and safe seated position Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects: The correct seating position for the driver Adjusting the steering wheel position Correct seating position for the front passenger Correct seating position for the passengers in the rear seats 12 12 13 13 Always assume the correct seated position before setting off and do not change this position while driving. Also advise your passengers to adopt the correct seated position and not to change this position while the car is moving. The following list contains instructions for the Passenger which, if not observed, may cause serious injuries or death. ▶ Do not lean against the dash panel. ▶ Do not put your feet on the dash panel. The following list contains instructions for all Passengers which, if not observed, may cause serious injuries or death. ▶ Do not sit only on the front area of the seat. ▶ Do not sit facing to one side. ▶ Do not lean out of the window. ▶ Do not put your limbs out of the window. ▶ Do not put your feet on the seat upholstery. Passive Safety 11 WARNING ■ The front seats and all head restraints must be adjusted to match the body size at all times and the seat belt must always be fastened properly to provide the most effective levels of protection to the passengers. ■ Each occupant must correctly fasten the seat belt belonging to the seat. Children must be fastened » page 21, Transporting children safely with a suitable restraint system. ■ The seat backrests must not be tilted too far back when driving, as this will impair the function of the seat belts and of the airbag system – risk of injury! WARNING By sitting incorrectly, the occupant is risking life-threatening injuries. The correct seating position for the driver Adjust the steering wheel so that the distance between the steering wheel and your chest is at least 25 cm» Fig. 2 - A . Adjust the headrest so that the top edge of the headrest is at the same level as the upper part of your head (not for seats with integrated headrests)» Fig. 2 - C . Correctly fasten the seat belt » page 14, Using seat belts. WARNING ■ Maintain a distance of at least 25 cm from the steering wheel, and a dis- tance of at least 10 cm between the legs and the dash panel at the height of the knee airbag. Not maintaining this minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able to properly protect you – hazard! ■ When driving, hold the steering wheel with both hands firmly on the outer edge in the “9 o'clock” and “3 o'clock” position » Fig. 2. Never hold the steering wheel in the “12 o'clock” position or in any other way (e.g. in the middle, inner edge of the steering wheel or similar). Otherwise, you could sustain serious injury to the arms, hands and head if the airbag is activated. ■ Ensure there are no objects in the driver's footwell as they may get behind the pedals while driving. You would then no longer be able to operate the clutch, brake or acceleration pedals. Adjusting the steering wheel position Fig. 2 Correct seated position for the driver/correct steering wheel position Read and observe on page 12 first. For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident, the following instructions must be observed. Adjust the driver’s seat in the forward/back direction so that the pedals can be fully depressed with slightly bent legs. For vehicles equipped with driver knee airbags, adjust the driver's seat in a forward/back direction so that there is a gap of at least 10 cm between the legs and the dashboard in the vicinity of the knee airbag» Fig. 2 - B . Adjust the seat backrest so that the highest point of the steering wheel can be reached with your arms at a slight angle. 12 Safety Fig. 3 Adjusting the steering wheel position Read and observe on page 12 first. The height and forward/back position of the steering wheel can be adjusted. › Swivel the safety lever under the steering wheel in the direction of arrow 1 » Fig. 3. › Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position. The steering wheel can be Correct seating position for the passengers in the rear seats › Pull the safety lever in the direction of arrow 3 to the stop. Read and observe adjusted in the direction of arrow 2 . WARNING ■ Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving only when the vehicle is stationary! ■ The safety lever must always be locked so that the steering wheel cannot accidentally change position – There is a risk of accident! on page 12 first. For the safety of the passengers in the rear seats, and to reduce the risk of injury in an accident, the following instructions must be observed. Adjust the headrests so that the top edge of the headrest is at the same level as the upper part of the head» Fig. 2 on page 12 - C . Correctly fasten the seat belt » page 14, Using seat belts. Correct seating position for the front passenger Read and observe on page 12 first. For passenger safety and to reduce the risk of injury in an accident, the following instructions must be observed. Position the front passenger seat back as far as possible. The front passenger must maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the dash panel so that the airbag offers the greatest possible safety if it is deployed. Adjust the headrests so that the top edge of the headrest is at the same level as the upper part of your head» Fig. 2 on page 12 - C (not for seats with integrated headrests). Correctly fasten the seat belt » page 14. WARNING ■ A distance of least 25 cm to the dash panel should be maintained, other- wise the airbag system will not be able to protect you - There is a risk to life! ■ Always keep your feet in the footwell when the car is being driven – never place your feet on the instrument panel, out of the window or on the surface of the seats! You will be exposed to increased risk of injury if it becomes necessary to apply the brake or in the event of an accident. If an airbag is deployed, you could suffer fatal injuries by adopting an incorrect seated position! Passive Safety 13 WARNING (Continued) Seat belts ■ No two persons (also not children) should ever use a single seat belt to- gether. Using seat belts ■ The lock tongue should only be inserted into the lock which is the correct Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Correct routing of seat belt Fastening and unfastening seat belts 15 15 Seat belts that are fastened correctly offer good protection in the event of an accident. They reduce the risk of an injury and increase the chance of survival in the event of a major accident. The seat belts reduce kinetic energy to a considerable extent. They also prevent uncontrolled movements which, in turn, may well result in severe injuries. When transporting a child the following instructions must be observed » page 21, Transporting children safely. WARNING ■ Fasten seat belts before every journey! This also applies to other passen- gers - there is a danger of injury! ■ The maximum protection which seat belts can offer is only achieved if you are correctly seated » page 11, Correct and safe seated position. ■ The seat backrests of the front seats must not be tilted too far to the rear otherwise the seatbelts can lose their effectiveness. WARNING Information on dealing with the safety belts ■ The belt webbing must not be jammed in-between at any point or twisted, or chafe against any sharp edges. ■ Make sure you do not catch the seat belt in the door when closing it. WARNING Information on the proper use of the safety belts ■ Adjust the height of the belt in such a way that the shoulder part of the belt is roughly positioned across the middle of your shoulder – on no account across your neck. 14 Safety one for your seat. Wrong use of the safety belt will reduce its capacity to protect and the risk of injury increases. ■ Many layers of clothing and loose clothing (e. g. a winter coat over a jacket) do not allow you to be correctly seated and impairs proper operation of the seat belts. ■ Do not use clamps or other objects to adjust seat belts (e.g. for shortening the belts for smaller persons). ■ The seat belts for the rear seats can only fulfil their function reliably when the seat backrests are correctly locked into position » page 78. WARNING Information on the care and maintenance of the safety belts ■ The belt webbing must always be kept clean. Soiled belt webbing may impair proper operation of the inertia reel » page 167. ■ The seat belts must not be removed or changed in any way. Do not attempt to repair the seat belts yourself. ■ Check the condition of all the seat belts on a regular basis. If damage to the parts of the seat belt system (e.g. the strap, the belt connectors, the retractor, the lock or similar) are detected, the seat belt in question must be replaced by a specialist immediately. ■ Seat belts which have been subject to stress in an accident should be replaced by a specialist garage. The anchorage points for the belts should also be checked. Correct routing of seat belt Seat belt height adjusters for front seats › Push the return pulley upwards in the direction of arrow» Fig. 5 - . › Or: push together the mechanism in the direction of arrows 1 and push the return pulley downwards in the direction of arrow 2 » Fig. 5 - . › Then pull firmly on the belt to ensure that the seat belt height adjuster has correctly locked in place. WARNING ■ Always ensure that the webbing of the seat belts is properly routed. Seat Fig. 4 Routing of belt webbing over the shoulders and the lap belt/Routing of belt webbing for an expectant mother belts which are not correctly adjusted can themselves cause injuries even in minor accidents. ■ A seat belt which is hanging too loose can result in injuries as your body is moved forward by the kinetic energy produced in an accident and is then suddenly held firm by the belt. ■ The belt webbing must not run across solid or fragile objects (e.g. pencils, spectacles, pens, keys etc.). Such objects can cause injury. Fastening and unfastening seat belts Fig. 5 Seat belt height adjusters for front seats Read and observe on page 14 first. It is important that the belt is properly routed to ensure seat belts offer the maximum protection. The shoulder belt should be positioned approximately over the middle of your shoulder (under no circumstances across your neck) and lie flush to the chest» Fig. 4 - . The lower part of the belt should run across the pelvis (it should not lie on top of the stomach) and must always fit snugly» Fig. 4 - . For pregnant women, the lower part of the belt must be positioned as low down as possible across the pelvis, to avoid exerting any pressure on the lower abdomen» Fig. 4 - . Fig. 6 Fastening/unfastening the seat belt Read and observe on page 14 first. Before fastening the belt › Adjust the head restraint properly (does not apply to seats with integrated head restraints). › Adjust the seat (applies to the front seats). › Adjust the belt height (applies to the front seats). Fasten › Use the lock tongue to slowly pull the webbing over your chest and pelvis. Seat belts 15 › Insert the lock tongue into the belt buckle for the seat » Fig. 6 - until it If there is a collision of a certain severity, the seat belts are tightened by the belt tensioner so that unwanted body motion is prevented. audibly clicks into place. › Pull on the belt to check that it has engaged correctly in the lock. Belt tensioners are not activated in the event of minor collisions, in the case of a roll-over and also not in accidents in which no major forces are produced. Release › Grip the lock tongue and press the red button in the buckle» Fig. 6 - , the lock tongue pops out. › Guide the belt back by hand so that the seat belt does not twist and the webbing rolls up fully. WARNING ■ Any work on the belt tensioner system, including the removal and instal- lation of system components because of other repair work, must only be carried out by a specialist garage. ■ If the belt tensioners have been deployed, it is then necessary to replace the entire system. WARNING The reel opening for the lock tongue must not be blocked otherwise the lock tongue will not lock into place properly. Note Inertia reel and belt pretensioners ■ The belt tensioners can also be deployed if the seat belts are not fastened. ■ Smoke is generated when the belt tensioners are deployed. This is not an in- Introduction dication of a fire in the vehicle. This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Inertia reel Belt tensioners 16 16 Inertia reel Each seat belt is equipped with an inertia reel. When pulling slowly on the seat belt, the belt can move freely. When pulling sharply on the seat belt, the movement is locked by the inertia reel. The belts also block when during full braking, when the car accelerates, when driving downhill and when cornering. WARNING If the seat belt does not lock when pulling sharply on it, have it inspected immediately by a specialist garage. Belt tensioners Safety for the driver and front passenger wearing their seat belts is enhanced by the belt tensioners fitted to the inertia reels of the front three-point seat belts. 16 Safety Rear side airbags Head airbags Airbag system D Description of the airbag system Front airbags - the forward thrust of the driver and of the front passenger is cushioned when they make contact with the fully-inflated airbag, and the risk of injury to head and chest is thus reduced. E Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects: System description Airbag deployment Safety instructions 17 18 18 The airbag system provides, as a supplement to the seat belts, additional occupant protection during severe frontal and side-on collisions. The airbag will only provide optimum protection in conjunction with wearing the seat belt, the airbag is not a substitute for the seat belts. The functional status of the airbag system is indicated by the indicator light in the instrument cluster » page 35. System description The front airbags can be identified by the lettering featured on the steering wheel and on the dash panel on the passenger side. Driver´s knee airbag - The forward movement of the body is cushioned when it makes contact with the fully inflated airbag, and the risk of injury to the legs of the driver is thus reduced. The knee airbag is provided with the lettering on the dashboard on the driver's side. Side airbags - The load of the occupants is cushioned when plunged into the fully inflated airbag. The risk of injury to the entire upper body (chest, stomach and pelvis) is reduced on the side facing the door. The side air bags are marked by a label with the lettering on the front seat backrests. The rear side airbags are provided with the lettering in between the entrance area and the rear seat backrest. Head airbags - The forward movement of the body is cushioned when it makes contact with the fully inflated airbag, and the risk of injury to head and chest is thus reduced. The head airbags are provided with the letteringmarked on the B-pillar cladding. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the airbag system consists of the following parts. ▶ Individual airbags. ▶ Warning light in the instrument cluster» page 35. ▶ Key switch for the front passenger airbag » page 20. ▶ Warning light for the front passenger airbag in the middle of the dash panel » page 20. Fig. 7 Airbag installation points Airbag installation points » Fig. 7 A Front airbags B Driver’s knee airbag C Front side airbags Airbag system 17 Airbag deployment The following airbags will be deployed in the event of a severe side collision. ▶ Front side airbag. ▶ Rear side airbag. ▶ Head airbag. When an airbag is deployed, the following occurs. ▶ The hazard warning lights are switched on. ▶ All the doors are unlocked. ▶ The fuel supply to the engine is interrupted. ▶ The interior light comes on (if the automatic operation of the interior light is switched on - position ). When there is no air bag deployment? With minor frontal and side collisions, rear collision, overturning of the vehicle or vehicle roll-over there is no airbag deployment. Fig. 8 Inflated airbags The airbag system is only functional when the ignition is switched on. When triggered, the airbag fills with gas and unfolds. The inflation of the airbag is carried out in a fraction of a second. Safety instructions Fig. 9 Safe distance from the steering wheel and dash panel When the airbag inflates, smoke is released. This is not a sign of a fire in the vehicle. Triggering conditions It is not possible to generally determine which deployment conditions apply to the airbag system in every situation. The important factors here are the hardness of the object with which the vehicle collides, the angle of impact, vehicle speed etc. A decisive factor in the deployment of the airbags is the degree of deceleration at the time. If the vehicle deceleration which occurs and is measured during the collision remains below the prescribed reference values specified in the control unit, the airbags are not deployed although the vehicle may well suffer severe damage to the bodywork as a consequence of the accident. The following airbags will be deployed in the event of a severe frontal collision. ▶ Driver’s front airbag. ▶ Front passenger airbag. ▶ Driver’s knee airbag. 18 Safety WARNING General information ■ The seat belts and the airbag system can only offer optimum protection if the driver and passengers are seated properly » page 11. ■ The airbag unleashes enormous force when triggered, which can lead to serious injuries or fatalities if the driver and passengers are not seated properly. This applies in particular to children who are transported without using a suitable child safety seat » page 23. ■ If there is a fault, have the airbag system checked immediately by a specialist garage. Otherwise, there is a risk of the airbag not being activated in the event of an accident. WARNING (Continued) ■ If the airbag has been deployed, the airbag system must then be replaced. ■ In the area of the front airbag and the knee airbag, the surface of the steering wheel and the dashboard should be cleaned using only a dry cloth or one that has been dampened with water. WARNING Information about the front airbags ■ For the driver and front passenger it is important to maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the steering wheel or the panel» Fig. 9 - A , If you do not keep this distance, the airbag system cannot protect you - There is a risk to life! The front seats and the head restraints must always also be correctly adjusted to match the body size of the occupant. ■ The front passenger airbag must be deactivated if using a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat » page 20, Airbag deactivation. If this is not done, there is a risk of the child suffering severe or even fatal injuries if the front passenger airbag is deployed. ■ No other persons, animals or objects should be placed in front of the occupants in the front seats in the deployment area of the front airbags. ■ The steering wheel and the surface of the dash panel on the passenger side must not be plastered, covered or modified in any way. No parts (e.g. cup holders, mobile phone mounts etc.) may be mounted near the airbag installation points and in the airbag deployment area. ■ Never place objects on the surface of the dash panel on the passenger side. WARNING Information about knee airbags ■ Adjust the driver's seat in a forward/back direction so that there is a gap of at least 10 cm between the legs and the dashboard in the vicinity of the knee airbag» Fig. 9 - B . If it is not possible to meet this requirement due to your body size, visit a specialist garage. ■ The surface of the airbag module in the lower part of the dash panel below the steering column not have stickers attached, be covered or modified in any other way. Nothing may be attached to the cover of the airbag module or located within the immediate vicinity. ■ Do not attach any bulky and heavy objects (bunch of keys etc.) to the ignition key. These can be ejected by the knee airbag when it is deployed and can cause injuries. WARNING Information on side and head airbags ■ No objects (e.g. sun visors turned towards the windows) should be located in the deployment area of the side and head airbags. No accessories (e.g. cup holders etc.) should be fitted to the doors - risk of injury! ■ Hang only light clothing on the hooks in the vehicle, do not leave any heavy or sharp objects in the pockets. Do not use hangers to hang up clothes. ■ The airbag system operates using pressure sensors located in the front doors. For this reason, no adjustments may be carried out to the doors or door panels (e.g. installation of additional loudspeakers). Further information » page 161. ■ No excessive force, e.g. through blows, kicks etc. should be applied to the seat backrests - there is a risk of damage to the side airbags. The side airbags would not be deployed in such a case! ■ Any seat or protective covers which you fit to the driver or front passenger seats must only be of a type expressly authorised by ŠKODA AUTO. In view of the fact that the airbag inflates out of the backrest of the seat, use of non-approved seat or protective covers would considerably impair the protective function of the side airbag. ■ Any damage to the original seat covers or stitching at the installation points for the side airbags should be immediately repaired by a specialist company. WARNING Information on the use of the airbag system ■ Any work on the airbag system, including the installation and removal of system components due to other repair work (e.g. removal of the steering wheel), must only be carried out by a specialist garage. Further information » page 161. ■ No changes of any sort should be made to parts of the airbag system, the front bumper or the bodywork. ■ Do not manipulate individual parts of the airbag system, as this might result in the airbag being deployed. Airbag system 19 Airbag deactivation Deactivating the front passenger airbag Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Deactivating airbags Deactivating the front passenger airbag 20 20 Deactivating airbags The front passenger airbag can be switched off with the key-operated switch » Fig. 10 on page 20 - . We recommend that you ask a ŠKODA service partner to deactivate any other airbags as appropriate. Fig. 10 Key-operated switch for the front passenger airbag/warning light for the front passenger airbag A warning light indicates that the airbag has been deactivated » page 35. Switch positions» Fig. 10 - The front passenger airbag is deactivated - after the ignition is switched on, the warning light » Fig. 10illuminates - The front passenger airbag is switched on - after switching on the ignition, the warning light illuminates for 65 seconds Deactivating an airbag should be considered in cases such as the ones outlined below. ▶ If a child seat must be used on the front passenger seat, where the child is transported facing towards the rear» page 21. ▶ If not being able to maintain a distance of at least 25 cm between the middle of the steering wheel and chest, despite the driver's seat being correctly adjusted. ▶ If special attachments are required in the area of the steering wheel because of a physical disability. ▶ If other seats have been installed (e.g. orthopaedic seats without side airbags). WARNING If an airbag is deactivated at the time of the vehicle being sold, the purchaser must be informed! 20 Safety Switch off › Switch off the ignition. › Open the storage box on the front passenger's side. › Fold the key bit out completely for the radio key » . › Carefully insert the key into the key slot in the key switch as far as the stop. › Use the key to turn the slot of the key switch carefully into the position . › Pull the key out of the slot in the key switch » . › Close the storage compartment on the front passenger side. › Check that the warning light lights up after the ignition is switched on. Switching on › Switch off the ignition. › Open the storage box on the front passenger's side. › Fold the key bit out completely for the radio key » . › Carefully insert the key into the key slot in the key switch as far as the stop. › Use the key to turn the slot of the key switch carefully into the position . › Pull the key out of the slot in the key switch » . › Close the storage compartment on the front passenger side. › Check that the warning light lights up after the ignition is switched on. WARNING ■ The key cannot be inserted into the key switch while driving. Shocks can cause the key to turn in the slot and trigger the airbag! The airbag could be triggered unexpectedly in an accident - it may result in injury or death! ■ The driver is responsible for whether the airbag is switched on or switched off. ■ Only switch off the airbag when the ignition is switched off! Otherwise a fault can occur in the system for deactivating the airbag. ■ If the warning lights flash, the front passenger airbag will not be deployed in the event of an accident! Have the airbag system checked by a specialist garage immediately. CAUTION An insufficiently folded out key bit can damage the key switch! Transporting children safely Child seat Introduction To reduce the risk of injury in an accident, children should only be transported in child seats! This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Use of a child seat on the front passenger seat Use of a child seat on the front seat Child safety and the side airbag Classification of child seats Use of child safety seats which are secured using a seat belt 22 23 23 23 23 Please refer to the instructions in this Owner's Manual and the child seat manufacturer's instructions with regard to the installation and use of the child seat. For safety reasons, we recommend that you always transport children in the rear seats. Only transport a child in the passenger seat in exceptional circumstances. Child seats complying with the ECE-R 44 Economic Commission for Europe standard must be used. Child seats that comply with the ECE-R 44 standard have a test seal that cannot be removed: a large E within a circle with the test number below. WARNING ■ One should never carry children, and also not babies! - on one's lap. ■ When leaving the vehicle, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle. In an emergency, they might not be able to get out of the vehicle on their own or to help themselves. At very high or very low temperatures can be fatal! ■ The child must be secured in the vehicle during the entire travelling time! Otherwise, in the event of an accident, the child would be thrown through the vehicle and as a result may suffer fatal injuries, and also injure other occupants. Transporting children safely 21 WARNING (Continued) ■ Children are exposed to an increased risk of injury in the event of an acci- dent if they lean forward or adopt an incorrect seated position when the vehicle is moving. This particularly applies to children who are transported on the front passenger seat as they can suffer severe, or even fatal injuries if the airbag system is deployed! ■ Pay particular attention to the information provided by the manufacturer of the child safety seat regarding the correct routing of the belt. Seat belts which are not correctly adjusted can themselves cause injuries even in minor accidents. ■ Safety belts must be checked to ensure that they are running properly. One should also ensure that the belt is not damaged by sharp-edged fittings. ■ When installing the child seat on the back seat, the corresponding front seat must be adjusted so that there is no contact between the front seat and the child seat or the child being transported in a child seat. ■ When installing a child seat in which the child faces forward, adjust the head restraints so that they are as high as possible. ■ If the head restraints still prevent the child seat from being installed, even in the highest position, you will need to remove them » page 79. After removing the child seat, refit the head restraints. Note We recommend that you use child seats from ŠKODA Original Accessories. These child seats were developed and also tested for use in ŠKODAvehicles. They meet the ECE-R 44 standard. Use of a child seat on the front passenger seat Does not apply to Taiwan Fig. 11 Warning labels Read and observe on page 21 first. Never use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat which is protected by an active airbag. This could cause serious injury to the child, even death. This warning is also given on stickers that are located in the following places. ▶ On the passenger sun visor» Fig. 11 - . ▶ On the B-column on the front passenger side» Fig. 11 – . The following advice must be heeded when using a child seat in which the child is carried on the front passenger seat. ▶ It is essential to switch off the front passenger airbag if using a child seat in which the child is carried with its back facing the direction of travel » . ▶ If possible, adjust the front passenger seat backrest so that it is as vertical, so as to ensure secure contact between the passenger seat backrest and the back of the child seat. ▶ If possible, move the front passenger seat backwards so that there is no contact between the front passenger seat and the child seat behind it. ▶ Set the height-adjustable front passenger seat as high up as possible. ▶ Set the front passenger seat belt as high up as possible. ▶ With child safety seats in groups 2 and 3, make sure that the loop-around fittings attached to the child seat headrest is positioned in front of or at the same height as the loop-around fittings on the B pillar on the passenger side. 22 Safety Adjust the height of the front passenger seat belt so that the belt does not “jam” in the return pulley. In the event of an accident, there is the risk of injury to the neck of the child carried due to the seat belt! Child safety and the side airbag Fig. 13 Incorrect seated position of a child who is not properly secured – risk from the side airbag/Child properly protected by safety seat WARNING ■ Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is activated. This child safety seat is positioned in the deployment area of the front passenger airbag. The airbag may cause the child severe, or even fatal injuries, in the event of it being deployed. ■ Once a child seat in which the child is transported with its back to the direction of travel is no longer being used on the passenger seat, the front passenger airbag should be reactivated. Read and observe Use of a child seat on the front seat on page 21 first. The child must not be positioned in the deployment area of the side airbag» Fig. 13 - . Applies to Taiwan Fig. 12 Warning labels There must be sufficient room between the child and the deployment area of the side airbag to ensure that the airbag can provide as much protection as possible » Fig. 13 - . Classification of child seats Read and observe on page 21 first. Classification of child seats according to the ECE-R 44 standard. Read and observe on page 21 first. No babies, infants or children are to be carried on the passenger seat. A label to this effect can also be found on the passenger's sun visor » Fig. 12. Group Weight of the child 0 0+ 1 2 3 up to 10 kg up to 13 kg 9-18 kg 15-25 kg 22-36 kg Use of child safety seats which are secured using a seat belt Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is activated. This child safety seat is positioned in the deployment area of the front passenger airbag. The airbag may cause the child severe, or even fatal injuries, in the event of it being deployed. Read and observe on page 21 first. Overview of the usefulness of child seats fastened with a seat belt on each of the seats in accordance with the ECE-R 16 standard. Transporting children safely 23 Group Front passenger seat Rear seats External Rear seat Centre U U U U U U U U U 0 up to 10 kg 0+ up to 13 kg 1 9-18 kg 2 15-25 kg 3 22-36 kg U U U U U U U is a system for securing child seats quickly and safely. Two locking eyes are located between the seat backrest and the seat cushion of the outer rear seats and front passenger seat for fixing the system child seat in place. First, remove the caps A in order to access the locking eyes» Fig. 14. After removing the child seat, replace he caps. WARNING ■ Always refer to the instructions of the manufacturer of the child seat when installing and removing a child seat with the system. ■ Never attach other child seats, belts or objects to the attachment points intended for the installation of a child seat with the system – risk of death! Child seat category “Universal” - a child seat designed for fastening on the seat with the seat belt. Note ■ A child seat fitted with the system can only be mounted in a vehicle fit- ted with a system if the child seat has been approved for this type of vehicle. Further information is available from a ŠKODA Partner. ■ Child seats with the system can be purchased from ŠKODA Original Accessories. Fastening elements Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Attachment points of the -system Use of child safety seats with the system Attachment points of the system Attachment points of the -system Fig. 14 Labels of the system 24 Safety 24 25 26 Use of child safety seats with the system Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is activated. This child safety seat is positioned in the deployment area of the front passenger airbag. The airbag may cause the child severe, or even fatal injuries, in the event of it being deployed. Overview of the usefulness of child seats with the system on each of the seats in accordance with the ECE-R 16 standard. Group Size class of the child seata) Front passenger seatb) Rear seats outside Rear seat middle 0 up to 10 kg E X IL-SU X X IL-SU X X IL-SU IUF X - X IL-SU X - X IL-SU X 0+ up to 13 kg 1 9-18 kg 2 15-25 kg 3 22-36 kg a) b) E D C D C B B1 A The size category is shown on the label attached to the child seat. If the front passenger seat is fitted with system attachment points, it is suitable for the installation of an child seat with “Semi-Universal” approval. IL-SU IUF X The seat is suitable for the use of approved child seats in in the “Semi-Universal”category. The “Semi-Universal” category means that the child seat with the system is approved for your vehicle. Observe the information in the list of vehicles which comes with the child seat. The seat is suitable for the installation of a child seat with “Universal” approval and attachment with the system attachment belt. The seat is not fitted with -system attachment points. Transporting children safely 25 Attachment points of the system Fig. 15 Attachment points of the -system is a fastening system, which restricts the movement of the upper part of the child seat. The locking eyes A for attaching the belt of a child seat with the system are located on the rear side of the outer rear seat backrests » Fig. 15. Some country-specific models can also be equipped with a locking eye B on the back of the middle rear seat backrest » Fig. 15. WARNING ■ Always refer to the instructions of the manufacturer of the child seat when installing and removing a child seat with the system. ■ Only use child seats with the system on the seats that have the attachment points. ■ Only ever attach one belt from the child seat to a locking eye. 26 Safety Transporting children safely 27 Fig. 16 Cockpit example for LHD models 28 Using the system 25 Using the system 26 cockpit 27 Overview 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Power windows Electric exterior mirror adjustment Door opening lever Air outlet nozzles Ticket holder Operating lever (depending on equipment): ▶ Direction and high beam ▶ Speed regulating system ▶ High beam assist Steering wheel with horn / with driver's front airbag Buttons for operating the information system Instrument cluster Operating lever: ▶ Windscreen wipers and washers ▶ information system Infotainment » Owner's Manual for Infotainment Button for hazard warning light system Warning light for the front seat passenger airbag Interior rear-view mirror Storage compartment on the front passenger side Front passenger airbag External Infotainment module (in the front passenger storage compartment) » Owner's Manual Infotainment Key switch for switching off the front passenger airbag (in front passenger storage compartment) Power window in the front passenger door Storage compartment Light switch Bonnet release lever Storage compartment on the driver's side Operating lever for adaptive cruise control 59 73 53 106 82 28 29 30 64 132 66 17 41 30 71 41 67 20 73 86 17 31 32 33 Steering wheel locking lever Depending on equipment fitted: ▶ Ignition lock ▶ Start button Handbrake lever Depending on equipment fitted: ▶ Gearshift lever (manual gearbox) ▶ Selector lever (automatic gearbox) Depending on equipment fitted: ▶ 12-Volt power socket ▶ Cigarette lighter Bar with keys depending on the equipment fitted: ▶ Central locking system ▶ START STOP ▶ Traction control TCS ▶ Electronic Stability Control ESC ▶ /Selection of travel mode ▶ Park Assist ▶ Parking aid ▶ Tyre pressure monitoring system Storage compartmenttelephone box USB and AUX inputs Controls for heating / air conditioning 12 110 110 113 114 115 89 90 52 111 122 121 140 129 125 148 83, 83 84 103 Note The layout of the controls on right-hand drive vehicles differs partially from that shown in this layout» Fig. 16. 20 59 82 63 173 82 136 cockpit 29 6 Instruments and warning lights Instrument cluster Introduction 7 Operation key: ▶ Setting the time » page 42 ▶ Reset counter for distance travelled (trip) » page 41 ▶ Displaying the distance and days until the next service interval » page 47 Gasoline / diesel reserve display » page 31 The brightness of the instrument illumination is set automatically depending on the ambient lighting throughout. If the visibility is poor and the lights are not on, the brightness of the instrument lighting reduces to alert the driver to switch on the lights in due time. The brightness of the instrument lighting can be activated/deactivated in the» Infotainment Owner´s Manual. Tachometer The tachometer 1 » Fig. 17 on page 30 shows the actual engine speed per minute. The beginning of the red scale range of the tachometer indicates the maximum permitted engine speed of a driven-in and operating warm engine. Fig. 17 Instrument cluster You should shift into the next highest gear before the red scale of the revolution counter is reached, or select mode D / S on the automatic gearbox. This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Tachometer Coolant temperature gauge Fuel gauge - natural gas Fuel gauge - Petrol/ Diesel Tachometer » page 30 ▶ with warning lights » page 32 Display » page 41 Speedometer ▶ with warning lights » page 32 Depending on equipment fitted: ▶ Coolant temperature gauge » page 31 ▶ Gas gauge1) » page 31 Bar with warning lights » page 32 1 2 3 4 5 1) Applies to G-TEC vehicles. 30 Using the system 30 31 31 31 The gear recommendation is important to note in order to maintain the optimum engine speed » page 42. CAUTION The tachometer pointer may only move into the red area for a short time - otherwise risk of engine damage! Coolant temperature gauge Fig. 18 Coolant temperature gauge Note The arrownext to the symbolwithin the fuel gauge displays the installation location of the fuel filler on the right side of the vehicle. Fuel gauge - Petrol/ Diesel Fig. 20 Gasoline / diesel reserve display The display» Fig. 18 only works if the ignition is switched on. Cold range - The pointer is in the range A , the engine has not yet reached its operating temperature. Avoid high speeds and high engine loads. Operating range - The pointer is in the range B . The display» Fig. 20 only works if the ignition is switched on. High temperature rangeThe pointer is in the range C . The coolant temperature is too high. The warning light » page 38illuminates in the instrument cluster. The contents of the fuel tank for petrol / diesel is approximately 50 litres. Fuel gauge - natural gas Fig. 19 Gas gauge If the fuel level reaches the reserve level A » Fig. 20, the warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster» page 36. WARNING For the vehicle systems to function correctly, and thus for safe driving, there must be sufficient fuel in the tank. Never drain the fuel tank completely – risk of accident! CAUTION Never drive until the fuel tank is completely empty! Irregular supply of fuel can cause misfiring, which can result in damage to parts of the engine and the exhaust system. Note The display» Fig. 19 only works if the ignition is switched on. The capacity of the natural gas fuel tank is approximately 15 kg. If this fuel level reaches the reserve area, in the display the icon and a request for natural gas refuelling is displayed. ■ After filling up, it’s possible that during dynamic driving (e.g. numerous curves, braking, driving downhill and climbing a steep hill) the fuel gauge indicates a fraction less. ■ The arrownext to the symbolwithin the fuel gauge displays the installation location of the fuel filler on the right side of the vehicle. Instruments and warning lights 31 Warning lights Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Handbrake Braking system Front seat belt warning light Automatic Distance Control (ACC) Power steering / steering lock (KESSY system) Stability control (ESC) / Traction control (TCS) Traction control (TCS) disabled Anti-lock braking system (ABS) Rear fog light Emission control system Preheating unit (diesel) Engine performance check (petrol engine) Safety systems Tyre pressure Brake linings Fuel reserve - petrol / diesel Lane assist (Lane Assist) Turn signal system Trailer turn signal lights Fog lights Cruise control system Brake pedal (automatic transmission) natural gas operation Main beam Automatic gearbox Rear seat belt warning light Generator Coolant Engine oil pressure Engine oil level Lamp failure Diesel particle filter (diesel) 32 Using the system 33 33 33 33 33 34 34 34 34 35 35 35 35 35 36 36 36 36 36 37 37 37 37 37 37 37 37 38 38 38 38 39 Windscreen washer fluid level High beam assistant START-STOP system Displaying a low temperature Water in the fuel filter (diesel engine) Automatic Distance Control (ACC) Distance warning (Front Assist) Advance warning / emergency braking (Front Assist) OFF ROADmode Adaptive Chassis Control (DCC) Service 39 39 39 39 39 40 40 40 40 40 40 The warning lights in the instrument cluster indicate certain functions or faults. Some warning lights can be accompanied by acoustic signals and messages in the display of the instrument cluster. After switching on the ignition, some warning lights light up briefly as a function test. If the tested systems are OK, the corresponding warning lights go out a few seconds after switching on the ignition or after starting the engine. The warning lights are located at the following positions in the instrument cluster » Fig. 17 on page 30. ▶ Tachometer 1 ▶ Display 2 ▶ Speedometer 3 ▶ Bar with warning lights 5 Warning lights in the display Depending on the importance the warning light (danger) or (warning) illuminate along with some of the warning lights in the list with the warning lights. Depending on the vehicle equipment supplied some warning lights can be displayed in colour on the display. For example, the coolant warning lamp may be represented as follows. ▶ - Segment display / monochromatic (“black and white”) MAXI DOT display ▶ - Coloured MAXI DOT display WARNING ■ Ignoring illuminated warning lights and related messages or instructions in the display of the instrument cluster may lead to serious personal injury or damage to the vehicle. ■ If you have to stop for technical reasons, then park the vehicle at a safe distance from the traffic, switch off the engine and activate the hazard warning light system » page 67. Place the warning triangle at the prescribed distance. ■ The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area. The following warning instructions must be followed at all times when working in the engine compartment » page 172, Engine compartment. Automatic Distance Control (ACC) Read and observe on page 33 first. illuminates - the ACC delay is not sufficient. ▶ Apply the brake. For more information about the ACC system » page 134. Power steering / steering lock (KESSY system) Handbrake Read and observe If the seat belt is not fastened by the driver or front passenger during the next approx. 2 minutes, the warning signal is deactivated and the warning lightilluminates permanently. on page 33 first. lights up – the hand brake has been applied. An acoustic signal will sound if you drive the vehicle above 5 km/h while the handbrake is still on. Read and observe on page 33 first. Fault in the power steering lights up – this indicates a complete failure of the power steering and the steering assist is no longer working (significantly higher steering forces). ▶ Release the handbrake. lights up – this indicates a partial failure of the power steering and the steering forces can be greater. Braking system ▶ Switch off the ignition, start the engine again and travel a short distance. ▶ If the warning lightdoes not go off, stop the vehicle, stop driving. Seek Read and observe on page 33 first. illuminates – the brake fluid level in the brake system is too low. ▶ Park the vehicle, stop driving! Seek help from a specialist garage. WARNING A fault to the braking system can increase the vehicle’s braking distance There is a risk of an accident! help from a specialist garage. ▶ If the warning lightdoes not go off, you can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately. Steering lock defect (KESSY system) An audible signal sounds as a warning. flashes Steering column lock faulty. Stop! STOP VEHICLE STEERING FAULTY ▶ Park the vehicle, stop driving. After switching off the ignition, it is no lon- Front seat belt warning light Read and observe on page 33 first. lights up - the driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. At a speed of over 30 km/h the warning lightflashes and an audible warning sounds at the same time. ger possible to lock the steering, to activate the electrical components (e.g. Infotainment ), to switch on the ignition again and to start the engine. Seek help from a specialist garage. flashes Steering lock: See a workshop! STEERING WORKSHOP ▶ You can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek assistance from a spe- cialist garage immediately. Instruments and warning lights 33 Steering column lock not unlocked (System KESSY) Move the steering wheel! flashes MOVE STEERING WHEEL ▶ Move the steering wheel slightly back and forth, thereby facilitating unlock- If, after a short drive, the indicator light does not go out, there is a system error. ▶ You can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek assistance from a spe- cialist garage immediately. ing the steering lock. ▶ If the steering does also not unlock then, the help of a specialist garage is required. For more information on the ESC system» page 121 or TCS system» page 122. Disconnecting the vehicle battery If the vehicle's battery has been disconnected and reconnected, the warning light comes on after switching on the ignition. Read and observe The warning light should go out after driving a short distance. If, after the motor is restarted and a short drive, the indicator light does not go out, there is a system error. ▶ You can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek assistance from a spe- cialist garage immediately. Stability control (ESC) / Traction control (TCS) Read and observe on page 33 first. If your vehicle is equipped with the ESC system, the TCS is part of the ESC system. flashes – the ESC or TCS is currently active. System fault lights up – there is an ESC or TCS fault. ▶ You can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek assistance from a spe- cialist garage immediately. If the warning light comes on after starting the engine, the TCS may be switched off for technical reasons. ▶ Switch the ignition off and on again. If the warning light does not illuminate after you switch the engine back on, the ASR is fully functional again. Disconnecting the vehicle battery If the vehicle's battery has been disconnected and reconnected, the indicator light comes on after switching on the ignition. The warning light should go out after driving a short distance. 34 Using the system Traction control (TCS) disabled on page 33 first. illuminates – the TCS system is disabled. Note On vehicles without the ESC system, the warning light does not illuminate upon deactivation of the TCS system, but a message is only displayed on the display of the instrument cluster. Anti-lock braking system (ABS) Read and observe on page 33 first. lights up – there is an ABS fault. The vehicle will only be braked by the normal brake system without the ABS. ▶ You can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek assistance from a spe- cialist garage immediately. WARNING ■ If warning light illuminates simultaneously with warning light » page 33, Braking system, do not continue your journey! Seek help from a specialist garage. ■ A fault to the ABS system or the braking system can increase the vehicle's braking distance – risk of accident! Rear fog light Read and observe on page 33 first. lights up – the rear fog light is switched on. Emission control system Read and observe on page 33 first. lights up – there is a fault in the emission control system. The system makes it possible to drive on in emergency mode - there may be a noticeable reduction in engine performance. ▶ You can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek assistance from a spe- cialist garage immediately. Preheating unit (diesel) Read and observe on page 33 first. flashes – there is a fault in the engine management system. The system makes possible operation emergency mode - there may be a noticeable reduction in engine performance. There is a fault in the glow plug system if the warning light does not come on or illuminates continuously. ▶ You can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek assistance from a spe- cialist garage immediately. Engine performance check (petrol engine) Read and observe on page 33 first. lights up – there is a fault in the engine management system. The system makes it possible to drive on in emergency mode - there may be a noticeable reduction in engine performance. ▶ You can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek assistance from a spe- cialist garage immediately. on page 33 first. System fault lights up - there is a fault in the airbag system. Error: Airbag AIRBAG ERROR The front passenger airbag has been disabled with the key switch Illuminates for around 4 seconds after the ignition has been switched on. One of the airbags or a belt tensioner has been disabled by the diagnostic tool illuminates for around 4 seconds after the ignition is switched on and then flashes for approximately 12 seconds. Airbag/ belt tensioner deactivated. AIRBAG/ BELT TENSIONER OFF ProActive passenger protection illuminates and the following message is shown in the information cluster display. Proactive passenger protection not available. PROACTIVE PASSENGER PROTECT NOT AVAIL or Proactive passenger protection: function restricted. LIMITED PROACTIVE PASSENGER PROTECT The seat belt for the driver and front passenger needs to be replaced. ▶ Seek help from a specialist garage. WARNING When a fault in the airbag system occurs, there is a risk of the system not being triggered in the event of an accident. Therefore, this must be checked immediately by a specialized garage. Tyre pressure Read and observe Safety systems Read and observe ▶ Seek help from a specialist garage. on page 33 first. Change of tyre pressure values lights up– there was a pressure change in one of the tyres. An audible signal sounds as a warning. ▶ Immediately reduce speed and avoid sudden steering and braking manoeu- vres. ▶ Stop the vehicle, turn the ignition off and check the tyres and their inflation pressure » page 181. Instruments and warning lights 35 ▶ Correct the tyre pressure if necessary or replace the affected wheel » page 186 or use the repair kit » page 190. ▶ Save the tyre pressure values in the system » page 148. ▶ You can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek assistance from a spe- cialist garage immediately. Fuel reserve - petrol / diesel System fault flashes for approximately 1 minute and remains lit – there may be a fault in the tyre pressure monitoring system. Read and observe ▶ Stop the vehicle, turn the ignition off and start the engine again. illuminates – the fuel level in the fuel tank is at the reserve level (approximately 6 litres). If the warning light flashes after starting the engine again, there is a system error. ▶ You can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek assistance from a spe- cialist garage immediately. Disconnecting the vehicle battery If the vehicle's battery has been disconnected and reconnected, the indicator light comes on after switching on the ignition. on page 33 first. An audible signal sounds as a warning. ▶ Please refuel » page 168. Note The text in the display goes out after refuelling and driving a short distance. Lane assist (Lane Assist) The warning light should go out after driving a short distance. Read and observe If, after a short drive, the indicator light does not go out, there is a system error. The warning lights indicates the state of the Lane Assist system. ▶ You can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek assistance from a spe- More information about the Lane Assist System » page 143. cialist garage immediately. Other incidents The illumination of the warning light can have the following reasons. ▶ The vehicle is loaded on one side. Distribute the load evenly. ▶ The wheels of one axle are loaded more heavily (e.g. when towing a trailer or when driving uphill or downhill). ▶ Snow chains are mounted. ▶ A wheel has been changed. on page 33 first. Turn signal system Read and observe on page 33 first. flashes – the left turn signal is turned on. flashes – the right turn signal is turned on. If there is a fault in the turn signal system, the warning light flashes at twice its normal rate (does not apply when towing). CAUTION Under certain circumstances (e.g. sporty style of driving, wintry or unpaved roads) the warning light in the instrument cluster can be delayed or does not light up at all. Switching off the hazard warning light system is switched on will cause all of the turn signal lights as well as both warning lights to flash. Brake linings Read and observe Read and observe on page 33 first. illuminates - the brake pads are worn. 36 Using the system Trailer turn signal lights on page 33 first. flashes – the trailer turn signal lights are switched on. If a trailer is hitched and the warning light is not flashing, one of the trailer turn signal lights has failed. ▶ Check the trailer bulbs. Illuminates Fog lights Read and observe ▶ Stop driving! Stop the vehicle and turn off the engine. on page 33 first. illuminates – the fog lights are switched on. Cruise control system Read and observe on page 33 first. illuminates - the vehicle speed is limited by the speed regulator system and/or the automatic distance control. Brake pedal (automatic transmission) Read and observe on page 33 first. lights up – apply the brake. natural gas operation Read and observe Main beam Automatic gearbox on page 33 first. Gearbox overheated The warning light is only shown in the MAXI DOTdisplay. Illuminates ist garage. Transmission problem The warning light is only shown in the MAXI DOTdisplay. Illuminates Gearbox faulty. Stop the vehicle safely! GEARBOX FAULTY WORKSHOP ▶ Park the vehicle, stop driving! Seek help from a specialist garage. Illuminates Illuminates Gearbox in emergency mode. No reverse gear. GEARBOX ERROR REV_ GEAR NOT AVAIL Error: gearbox. Speed is limited. GEARBOX ERROR ▶ You can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek assistance from a spe- cialist garage immediately. Rear seat belt warning light Read and observe on page 33 first. lights up – a rear seat belt is not fastened. on page 33 first. lights up – the main beam or the headlight flasher is switched on. Read and observe You can continue your journey as soon as the warning light disappears. ▶ If the warning light does not go off, stop driving! Seek help from a special- on page 33 first. illuminates - the vehicle is running on natural gas. Read and observe Gearbox overheated. Stop! Log book! STOP VEHICLE GEARBOX OVERHEAT Gearbox overheated. You can drive on. GEARBOX OVERHEATED Transmission overheated. You can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. lights up – a rear seat belt is fastened. When the seat belt is fastened/unfastened, the particular light lights up briefly and indicates the current belt status! Generator Read and observe on page 33 first. lights up – the battery is not being charged whilst the engine is running. ▶ As the vehicle battery during your journey, are all non-essential electrical loads (e.g. Infotainment) must be switched off. ▶ You can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek assistance from a spe- cialist garage immediately. Instruments and warning lights 37 CAUTION If in addition to the light the light lights up while driving, stop driving risk of engine damage! Switch off the engine and seek assistance from a specialist garage. CAUTION If, under the given conditions, it is not possible to top up with engine oil, stop driving - there is a risk of engine damage! Switch off the engine and seek assistance from a specialist garage. Coolant Engine oil level Read and observe on page 33 first. Read and observe on page 33 first. Coolant level too low Illumi- Check engine coolant! Log book! ENGINE COOLANT PLEASE CHECK nates Engine oil level too low Illumi- Oil level: add oil! ADD OIL nates ▶ Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine, and allow the engine to cool down. ▶ Check the coolant level » page 176, Checking and refilling. ▶ Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine, and check the engine oil level, top up If the coolant level is within the specified range and the warning light lights up again, then there may be a malfunction of the cooling fan. The warning light will go out if the bonnet is left open for more than 30 seconds. If the engine oil is not refilled, the warning light will come on again after driving about 100 km. ▶ Switch off the ignition. ▶ Check the fuse for the radiator fan, replace if necessary. if necessary. If the coolant level and fan fuse are both OK but the warning lightlights up again, stop driving! Engine oil level too high Illumi- Reduce oil level! OIL LEVEL TOO HIGH nates ▶ Seek help from a specialist garage. ▶ You can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek assistance from a spe- Coolant temperature too high Illumi- Engine overheat. Stop! Log book! ENGINE OVERHEAT STOP nates ▶ Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine, and allow the engine to cool down. ▶ Continue your journey only after the warning light has disappeared. Engine oil pressure Read and observe on page 33 first. flashes – the engine oil pressure is too low. ▶ Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine, and check the engine oil level. ▶ Even if the oil level is correct, do not drive any further if the warning light is flashing. Also do not leave the engine running at an idling speed. ▶ Seek help from a specialist garage. cialist garage immediately. Fault on the engine oil level sensor Illumi- Oil sensor: Workshop! OIL SENSOR WORKSHOP nates ▶ You can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek assistance from a spe- cialist garage immediately. CAUTION If, under the given conditions, it is not possible to top up with engine oil, stop driving - there is a risk of engine damage! Switch off the engine and seek assistance from a specialist garage. Lamp failure Read and observe on page 33 first. illuminates – one of the lamps is faulty. 38 Using the system A message will appear in the display about the affected lamp. Diesel particle filter (diesel) Read and observe on page 33 first. The diesel particulate filter separates the soot particles from the exhaust. The soot particles collect in the diesel particulate filter where they are burnt on a regular basis. illuminates – the filter is clogged with soot. To clean the filter, and where traffic conditions permit » , drive as follows for at least 15 minutes or until the indicator light goes out. 4. or gear 5 engaged (automatic gearbox: PositionD / S). Vehicle speed at least 70 km/h. Engine speed between 1800-2500 rpm. If the filter is properly cleaned, the warning light extinguishes. If the filter is not properly cleaned, the warning light does not go out and the warning light begins to flash. ▶ You can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek assistance from a spe- cialist garage immediately. WARNING ■ Always adjust the speed and driving style to the actual weather, road, ter- rain and traffic conditions. ■ The diesel particulate filter reaches very high temperatures - there is a fire hazard and serious injury could be caused. Therefore, never stop the vehicle at places where the underside of your vehicle can come into contact with flammable materials, such as dry grass, undergrowth, leaves, spilled fuel etc. CAUTION ■ As long as the warning light illuminates, one must take into account an increased fuel consumption and a power reduction of the engine. Note We encourage you to avoid constant short journeys. This will improve the combustion process of the soot particles in the diesel particulate filter. Windscreen washer fluid level Read and observe on page 33 first. illuminates – the windscreen washer fluid level is too low. ▶ Top up the windscreen washer fluid» page 174. High beam assistant Read and observe on page 33 first. illuminates – the high beam assistant is activated » page 66, High-beam assistant (Light Assist). START-STOP system Read and observe on page 33 first. The warning lights indicates the state of the START STOP system » page 111, START-STOPsystem. Displaying a low temperature Read and observe on page 33 first. illuminates – the outside temperature is below +4 °C. WARNING Even at temperatures of around +4 °C, black ice may still be on the road surface! You should therefore not only rely on the outside temperature display for accurate information as to whether there is ice on the road. ■ Using diesel fuel with an increased sulphur content can considerably reduce Water in the fuel filter (diesel engine) the life of the diesel particle filter. A ŠKODA partner will be able to tell you which countries use diesel fuel with a high sulphur content. Read and observe on page 33 first. The fuel filter with water separator, filters out dirt and water from the fuel. Instruments and warning lights 39 If too much water is present in the separator, the following information appears on the instrument cluster display. The warning light is only shown in the MAXI DOTdisplay. Illuminates Water in fuel filter. Log book! WATER IN FUEL FILTER ▶ You can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek assistance from a spe- cialist garage immediately. Adaptive Chassis Control (DCC) Read and observe The warning light is only shown in theMAXI DOTdisplay. illuminates – there is a DCC fault. ▶ You can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek assistance from a spe- cialist garage immediately. Automatic Distance Control (ACC) Service Read and observe Read and observe on page 33 first. The warning lights indicate the condition of the ACC system » page 134. Distance warning (Front Assist) Read and observe on page 33 first. illuminates – the safe distance to the vehicle in front is below the minimum. Information on the Front Assist system» page 138. Advance warning / emergency braking (Front Assist) Read and observe on page 33 first. illuminates – the system has recognized the risk of a collision or automatically triggered an emergency braking manoeuvre» page 138. OFF ROADmode Read and observe on page 33 first. illuminates – the conditions for the engagement of OFF ROADmode are met» page 123, OFF ROADmode. flashes – the hill descent assistant is engaged at the moment. 40 Using the system on page 33 first. on page 33 first. illuminates – information regarding a service appointment that is due » page 47, Service interval display. Information system Driver information system 4 Introduction 5 This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Display in the instrument cluster Setting the clock Gear recommendation Auto-check control 6 41 42 42 42 7 8 9 Display in the instrument cluster 10 Door alarm Eco tips Service interval display Outside temperature Speed regulating system / speed limiter Total distance travelled Distance travelled by resetting the memory (trip) Time Warning lights of the START-STOP system Engaged/ recommended gear Selector lever positions for the automatic gearbox Outside temperature Warning lights Driving data (multifunction display) Total distance travelled Distance travelled by resetting the memory (trip) Speed regulating system / speed limiter Service interval display Information messages Door, luggage compartment and bonnet alarm When the door or luggage compartment / bonnet is open, a graphic warning appears in the display. Fig. 21 Display types: MAXI DOT / segment display Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the information system uses the display in the instrument cluster to provide the following information » Fig. 21. 1 2 3 1) An acoustic signal will also sound if you drive the vehicle above 6 km/h when a door is open. Reset counter for distance travelled (trip) › Press button A » Fig. 22 on page 42. Time / symbols of the Infotainment voice control Engaged/ recommended gear Selector lever positions for the automatic gearbox Warning lights of the START-STOP system Compass display1) Detected traffic signs Driving data (multifunction display) Warning lights Information messages Applies to vehicles with factory-installed navigation system. Information system 41 For vehicles with automatic transmission the recommended gear will be shown provided the mode for manual switching (Tiptronic) is selected. Setting the clock Fig. 22 Button in the instrument cluster WARNING The driver is always responsible for selecting the correct gear in different driving situations (e.g. when overtaking). Auto-check control › Switch on the ignition. › Press and hold the button A » Fig. 22until thetime is shown in the display. › Release the button A and the system switches to the hour setting function. › Press the button A again and set the hours. › Wait around 4 seconds, the system switches to the minutes setting. › Press the button A again and set the minutes. › Wait around 4 seconds, the system switches to the initial setting. The time can also be set in Infotainment » Owner´s Manual Infotainment. Certain functions and conditions of individual vehicle systems are checked continuously when the ignition is switched on. If there is a fault in the system, the following message will appear in the display of the instrument cluster. As long as the faults are not rectified the messages are always shown. After the message is displayed for the first time, the warning lights (danger) or (warning) continue to be displayed. Operation of the information system Operation via the operating lever Fig. 24 Buttons on the control lever Gear recommendation Fig. 23 Information on the selected gear / Gear recommendation A suitable engaged gear or, where appropriate, a recommended gear is displayed, with the aim of conserving the life of the engine and increasing driving efficiency. Display » Fig. 23 Optimal gear engaged Recommended gear (e.g. means that it is advantageous to switch from 3. to 4. gear) 42 Using the system Operating the multifunction display A Press (up or down) - Select data / Setting values B Press Show / confirm entry Operating the MAXI DOT display A Press (up or down) - move to the selected menu Hold (up or down) - display main menu B Press - confirm selected menu item Operation via the multifunction steering wheel Driving data (Multifunction display) Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects: 43 44 44 Information overview Warning when exceeding the set speed Memory Fig. 25 Buttons/dials on the multifunction steering wheel Buttons/dials on the multifunction steering wheel Switch on/off voice control A Turn - sets the volume Press - sound on / off Skip to next track/station Switch to previous track/station Display the assistance systems menu Press - display the telephone menu; accept call/ hang up; call selected contact Hold - repeat last call; reject call Operating the multifunction display B Turn - select data / set values Press Show / confirm entry Operating the MAXI DOT display Hold - display main menu Press - return to a previous level in the menu B Turn - move in the selected menu Press - confirm selected menu item Note Depending on equipment not all functions may be available. The system indicates this by means of a text message in the Infotainment display. The driving data display is only possible with the ignition switched on. After the ignition is switched on, the function that was last selected before switching off the ignition is displayed. If vehicles with MAXI DOTdisplay do not show the driving data after switching on the ignition, select the menu item Driving data in the main menu and confirm » page 45, MAXI DOT-Display. The units and the display of some information can be set in Infotainment » Owner´s Manual Infotainment. Information overview Overview of driving data (depending on the vehicle equipment). Range - Drive distance in km which can be covered with the existing tank capacity and with the same driving style. If you drive more efficiently this value can increase. With G-TEC vehicles the following details are displayed - total range / with natural gas / petrol. Average fuel consumption - Is calculated continuously since the last time that the memory was erased. After erasing the memory, no data will appear for the first 100 m driven. With G-TEC vehicles, the average consumption of fuel currently being used is displayed. Current fuel consumption - When the vehicle is stationary or moving slowly, the fuel consumption is displayed in l/h (in models in some countries the following appears --,- km/l). With G-TEC vehicles the current consumption of the fuel currently being used is displayed ( with regards to a stationary or slow moving vehicle, the natural gas consumption is displayed in kg/h). Oil temperatureif the temperature is lower than 50 °C or if there is a fault in the system for checking the oil temperature, thesymbols are displayed. Information system 43 Warning at when the preset speed is exceededallows the setting of a speed limit where, if exceeded, an acoustic warning signal and a warning message appears on the display of the instrument cluster. Traffic sign recognition - traffic signs display » page 145, Traffic sign recognition. Current Speed - Digital speedometer. Average speed - Value constantly recalculated, for distance since last clearing the memory. After erasing the memory, no data will appear for the first 300 m driven. Distance driven - Distance driven since the memory was last cleared. Driving time - Driving time since last clearing the memory. Comfort consumers - information about the total consumption of the comfort consumers in l/h and a list of three consumers (e.g. air conditioning etc.), which have the largest share of fuel consumption. Refill amount1)After the consumption of about 10 litres of fuel from the fully refuelled tank, an amount of fuel is displayed in l. This amount can now be safely refilled. Natural gas qualityThe details of the quality of natural gas are displayed as a percentage of between 70% to 100%. The higher the value of natural gas, the lower is the consumption. Coolant temperature - If the coolant temperature is in the range 70-120 °C, the engine operating temperature has been reached. If the temperature is below 70 ° C, high engine speeds and straining the engine should be avoided. If the temperature is over 120°C, the warning light» page 38illuminates in the instrument cluster . Warning when exceeding the set speed The system offers the possibility to set a speed limit beyond which an acoustic warning signal will sound and the following warning message appears in the display of the instrument cluster. Adjust the speed limit while the vehicle is stationary › Select the menu item Warning at at () or () and confirm. › Set the desired speed limit is 5 km/h steps. 1) Only valid for some countries. 44 Using the system › Confirm the set value, or wait several seconds; your settings will be saved automatically. Adjusting the speed limit while the vehicle is moving › Select the menu item Warning at at () or () and confirm. › Drive at the desired speed. › Confirm the current speed as the speed limit. The set speed limit can be manually adjusted later if needed. Reset speed limit › Select the menu item Warning at at () or () and confirm. › By confirming the speed stored in the memory, the speed limit is reset. The speed limit set mode is stored even after the ignition is switched off and on. After a gap between driving exceeding 2 hours, the pre-set speed limit is deactivated. Memory Fig. 26 Memory display: MAXI DOT display ()/segment display () The system saves the data in the three memories described below which are displayed at the position A » Fig. 26. Since start ( ) Or “1” ( ) Driving data is stored from when the ignition is switched on to when it is switched off. If the trip is continued within 2 hours after switching off the ignition, new data will also flow into the calculation of the current driving information. If the trip is interrupted for more than 2 hours, the memory is automatically erased. Long-term ( ) And “2” ( ) The memory gathers driving data from any number of individual journeys up to a total of 99 hours and 59 minutes driving time or 9 999 kilometres driven. The indicator is automatically set back to zero if one of the indicated values is exceeded. Since refuel ( ) or “3” ( ) The driving data is stored in the memory since the last fuel refuelling. The memory is erased automatically the next time you fill up. › To choose the memory bank, confirm the selected indication again and select the desired memory. Main menu items (depending on vehicle equipment) ■ Driving data » page 43 ■ Assist systems » page 46 ■ Navigation » page 45 ■ Audio » page 45 ■ Telephone » page 46; ■ Vehicle » page 42, Auto-check control ■ Lap timer » page 46, Menu item Lap timer (Stop watch) Note ■ If warning messages are displayed, these messages must first be confirmed › To delete the memory bank of the chosen selection, hold down the button to access the main menu. ■ The display language can also be set in Infotainment » Owner's Manual -Infotainment. The following driving data is stored in different memory banks. ▶ Average fuel consumption. ▶ Distance driven. ▶ Average speed. ▶ Driving time. The following information is displayed in the Navigation menu item. confirming the selection. Menu itemNavigation ▶ Driving recommendations ▶ Compass ▶ Last destinations Note Disconnecting the vehicle battery will delete all memory data. Menu itemAudio MAXI DOT-Display The following information is displayed in the Audio menu item. Introduction Radio ▶ Station currently being played (name/frequency). ▶ The selected frequency range (e.g. FM) optionally with the number of the station button (e.g. FM 3), if the station is stored in the memory list. ▶ List of available stations (if more than 5 stations can be received). ▶ TP traffic announcements. This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Menu itemNavigation Menu itemAudio Menu itemTelephone Menu itemAssist systems Menu item Lap timer (Stop watch) 45 45 46 46 46 The MAXI DOT display is a user interface which, depending on the equipment configuration, provides information about Infotainment, the multifunction display, the assistance systems etc. Media ▶ Name of the track being played, if necessary, further information regarding title (e.g. artist, album name), if this information is stored as a so called ID3 tag on the audio source. The menus with details can be operated and displayed using the buttons on the operating lever or the multifunction steering wheel » page 42. Information system 45 Menu itemTelephone The call list with the following symbols is displayed in the Telephone menu item. Incoming call Outgoing call Missed call Symbols in the display Charge status of the telephone battery1) Signal strength1) A telephone is connected to the unit Missed calls (if there are several missed calls, the number of calls is shown next to the symbol) Switch-off microphone Menu itemAssist systems The following systems are activated/deactivated in the Assist systems menu item. ▶ Front Assist ▶ Lane Assist Menu item Lap timer (Stop watch) The Lap timer function offers the possibility of calculating the lap time, for example when driving on a race course. The measured time is shown in the display. The calculated times are displayed in minutes, seconds and tenths of seconds. The following functions are available. ■ Start - start the timing manually or continue the interrupted measurement ■ Since start - Start the timer automatically upon start-up ■ Statistics - Evaluate and reset the measured times Time measurement ▶ To start the measurement manually, choose the menu itemLap timer - start . ▶ To start the measurement automatically, choose the menu item Lap timer Since Start . Timing will begin automatically when starting up. ▶ To start the measurement of the next lap during time measurement, choose the menu item new lap. During timing, information about the fastest and the last lap time are also shown in the display. Measure split time ▶ During the timing, select the menu item Split time. The split time data is displayed for about 5 seconds in the display. The split time can be measured repeatedly during a round. Stop measurement ▶ During the timing, press the menu item Stop. The time measurement is stopped, the following functions are now available. ■ Continue - Continue measurement of the current lap time ■ New lap - Start measurement of the next lap time. ■ Abort lap - Cancel the timer (the aborted lap time is not stored) ■ Hang up - End timing (the aborted lap time is stored) Evaluate recorded times ▶ Select the menu item Lap timer - Statistics. The following information is displayed. ▶ Fastest: - The fastest lap ▶ Slowest: - The slowest lap ▶ Average: - The average lap time ▶ Overall time: - The total of all the lap times Reset measured times ▶ Select the menu item Lap timer - Statistics - Reset. WARNING ■ Concentrate fully at all times on your driving! As the driver, you are fully responsible for the operation of your vehicle. ■ Only use the Lap timer when you are in any traffic situation where you have full control over the vehicle. 1) This function is only supported by some mobile phones. 46 Using the system Note ■ The system allows the measurement of up to 11 lap times. ■ The measurement of the individual lap time is ended after 99 hr., 59 min. and 59 sec. After this time has been reached, the measurement of the new lap time starts automatically. ■ The measured times cannot be reset individually. ■ If the measured times are not reset, then these are stored even after turning off the ignition. Service interval display Service messages Messages before reaching the scheduled service date Before the next service date has been reached, after switching on the ignition, the symbol as well as a message about the mileage or days until the next service event appears in the display. Messages upon reaching scheduled service date Once the service interval is reached, the symbolappears in the display after the ignition is switched on, together with the message. Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Displaying the distance and days until the next service interval Service messages Resetting the service interval display The details regarding the remaining kilometres or days until the next scheduled service can also be displayed in the Infotainment » Owner´s Manual Infotainment. 47 47 47 The service interval display shows the kilometres or days until the next service event. Information regarding service intervals » page 162. Displaying the distance and days until the next service interval Fig. 27 Button in the instrument cluster Resetting the service interval display We recommend that the display reset is completed by a specialist garage. We recommend that you do not reset the service interval display yourself. Incorrectly setting the service interval display could cause problems to the vehicle. Variable service interval For vehicles with variable service intervals, after resetting the oil change service display in a specialist garage, the values of the new service interval are displayed, which are based on the previous operating conditions of the vehicle. These values are then continuously matched according to the actual operating conditions of the vehicle. › Switch on the ignition. › Press and hold the button A » Fig. 27until theService menu item is shown in the display. › Release the button A . In the display, the symbolappears for 4 seconds along with the following message for the kilometres or days to the next service appointment. Information system 47 SmartGate connection to SmartGate using Wi-Fi Introduction to the subject This type of connection is intended for external devices running Android and iOS operating systems. Fig. 28 QR code with reference to the ŠKODA websites Connecting to an Android external device › Switch on the ignition. › Switch on Wi-Fi in the external device that is to be connected and search for available Wi-Fi networks (see Owner's Manual for the external device). › In the menu of the detected networks, select the “SmartGate_...” menu item. › Enter the password (vehicle identification number using upper-case let1) ters» page 49). › In the external device that is to be connected to, start the SmartGate application. SmartGate is a system that transmits certain driving data (such as fuel consumption, speed or similar) via Wi-Fi and Wi-Fi Direct. › Then follow the instructions in the manual, which is included in the SmartGate application. The ŠKODA applications installed in a supported external device (e.g. telephone, tablet) give the option to further transmit the received data. With SmartGate, a maximum of four external devices can be connected simultaneously using Wi-Fi, with as many launched ŠKODA applications as required. Some ŠKODA applications can be displayed in the Infotainment display by means of a SmartLinkconnection » Owner´s Manual Infotainment. Connecting to an external iOS device › Switch on the ignition. › Switch on Wi-Fi in the external device that is to be connected and search for available Wi-Fi networks (see Owner's Manual for the external device). › In the menu of the detected networks, select the “SmartGate_...”1) menu item. › Enter the password (vehicle identification number using upper-case letters» page 49). Read in the QR code» Fig. 28 using the respective application on your external deviceor enter the following address in the web browser to open the website with an overview of the available applications, compatible devices and other information about SmartGate. http://go.skoda.eu/connectivity-smartgate CAUTION ■ To increase the access security to the transmitted vehicle data, once the ŠKODA application start, you are asked to change the password/PIN code if the default password/PIN code has not yet been changed » page 49, Password/PIN code. It is not possible to start the ŠKODA application without changing it. ■ ŠKODA accepts no responsibility for any problems caused by incompatibility or improper functioning of the external devices. 1) The last 6 characters of the VIN vehicle identification number of your vehicle are displayed at position .... 48 Using the system With SmartGate, a maximum of four external devices can be connected simultaneously using Wi-Fi. In these external devices, up to four ŠKODA applications can be started simultaneously. Disconnection The connection can be switched off in one of the following ways. › Switch off the ignition for longer than 5 seconds (for vehicles with a starter button, switch off the engine and open the driver's door). › End the connection in the SmartGate application. › Switch off Wi-Fi in the connected external device. Automatic connection If the communication device has already had a connection with SmartGate, then the connection is automatically restored under the following conditions. The ignition is switched on. Wi-Fi is switched on in the external device that is to be connected to. The external device that is to be connected to stores the password required for the connection check. Connection to SmartGate using Wi-Fi direct This type of connection is intended for external devices running the Android operating system. Automatic connection If the external device once had a connection with SmartGate, then the connection is automatically restored after the ignition is started. SmartGate web interface SmartGate parameters can be set in the SmartGate web interface. The following address must be entered in the web browser of the external device that is connected with SmartGate. HTTP://192.168.123.1 The setting changes are only effective after pressing the buttons “Save” → “Reboot”. Connection set-up › Switch on the ignition. › In the external device that is to be connected to, start the SmartGate appli- Password/PIN code › In the application, change the connection type to Wi-Fi direct. › Then follow the instructions in the manual, which is included in the cation. The password for the Wi-Fi connection preset by the factory is the complete vehicle identification number (entered in upper case); the PIN code for the WiFi direct connection is the last 6 digits of the vehicle identification number. SmartGate application. The password for the connection to SmartGate _...1) includes the last six digits of the vehicle identification number » page 49. After changing the password/PIN, the connection to SmartGate must be re-established on the external device to be connected using the new password or new PIN code. With SmartGate, a maximum of two external devices can be connected simultaneously using Wi-Fi direct, with as many launched ŠKODA applications as required. › Open the SmartGate web interface » page 49, SmartGate web interface. › In the menu item “WPA / WPA2 key:” enter the new password (8 to 63 alpha- If you want to connect to SmartGate in a different vehicle, you must make a new connection in the SmartGate application. › Confirm the password change by tapping on the “Save” interface. › Restart SmartGate by tapping on the “Reboot” interface. Disconnection The connection can be switched off in one of the following ways. › Switch off the ignition for longer than 5 seconds (for vehicles with a starter button, switch off the engine and open the driver's door). › End the connection in the SmartGate application. › Switch off Wi-Fi in the connected external device. 1) 2) Changing the password for the Wi-Fi connection numeric characters and special characters, small and capital letters) . 2) Changing the PIN code for the Wi-Fi Direct connection › Open the SmartGate web interface » page 49, SmartGate web interface. › In the menu item “WiFi Direct PIN:” Enter the new PIN code (6 digits). › Confirm the PIN code change by tapping on the “Save” interface. › Restart SmartGate by tapping on the “Reboot”2) interface. Note If you have forgotten your password for the connection to SmartGate, SmartGate must be reset to factory settings in a specialised workshop. The last 6 characters of the VIN vehicle identification number of your vehicle are displayed at position .... If the “Reboot” interface is not displayed, you must manually restore the web browser display. Information system 49 CAUTION Unlocking and opening ■ Each key contains electronic components; therefore it must be protected against moisture and severe shocks. Unlocking and locking ■ Keep the key grooves clean. Impurities (textile fibres, dust etc.) have a nega- Introduction tive effect on the functionality of the locking cylinder and ignition lock. This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Locking/unlocking using the key via the lock cylinder Unlocking/locking with the remote control key Unlocking/locking - KESSY Vehicle locking / unlocking with the central locking button SafeLock Individual settings Opening/closing a door Child safety lock Malfunctions Locking/unlocking using the key via the lock cylinder 50 51 51 52 52 52 53 53 54 The vehicle is equipped with a central locking system which makes it possible to unlock / lock all the doors, the fuel filler flap and boot lid simultaneously. The door unlocking can be adjusted individually » page 52. The unlocking of the vehicle is displayed by the turn signal lights flashing twice. If you unlock the vehicle and do not open a door or the boot lid within the next 45 seconds, the vehicle will lock again automatically. The locking of the vehicle is displayed by the turn signal lights flashing once. If the driver's door has been opened, the vehicle cannot be locked. If the doors or the luggage compartment lid remain open after the vehicle has been locked, the turn signal lights do not flash until they have been closed. WARNING ■ Never leave the key in the vehicle when you exit the vehicle. Unauthor- ised persons (e.g. children) could lock the vehicle, turn on the ignition or start the engine - danger of injury and accidents! ■ When leaving the vehicle, never leave persons who are not completely independent, such as children, unattended in the vehicle. These individuals might not be able to leave the vehicle on their own or to help themselves. Can be fatal at very high or very low temperatures! 50 Using the system Fig. 29 Left side of the vehicle: Turning the key for unlocking and locking the vehicle Read and observe and on page 50 first. Unlocking/locking the vehicle with the key » Fig. 29 Unlocking the vehicle Locking the vehicle CAUTION If the locking cylinder is provided with a cap» page 196, to unlock / lock the vehicle with key, the cap must be removed beforehand. Unlocking/locking with the remote control key Unlocking/locking - KESSY Fig. 30 Key with pop-out key bit Read and observe and on page 50 first. Description of the key » Fig. 30 Unlock button Lock button Depending on equipment fitted: ▶ Unlock boot lid (by pressing) / unlatch and partially open (by holding) (vehicles with manual valve operation) ▶ Open/close/ the boot lid Stop movement of the boot lid (vehicles with electric folding operation) A Button for popping out/pushing in the key bit B Battery status warning light - if the warning light does not flash when you press a button on the key, the battery is discharged Unlock/unlatch the boot lid (vehicles fitted with manual folding operation) By pressing lightly on the buttonthe lid is unlocked. Bypressing downon the buttonthe lid is unlocked and unlatched (partopened). If the lid is unlocked or released with the button , then the lid is automatically locked after closing. The period of time after which the flap is locked can be set » page 56. CAUTION ■ The remote control may be affected by signal superimposition by transmitters close to the car. ■ The range of the remote control key is about 30 m. The battery must be replaced if the central locking only reacts to the remote control at a distance of less than 3 m away » page 195. Fig. 31 Vehicle unlocking / vehicle locking Read and observe and on page 50 first. The KESSY system (Keyless Entry Start Exit System) enables unlocking and locking of the vehicle without actively using the remote control key. › Grip the door handle tounlock » Fig. 31the vehicle. › Touch the sensor on the door handle with your finger tolock» Fig. 31 - the vehicle. When unlocking/locking the vehicle, the key must be at a maximum distance of approximately 1.5 m from the front door handle. Information on locking On vehicles fitted with automatic gearbox, the selector lever must be moved into the position P before unlocking. The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside if the ignition has not been turned off. After locking the car, it is not possible to unlock within the next 2 seconds by touching the door handle. This can be used to check whether the vehicle is locked. Protection against inadvertently locking the key in the vehicle If one of the doors is closed after locking the vehicle and the key with which the vehicle was locked remains in the passenger compartment, the vehicle is automatically unlocked. After automatically unlocking, the turn signal lights will flash four times. If no door is opened within 45 seconds, the vehicle is automatically locked again. Unlocking and opening 51 If the boot lid is closed after locking the vehicle and the key with which the vehicle was locked remains in the luggage compartment, the lid is automatically unlatched (partially opened). After automatically unlocking, the turn signal lights will flash four times. The boot lid remains unlatched (partially opened); the other doors remain locked. CAUTION Some types of gloves can affect the unlocking or locking device via the sensors in the door handle. Vehicle locking / unlocking with the central locking button Fig. 32 Central locking button SafeLock Read and observe and on page 50 first. SafeLock prevents the doors from behind opened from inside as well as window operation. This makes an attempted break-in to the vehicle more difficult. Activating SafeLock is activated when the vehicle is locked from the outside. This function is pointed out by the following message on the display of the instrument cluster after the ignition is switched off. Check SAFELOCK! Log book! CHECK SAFELOCK Activation display When SafeLock is activated the warning light in the driver's door flashes for 2 seconds in rapid succession, then starts to flash at longer intervals. Switching off ▶ By locking twice within 2 seconds. ▶ or: By deactivating the interior monitor and the towing protection » page 55. Read and observe and on page 50 first. Conditions for the locking/unlocking using the central locking button. The vehicle is not locked from the outside. None of the doors are open. › Tolock, press the button» Fig. 32. Locking is displayed in the button by the illumination of the symbol. The following applies after locking. ▶ Opening the doors and the boot lid from the outside is not possible. ▶ The doors can be unlocked and opened from the inside by a single pull on the opening lever of the respective door. WARNING Doors locked from the inside make it difficult for rescuers to get into the vehicle in an emergency – danger to life! The warning light in the driver door flashes rapidly for about 2 seconds, then goes out and starts to flash at longer intervals after about 30 seconds. If the vehicle is locked and the safe securing system is switched off, the door can be opened separately from the inside by a single pull on opening lever. The SafeLock switches on the next time the vehicle is locked. WARNING If the car is locked and the safe securing system activated, no people must remain in the car as it will then not be possible to either unlock a door or open a window from the inside. The locked doors make it more difficult for rescuers to get into the vehicle in an emergency – risk to life! Individual settings Read and observe and on page 50 first. The following functions of the central locking system can be set individually in the Infotainment » Owner´s Manual Infotainment. 52 Using the system All doors This function allows you to unlock all doors, the boot lid and the fuel filler flap. Single door The function allows you to unlock only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap with the radio remote control. KESSY allows the unlocking of a single door which is in the vicinity of the key, as well as the fuel filler flap. The other doors and the boot lid are only unlocked once the door handle is unlocked or touched. Doors on a vehicle side This function enables you to unlock both doors on the driver's side and the fuel filler flap with the radio remote control unit. KESSY allows the unlocking of both doors which are in the vicinity of the key, as well as the fuel filler flap. The other doors and the boot lid are only unlocked once the door handle is unlocked or touched. › To open from the inside pull the door opening lever B and push the door away from you. › To the lock from the inside grab handle C and close the door. WARNING ■ The door must be closed properly, otherwise it could open whilst the ve- hicle is in motion - There is a risk to life! ■ Only open and close the door when there is no one in the opening/closing range – There is a risk of injury! ■ Never drive with the doors open - there is a risk of death! ■ An opened door can close automatically if there is a strong wind or the vehicle is on an incline – risk of injury! Child safety lock Automatic locking/unlocking This function enables the locking of all doors and the boot lid from a speed of 15 km / h. Opening the doors and the boot lid from the outside is not possible. The renewed unlocking of the doors and the boot lid is carried out when the ignition key is removed or when the door is opened from inside (depending on the individual setting for the central locking system). Opening/closing a door Fig. 34 Rear door: Child safety system switch on / off Read and observe and on page 50 first. The child safety lock prevents the rear door from being opened from the inside. The door can only be opened from the outside. › Toturn on the child safety lock, turn the vehicle key to position » Fig. 34. › Toturn off the child safety lock, turn the vehicle key to position. Fig. 33 Door handle/door opening lever Read and observe and on page 50 first. › To open from the outside, unlock the vehicle and pull the door handle A in the direction of arrow » Fig. 33. Unlocking and opening 53 Malfunctions Read and observe and on page 50 first. Synchronise remote If the buttons on the remote control key have been depressed several times beyond the effective range of the equipment or the battery has been replaced in the remote control key and the vehicle cannot be unlocked with the remote control, the key must be synchronised. › Press any button on the remote control key. › Unlock the door with the key via the lock cylinder within 1 minute of pressing the button. Fault with the central locking If the warning light in the driver's door initially flashes quickly for around 2 seconds, and then illuminates for 30 seconds without interruption before flashing again slowly, you will need to seek the assistance of a specialist garage. A failure in the central locking system can lead the vehicle doors and the boot lid can emergency lock or emergency release » page 196. Failure of the system KESSY If there is a fault in the KESSY system, the appropriate error message is displayed in the instrument cluster. Low voltage of the key battery If the voltage of the key battery is too low, a message appears in the display of the instrument cluster referring to the need to replace the battery. Replace the battery » page 195. Anti-theft alarm system Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Alarm trigger Interior monitor and towing protection 54 55 The alarm system triggers audible and visual signals if an attempt is made to break into the vehicle (hereafter referred to as alarm). The alarm system is activated automatically approximately 30 seconds after the vehicle is locked. This is automatically disabled after release. 54 Using the system CAUTION Before leaving the vehicle, it must be checked that all of the windows, doors and the sliding/tilting roof are locked in order to ensure the full functionality of the anti-theft alarm system. Note The alarm system has its own power source, the service life of which is 5 years. Alarm trigger Read and observe on page 54 first. The alarm is triggered when one of the following unauthorised actions is activated on the vehicle with an activated warning system. ▶ Opening the bonnet. ▶ Opening the boot lid. ▶ Opening the doors. ▶ Manipulation of the ignition lock. ▶ Towing the vehicle. ▶ Movement in the vehicle. ▶ Sudden and significant voltage drop of the electrical system. ▶ Uncoupling the trailer. An alarm is triggered also when the driver's door is unlocked and opened by the lock cylinder. The alarm is switched off by pressing thebutton on the key or switching on the ignition. Interior monitor and towing protection Fig. 35 Button for interior monitor and towing protection Boot lid with manual operation Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects: 55 56 Opening / closing the boot lid Delayed locking of the boot lid WARNING ■ Never drive with the luggage compartment lid fully opened or slightly ajar Read and observe on page 54 first. The interior monitor detects movements inside the locked vehicle and then triggers the alarm. The anti-towing detects tilts in the locked vehicle and then triggers the alarm. Both systems should be deactivated if there is a possibility that the alarm will be triggered by movements (e.g. by people or animals) within the vehicle interior or if the vehicle has to be transported (e.g. by train or ship) or towed. Deactivation › Switch off the ignition and open the driver's door. › Press the button on the centre column on the driver side» Fig. 35,the symbol illuminates in the button. › Lock the vehicle within 30 seconds. otherwise exhaust gases may get into the interior of the vehicle – risk of poisoning! ■ Ensure that the lock is properly engaged after closing the lid. Otherwise, the lid might open suddenly while the vehicle is moving, even if the lid was locked – There is a risk of an accident! ■ Make sure that when closing the boot lid, no body parts are crushed there is danger of injury! ■ Do not press on the rear window when closing the luggage compartment lid, it could crack – There is a risk of injury! Opening / closing the boot lid Disabling the two systems switches off SafeLock. CAUTION The opened glasses storage compartment reduces the effectiveness of the interior monitor. To ensure the full functionality of the interior monitor, the glasses storage compartment must always be closed before locking the vehicle. Fig. 36 Opening / closing tailgate Read and observe on page 55 first. › To open the lid, press button A in the direction of arrow 1 » Fig. 36. › Raise the lid in the direction of the arrow 2 . › To close, grab the mount B and pull in the direction of arrow 3 . Unlocking and opening 55 Note Button A » Fig. 36is disabled when starting off or driving at a speed of over 5 km/h. The button is reactivated when the vehicle has stopped and a door is opened. WARNING (Continued) ■ Make sure that when closing the lid, no body parts are crushed – risk of injury! ■ When you open the boot lid make sure that there are no persons in the opening area of the lid - there is a danger of injury! Delayed locking of the boot lid Read and observe CAUTION Do not attempt to close the lid manually during the electrical closing process there is a risk of damaging the electric lid operation. on page 55 first. If the boot lid is unlocked with the buttonon the key, then the boot lid is automatically locked after closing. The period after which the boot lid is locked automatically can be extended by a specialist garage. CAUTION There is a risk of unwanted entry into the vehicle before the boot lid is locked automatically. Electric boot lid Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Description of operation Set the top position of the lid Malfunctions 57 57 57 The boot lid (hereinafter referred to as lid) can be operated electrically and manually in the event of an emergency » page 57. WARNING ■ Ensure that the lock is properly engaged after closing the lid. Otherwise, the lid might open suddenly while the vehicle is moving, even if the lid was locked – There is a risk of an accident! ■ Never drive with the lid open or unlatched, as otherwise exhaust gases may get into the interior of the vehicle – risk of poisoning! ■ Only open and close the lid when no one is located in the opening/closing range – risk of injury! 56 Using the system CAUTION ■ Check that no objects are located in the opening/closing area which could hinder the movement (e.g. cargo on the roof rack or on the trailer etc.) - there is a risk of damage to the lid! ■ In certain circumstances, if the lid is loaded (e.g by a thick layer of snow), the opening process of the lid can be interrupted. Remove the snow from the lid to re-enable the electrical operation. ■ If the lid closes automatically (e.g. under load of snow), you will hear an intermittent beep. ■ Always close the flap before disconnecting the battery. Note If you rapidly enter the vehicle during the opening or closing process of the lid, the whole vehicle may jerk and, as a result, the movement of the lid can be interrupted. Description of operation Set the top position of the lid Read and observe and on page 56 first. The top position of the lid can be adjusted (e.g. in a limited space to open the lid due to the garage height or for a more comfortable operation, depending on the height of the person). Adjusting the top position of the lid › Stop the lid in the desired position. › Press and hold button B » Fig. 37 on page 57until you hear an acoustic signal. Adjusting the top starting position of the lid › Carefully raise the flap manually to the limit. › Press and hold button B » Fig. 37 on page 57until you hear an acoustic signal. Fig. 37 Lid operation Read and observe and on page 56 first. Ways to open the lid ▶ By pressing the handle A » Fig. 37. ▶ By holding the button C . ▶ By holding the button D on the key. Ways to close the lid ▶ Press pressing the button B » Fig. 37. ▶ By pressing the handle A . Ways to stop the lid movement ▶ Press pressing the button B » Fig. 37. ▶ By pressing the button C . ▶ By holding the button D on the key. ▶ By pressing the handle A . Audible signals An acoustic signal is sounded when opening/closing the lid by means of the button C or D . Note The top position which is reached when the lid opens automatically, is always lower than the maximum top position which can be reached when the lid is opened manually. Malfunctions Read and observe and on page 56 first. Examples of operational malfunctions Description of the malfuncPossible solutions tion The lid cannot be opened The lid does not react to an opening signal Unlocking the lid » page 196 Removing a possible obstacle (e.g. snow), reopening the lid » page 57 Press the handle A » Fig. 37 on page 57and pull the lid upwards Unlocking and opening 57 Description of the malfunction The lid remains in the top position The lid is open and the battery was disconnected CAUTION Possible solutions ■ Keep the windows clean (free of ice and similar) to ensure the correct func- tionality of the electric windows. ■ Always close the electric windows before disconnecting the battery. Manual closing of the lid Close manually Close the door slowly, push down the lid, push in the lock on the centre of the edge, above the ŠKODA logo. Note If the windows are opened, dust as well as other dirt can get into the vehicle and in addition the wind noise is more at certain speeds. Mechanical window lifters Window operation Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Mechanical window lifters Electric Windows Opening/closing the windows in the front passenger door and in the rear doors Force limiter Window convenience operation Malfunctions 58 59 59 59 60 60 The windows can be operated mechanically by means of the handle attached to the respective door panel. The windows can be operated electrically from the following locations; all windows from the driver's seat and also via the buttons for the windows in the passenger door or the rear doors. WARNING ■ Always close the window carefully and in a controlled manner. Otherwise these could cause severe crushing injuries. ■ The system is fitted with a force limiter » page 59. If there is an obstacle, the closing process is stopped and the window goes down by several centimetres. The windows should nevertheless be closed carefully – risk of injury! 58 Using the system Fig. 38 Window operation: left/right Read and observe and on page 58 first. › To open, turn the crank in the direction of arrow A » Fig. 38. › To close, turn the crank in the direction of arrow B . Note Electric Windows ■ After switching off the ignition, the windows can still open and close for Fig. 39 Buttons for window levers about 10 minutes. ■ After the driver or front passenger door is opened, the operation of the win- dow is only possible with the button A » Fig. 39, in which case this is pressed or pulled for approx. 2 seconds. Opening/closing the windows in the front passenger door and in the rear doors Read and observe and Fig. 40 Power window button on page 58 first. All windows can be operated from the driver's seat. The window in the front passenger door and the windows in the rear doors are operated via the button in each door. Power window buttons » Fig. 39 A Left front door B Right front door C Left rear door D Right rear door: E Deactivate/activate the buttons in the rear doors (the deactivation may be advantageous if, for example, children are transported on the rear seats) › To open, lightly press the appropriate button down and hold it until the win- dow has moved into the desired position. › or: press the button to the stop, the window automatically opens fully. Renewed pressing of the button causes the window to stop. › To close, pull gently on the top edge of the corresponding button and hold until the window has moved into the desired position. › or: pull the button briefly to the stop, the window automatically closes fully. Renewed pulling of the button causes the window to stop immediately. › To deactivate/activate the buttons in the rear doors, press the E button. If the buttons in the rear doors are deactivated, the warning light illuminates in the E button. Read and observe and on page 58 first. There is a button in the front passenger door and in the rear doors for that window. › To open, lightly press the appropriate button underneath and hold it until the window has moved into the desired position. › or: press the button underneath briefly, the window automatically opens fully. Renewed pressing of the button causes the window to stop. › To close, push the corresponding button above briefly and hold until the window has moved into the desired position. › or: press the button above briefly, the window automatically opens fully. Renewed pressing of the button causes the window to stop. Force limiter Read and observe and on page 58 first. The electrical power windows are fitted with a force limiter. If there is an obstacle, the closing process is stopped and the window goes down by several centimetres. Unlocking and opening 59 If the obstacle prevents the window from being closed during the next 10 seconds, the closing process is interrupted once again and the window goes down by several centimetres. The movement of the window is stopped immediately when the respective button is released. If you attempt to close the window again within 10 seconds of the window being moved down for the second time, even though the obstacle was not yet been removed, the closing process is only stopped. During this time it is not possible to automatically close the window. The force limiter is still switched on. Malfunctions The force limiter is only not operational if you attempt to close the window again within the next 10 seconds – the window will now close with full force! If you wait longer than 10 seconds, the force limiter is switched on again. Window convenience operation Read and observe and on page 58 first. The convenience operation for the window offers the option to open/close all the windows at once (or only the window in the driver's door). Setting, activation and deactivation of the convenience operation» Owner´s Manual Infotainment. Opening › Press and hold the button on the key. › Oder: Keep the key in the locking cylinder of the driver's door in the unlock position until all electrically operated windows are open. › Or:Switch off the ignition, open the driver's door and hold the key A until it stops in the open position » Fig. 39 on page 59. Closing › Press and hold the button on the key. › Or:Keep the key in the locking cylinder of the driver's door in the lock position until all the electrically operated windows are closed. › Or:Switch off the ignition, open the driver's door and hold the key A until it stops in the closed position » Fig. 39 on page 59. › In the KESSY system, hold your finger on the sensor on the outside of the door handle of the front door » Fig. 31 on page 51. The convenience operation will only function correctly if all the windows automatically open/close properly. Convenience opening or closing the window using the key in the driver's door locking cylinder is only possible within 45 seconds of locking the vehicle. 60 Using the system Read and observe and on page 58 first. Repeatedly opening and closing the window can cause the window mechanism to overheat and become temporarily blocked. You will be able to operate the window again as soon as the operating mechanism has cooled down. The electric power windows are deactivated after the vehicle battery has been disconnected. After connecting the vehicle battery, the system is activated as follows. Window in the driver door › Switch on the ignition. › Pull the top edge of the button and close the window. › Release the button. › Pull up the respective button and hold for 1 second. Windows in the other doors › Switch on the ignition. › Press the respective key above and close the window. › Release the button. › Pull up the respective button above and hold for 1 second. Panoramic tilt / slide sunroof Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Operation Power limit Convenience operation of sliding / tilting roof Activate operation of the tilt / slide sunroof Manually operated sunblind Sunshade with electric operation Activating operation of the sunshade 61 61 61 61 62 62 62 The panoramic tilt / slide sunroof (hereinafter referred to as tilt / slide sunroof) can only be operated when the ignition is turned on and when the outdoor temperature is above -20 °C. The sliding/tilting roof can still be operated for approx. 10 minutes after switching the ignition off. After opening the driver or front passenger door, it is no longer possible to operate the sliding/tilting roof. WARNING When operating the tilt/slide sunroof and the sunshade, proceed with caution to avoid causing crushing injuries – risk of injury! CAUTION ■ During the winter it may be necessary to remove any ice and snow in the vicinity of the sliding/tilting roof before opening it to prevent any damage to the opening mechanism. ■ Always close the sliding/tilting roof before disconnecting the battery. Operation After turning the switch one stop to position (spring-tensioned position), the tilt / slide sunroof stops in the position in which the intensity of the wind noise is low. After turning the switch further to position , the tilt / slide sunroof opens up to the stop. Power limit Read and observe and on page 61 first. The sliding/tilting roof is fitted with a force limiter. If there is an obstacle, the closing process is stopped and the glass pane retracts by several centimetres. WARNING If the tilt / slide sunroof is closed, by pulling on the recess of the switch in the direction of arrow 2 ,» Fig. 41 on page 61 and the closing process is hindered by an obstacle, then at the third attempt at closing, the force limitation will cease to function (if less than 5 s passes between the individual attempts to close). The tilt / slide sunroof closes with full force - this can cause injury. Convenience operation of sliding / tilting roof Read and observe Fig. 41 Operation of the sliding/tilting roof Read and observe and on page 61 first. Operation of the tilt / slide sunroof » Fig. 41 Open fully Open to the low-noise position A Open partially Close completely 1 Opening (switch in position ) 2 Closing (switch in position ) and on page 61 first. The convenience operation makes it possible to open or close the sliding/tilting roof using the key or the KESSY system via the sensor in the door handle of the front door. › To open out, press and hold the button on the key. › oder:Hold the key in the unlock position in the driver's door lock. › To close, press and hold the button (with KESSY, hold your finger on the sensor on the outside of the door handle of the front door). › oder:Hold the key in the lock position in the driver's door lock. By interrupting the locking process, the closing operation is interrupted. Activate operation of the tilt / slide sunroof Read and observe and on page 61 first. If the tilt / slide sunroof stops working (e.g. after disconnecting and connecting the battery), then the operation must be reactivated. Unlocking and opening 61 › Turn on the ignition and set the switch to position » Fig. 41 on page 61. › Press the switch on the recess E down and pull forwards. The sliding/tilting roof opens/closes again after around 10 seconds. The sunshade can also be operated by pressing and holding the appropriate button (starts movement of the sunshade) and releasing it when the sunshade reaches the desired position. › Release the lever. Activating operation of the sunshade Manually operated sunblind Read and observe Fig. 42 Operation of the sun blind and on page 61 first. If the operation of sunshade is deactivated (e.g. after disconnecting and connecting the battery), then the operation will have to be activated. › Turn on the ignition and set the switch to position » Fig. 43 on page 62. › Press the button and hold down. The sunshade opens and closes again after around 10 seconds. › Release the button. Read and observe and on page 61 first. › To open, pull the handle in the direction of arrow A » Fig. 42. › To close, pull the handle in the direction of arrow B . Sunshade with electric operation Fig. 43 Button for operating the sunshade Read and observe and on page 61 first. Operation of the sunshade » Fig. 43 Open - by pressing (press again - sunshade stops moving) Close - by pressing (press again - sunshade stops moving) 62 Using the system Operating the lights Lights and visibility Lights Fig. 44 Light switch and control dial for the headlight beam range regulation Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Operating the lights Daylight running lights (DAY LIGHT) Turn signal and main beam Automatic driving light control Xenon headlight High-beam assistant (Light Assist) Fog lights/rear fog light Fog lights with the CORNER function COMING HOME / LEAVING HOME Hazard warning light system Parking lights Entry space lighting Driving abroad 63 64 64 65 65 66 66 67 67 67 67 68 68 The lights work only with the ignition on, unless otherwise stated. The layout of the controls on right-hand drive vehicles differs partially from that shown in this layout» Fig. 44 on page 63. WARNING The automatic driving lamp control only operates as a support and does not release the driver from his responsibility to check the light and, if necessary, to switch on the light depending on the light conditions. Note The headlights may mist up temporarily. When the light is on, the light-emitting surface demists after a short time. Read and observe on page 63 first. Toswitch the lights on/off,turn the A » Fig. 44 switch to one of the following positions (equipment-dependent). Switching off lights (except daytime running lights) Switching lights on/off automatically » page 65 Switching on the parking lights or parking lights on both sides » page 67 Switching on the low beam To adjust the headlight range control, turn dial B » Fig. 44in line with the vehicle load » . Front seats occupied, boot empty All seats occupied, boot empty All seats occupied, boot loaded Driver seat occupied, boot loaded The Xenon headlights feature no manual headlight range control. After switching on the ignition, adjust these automatically to the load and driving condition of the vehicle. WARNING Always adjust the headlight beam to meet the following conditions - otherwise there is a risk of an accident. ■ The vehicle does not dazzle other road users, especially oncoming vehicles. ■ The beam range is sufficient for safe driving. Lights and visibility 63 Note ■ If, with a dipped beam, the ignition is turned off, then the dipped beam will Turn signal and main beam automatically switch off and the parking lights will come on. The parking lights are switched off when the ignition key is removed (for vehicles with the KESSY system, after opening the driver's door). ■ If there is a fault in the light switch, the low beam comes on automatically. 1) Fig. 45 Operating lever: Turn signal and main beam operation Daylight running lights (DAY LIGHT) Read and observe on page 63 first. The daytime running lights (hereinafter only referred to as "function") lights the front and rear vehicle area (only valid for some countries). The lights are switched on automatically if the following conditions are met. The light switch is in the position or . The ignition is switched on. The function is activated. Activating/deactivating function on vehicles with Infotainment This function can be activated/deactivated in Infotainment » Infotainment Owner´s Manual. Deactivating on vehicles without Infotainment › Turn off the ignition, pull the indicator / main beam lever towards the steering wheel, push down and hold in this position. › Switch on the ignition and hold the lever in the above position until an audible signal sounds (about 3 s). Activating on vehicles without Infotainment › Turn off the ignition, pull the indicator / main beam lever towards the steering wheel, push down and hold in this position. › Switch on the ignition and hold the lever in the above position until an audible signal sounds (about 3 s). WARNING Always switch on the low beam when visibility is poor. 1) Does not apply to the position , as long as the conditions are met for the COMING HOME function » page 67. 64 Using the system Read and observe on page 63 first. Control stalk positions » Fig. 45 Switch on right turn signal Switch on left turn signal Switch on main beam (spring-tensioned position) Switch on main beam or headlight flasher (spring-loaded position) The main beam can only be switched on when the low beam lights are on. The headlight flasher can be operated even if the ignition is switched off. The turn signal switches off automatically, depending on the steering angle after completing the turn. Use the control stalk to switch on/off the headlight assistant» page 66. Comfort signalling When the operating lever is pressed lightly up or down, the indicator in question flashes three times. If during comfort signalling the operating lever is pressed in the opposite direction, the indicating will stop. Comfort signalling can be activated/deactivated » Owner´s Manual Infotainment. WARNING Only turn on the main beam or the headlight flasher if other road users will not be dazzled. Automatic driving light control CAUTION Poorer visibility is evaluated by a sensor mounted below the windscreen in the holder of the rear-view mirror. Do not cover the sensor - the system can be affected. Xenon headlight Fig. 46 Light switch: AUTO position Read and observe on page 63 first. The Xenon headlights (hereinafter referred to as just system) use the driving data to automatically ensure the for the best possible light cone in front of the vehicle. The system will automatically operate in the following modes: urban, extra-urban, motorway, rain, fog, adjusting the lighting direction of the headlights for road illumination around bends. Read and observe on page 63 first. The light switch is in position » Fig. 46 then depending on the equipment the automatic switch on / off the lights corresponding to the light or weather conditions (rain) takes place. If the light switch is in position , the lettering illuminates next to the light switch. If the light is switched on automatically, the symbolalso illuminates next to the light switch. The system works as long as the light switch is in position . WARNING If there is a system malfunction the headlights are automatically lowered to the emergency position, which prevents a possible dazzling of oncoming traffic. This reduces the cone of light in front of the vehicle. Seek help from a specialist garage. Automatic driving light control in the rain (hereafter referred to as function) The daytime running lights are switched on automatically if the following conditions are met. The function is activated. The light switch is in the position . The windscreen wipers are on for more than 30 s. The light turns off automatically about 4 minutes after turning off the wipers. Setting, activation/deactivation The following functions can be set or activated/deactivated in Infotainment » Owner´s Manual. ▶ Sensitivity adjustment of the sensor for determining the lighting conditions for automatic driving light control ▶ Automatic driving light control during rain Lights and visibility 65 High-beam assistant (Light Assist) WARNING The system is used only for support, thus the driver is not released from his obligation to manually adjust the main or low beam according to the given ambient conditions (e.g. in unfavourable lighting and weather conditions, as when passing poorly lit road users, if necessary, when the visual range of the sensor is limited by an obstacle). CAUTION Do not cover the sensor - the system can be affected. Fog lights/rear fog light Fig. 47 Sensor window for the high-beam assistant / system on / off Read and observe Fig. 48 Light switch – switch on front and rear fog light on page 63 first. The system automatically switches the high beam on/off in accordance with the existing traffic (other vehicles) and environmental conditions (e.g. driving through a lit village). The high beam on/off is controlled by a sensor or a camera » Fig. 47. The system works under the following conditions. The system is activated in Infotainment » Owner´s Manual Infotainment. The light switch is in the position . The system is switched on. The vehicle speed is over 60 km/h or for some countries more than 40 km/h. The windscreen is clean in the sensor area. Switching on and off › To turn onthe system, push the control stalk into the sprung position A » Fig. 47, the warning light illuminates in the display of the instrument cluster. › Toturn off the automatically switched on main beam, push the control stalk into the sprung position B , the » Fig. 47warning light expires. › To manually switch on the main beam, push the control stalk into the sprung position A » Fig. 47, the warning light expires. The headlight switches off automatically when the speed falls below 30 km/h. If there is a fault, the error message will appear in the instrument cluster display. Seek help from a specialist garage. 66 Using the system Read and observe on page 63 first. Switching on the fog lights / rear fog lights is possible if the following conditions apply. The lights switch is in position, or » Fig. 48. › Toswitch onthefog lights,turn the light switch to position 1 ; the warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster. › Toturn on therear fog light, pull the light switch to position 2 , the indicator light will light up in the instrument cluster. If the vehicle is not fitted withfog lights,therear fog lightis switched on by pulling out the light switch to the only possible setting. The fog lights/rear fog light areswitched offin the reverse order. Note While driving with an accessory connected to the trailer socket (e.g. trailer, bike carrier) only the equipment is illuminated by the fog light. The towing device must be installed at the factory or from the ŠKODA original accessories. Fog lights with the CORNER function Read and observe Hazard warning light system on page 63 first. Fig. 49 Button for hazard warning light system The CORNER function automatically switches on the fog lights on the respective side of the vehicle (e.g. when cornering), if the following conditions are met. The turn signal is switched on or the front wheels are turned sharply 1). The vehicle speed is below 40 km/h. The low beam is switched on. The fog lights are not switched on. The two fog lights are switched on when you shift into the reverse gear. Read and observe COMING HOME / LEAVING HOME › Toswitch on/off, press thebutton» Fig. 49. Read and observe When first switched on, the turn signal lights and the warning lightbuttons all flash at the same time as the warning lights in the instrument cluster. on page 63 first. on page 63 first. The function COMING HOME ensures that the vehicle's environment is illuminated after switching off the ignition and opening the driver's door. The hazard warning light system can also be operated if the ignition is switched off. The function LEAVING HOME ensures that the vehicle's environment is illuminated after unlocking the vehicle with the radio remote control unit. If one of the airbags is deployed, the hazard warning light system will switch on automatically. The function switches the light on only if there is poorer visibility and the light switch is in the position . The automatic activation of hazard warning lights can take place during a heavy braking. After starting or accelerating the hazard warning system is automatically switched off. The two functions can be activated/deactivated and set in Infotainment » Owner´s Manual Infotainment. CAUTION ■ Poorer visibility is evaluated by a sensor mounted below the windscreen in the holder of the rear-view mirror. Do not cover the sensor - the system can be affected. ■ If this option is always enabled, then the battery is heavily loaded. When the hazard warning system is on and the indicator light is switched on (e.g. when turning), the hazard warning lights are switched off temporarily and only the turn signal flashes on the relevant side of the vehicle. Parking lights Read and observe on page 63 first. The side light is provided for lighting of the parked vehicle. Switching on the side light on one side › Switch off the ignition. 1) If the two switch-on variants are conflicting (e.g. if the front wheels are turned to the left and the right turn signal light is switched on), the turn signal light has the higher priority. Lights and visibility 67 › Press the control lever all the way into position or until it stops» Fig. 45 on page 64. The parking light is illuminated on the relevant side of the vehicle. Switching on the side light on both sides › Switch on the ignition and turn the light switch into position » page 63, the parking lights are turned on. › Switch off the ignition and lock the vehicle. After pulling out the ignition key and opening the driver's door, an audible warning sounds. After a few seconds or after closing the driver's door, the audible warning is turned off. You can adjust the xenon headlights yourself by switching on thetravel mode in Infotainment» Owner´s Manual Infotainment. In this mode, no automatic beam adjustment is made ahead of the vehicle. Interior lighting Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Front interior lights Interior lighting, rear 68 69 ■ Turning on the parking light means the battery is heavily loaded. ■ The parking lights may switch off automatically due to a low battery charge. The inner lighting also works if the ignition is switched off. With the ignition switched off, the lights will automatically switch off after approximately after 10 minutes. If the two-sided parking lights are switched on when the ignition is off, the parking lights will not switch on automatically! Front interior lights CAUTION Entry space lighting Read and observe on page 63 first. The lighting is positioned on the lower edge of the exterior mirror and illuminates the entry area of the front door. The lighting switches on after unlocking or opening the vehicle door (depending on the lighting conditions). The lighting switches off after around 30 seconds after closing the front door or switching on the ignition. WARNING If the entry light is on, do not touch its cover – risk of burns! Driving abroad Read and observe on page 63 first. When driving in countries with opposing traffic system (traffic on the left/right), your headlights may dazzle oncoming traffic. Therefore, it is necessary to have the headlights adapted by a specialist garage. 68 Using the system Fig. 50 Operation of the front light: Version 1 / version 2 Positions of the rocker switch A » Fig. 50 Switching on Automatic operation (centre position) Switching off There is no icon available for the centre position (automatic operation) in Version 2. Switch on / off (by pressing the relevant switch B ) » Fig. 50 Reading lamp left Reading lamp right Automatic operation - position The system is turned on when any of the following is present. ▶ The vehicle is unlocked. ▶ One of the doors is opened. ▶ The ignition key is removed. The system is turned off when any of the following is present. ▶ The vehicle is locked. ▶ The ignition is switched on. ▶ About 30 seconds after all the doors have been closed. Option 2 - switch on/off (by pressing relevant switch) » Fig. 51 B Reading lamp left C Reading lamp right Variant 3 - operation (by moving the light lens C ) » Fig. 52 Switching on Automatic operation1) Switching off The rear lights (variant 1/variant 2) are operated together with the front lights. ▶ When the front interior lighting is switched on, the rear interior lighting also Interior lighting, rear turns on automatically. ▶ When the front interior lighting is switched off, the rear interior lighting can be turned on/off as required. Visibility Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Fig. 51 Interior light, rear: Variant 1 / Variant 2 Fig. 52 Interior light, rear: Variant 3 Windscreen and rear window heating Front sun visors Sunshade 70 70 70 WARNING No objects should be attached to the sun visor that could restrict the view or endanger the vehicle occupants during sudden braking or in a collision. Variant 1 - Operation (by pressing the switch) » Fig. 51 A Switching on and off 1) In this position, the same conditions apply as for the automatic operation of the lighting from the front seats» page 68. Lights and visibility 69 Windscreen and rear window heating Front sun visors Fig. 53 Buttos for the front and rear window heater: Climatronic / manual air conditioning, heating Fig. 54 Fold down visor / flip up visor / make-up mirror and Park Memo Holder Read and observe on page 69 first. The heating for quick defrosting and ventilation of the front /and rear window. The heating only works when the engine is running. Buttons for the heating (depending on vehicle equipment) » Fig. 53 Switch on/off the rear window heating Switching the windscreen heater on/off When the heating is switched on, a light illuminates inside or below the button. Read and observe on page 69 first. Operation and description of the sun visor » Fig. 54 1 Swivel cover towards the windscreen 2 Swivel cover towards the door A Make-up mirror with cover (the cover can be pushed in the direction of the arrow) B Parking ticket holder Sunshade The heating automatically switches off after 10 minutes. Fig. 55 Sun screen If the engine is switched off when the heating is on and turned back on again within 10 minutes, the heating is continued. Note ■ If the on-board voltage decreases, the heating switches off automatically » page 178, Automatic shutdown of consumers - vehicle battery discharge protection. ■ If the lighting inside or below the button flashes, the heater will not work because of the low charge of the battery. ■ If the Climatronic recognises that the windshield could fog up, the windshield heating is automatically switched on. This function can be activated/deactivated in Infotainment» Owner´s Manual Infotainment. Read and observe on page 69 first. The sun screen is located in a housing on the luggage compartment cover. › To dim pull the screen B out of the housing at the handle and hook into the magnetic holders A » Fig. 55. 70 Using the system › To furlgrab the screen at the handle B and remove from the holders A . Note Hold the sunshade so that this can slowly roll back in without damaging. ■ Each time the ignition switches off for the third time, the position of the windscreen wipers changes. This counteracts an early fatigue of the wiper rubbers. ■ The windscreen washer nozzles for the windscreen are heated when the engine is running and the outside temperature is less than +10 °C. Windscreen wipers and washers Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Front wipers and washers Rear windscreen wipers and washers/ reversing camera cleaning system Headlight cleaning system 71 72 72 Front wipers and washers Fig. 56 Operating the front windscreen wipers and washer system The windscreen wipers and the wash system only operate if the ignition is switched on and the bonnet and boot are closed. WARNING Do not use the windscreen washer system at low temperatures, without heating the windscreen beforehand. Otherwise the window washer fluid could freeze on the windscreen and restrict the view to the front. CAUTION ■ If the windscreen wipers are in rest position, they cannot be folded out from the windscreen. The wipers must be set to the service position to raise them off the windscreen » page 197. ■ In cold temperatures and during the winter, check before switching on the ignition that the wiper blades are not frozen to the windscreen. If the windscreen wipers are switched on when the blades are frozen to the windscreen, this may damage both the blades and windscreen wiper motor! ■ Carefully separate frozen windscreen wiper blades from the windscreen and free from snow and ice. ■ Handle the windscreen wipers with care - there is a risk of damage to the windscreen by the windscreen wiper arms. ■ Do not switch on the ignition when the wiper arm is raised from the windscreen - there is a risk of damage to the bonnet by the wiper arms. ■ If there is an obstacle on the windscreen, the wipers will try to push away the obstacle five times. The wipers then stop to prevent themselves from being damaged. Only switch the wipers on again after the obstacle has been removed. Read and observe and on page 71 first. The lever can be moved to the following positions » Fig. 56 Wipers and washers off Depending on equipment fitted: ▶ Intermittent wiping ▶ Automatic windscreen wiping in the rain A Setting of windscreen wiper interval for the position - by setting the switch in the direction of the arrow, the windscreen wipers will wipe more often Slow-speed wiping High-speed wiping Single wipe of the windscreen (spring-loaded position) Spraying and wiping the windscreen (sprung position) Spraying and wiping the window After releasing the operating lever, the wipers will make from 2 to 3 wiper strokes. At a speed of more than 2 km/h, the wiper wipes once again 5 seconds after the last wiper stroke in order to wipe the last drops from the windscreen. This function can be activated/deactivated by a specialist garage. Lights and visibility 71 Automatic windscreen wiping in the raincan be activated/deactivated in Infotainment» Owner´s Manual Infotainment. WARNING Automatic wiping during rain is only a support. The driver is still responsible for setting the function of the windscreen wipers manually depending on the visibility conditions. Note If the wiping is carried out without interruption, the wiping speed varies depending on the vehicle speed. Rear windscreen wipers and washers/ reversing camera cleaning system Fig. 57 Operating the windscreen wipers and washing system Note The rear window is wiped once automatically if the windscreen wipers are on when reverse gear is selected. Headlight cleaning system Read and observe and on page 71 first. The headlights are cleaned with every first and after every tenth spraying of the windscreen under the following conditions. The ignition is switched on. The low beam is switched on. The outside temperature is about -12° C to +39° C. To ensure the correct functioning of the system, even in winter, this needs to be regularly cleared of snow and ice (e.g. using the de-icing spray). Rear view mirror Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Interior mirror dimming Mirrors Read and observe and on page 71 first. The lever can be moved to the following positions » Fig. 57 Wipers and washers off Rear screen wiping Spraying and wiping the windscreen (sprung position) - after releasing the control stalk, the wipers perform another 2 to 3 wiper strokes Spraying the rear view camera (sprung position) Automatic rear wiper If the windscreen wiping is performed without interruption, then the automatic regular intermittent wiping of the rear window takes place. This function can be activated/deactivated in Infotainment» Owner´s Manual Infotainment. 72 Using the system WARNING Exterior mirrors increase the field of view, however, they make objects appear smaller and further away. Therefore, use the interior mirror whenever possible for assessing the distances to the vehicles following behind. WARNING ■ The mirrors with automatic dimming contain electrolyte fluid which may leak if the mirror glass is broken - this can irritate skin, eyes and the respiratory system. ■ If your eyes or skin come into contact with the electrolytic fluid, immediately wash the affected area for a few minutes long with a lot of water. If necessary get medical assistance. 73 73 WARNING Interior mirror dimming ■ Attach external devices (e.g. navigation system) not in the vicinity of the mirror with automatic dimming. The illuminated display of an external device can affect the function of the rear-view mirror - This is a risk of an accident. ■ The automatic dimming mirror only functions smoothly if the light falling on the sensors is not compromised (e.g. by the sunshade at the back). The sensors are located on the front and back of the mirror. Mirrors Fig. 58 Interior mirror: manual dimming / auto-dimming- Variant 1 Fig. 60 Exterior mirror operation Fig. 59 Interior mirror with auto-dimming - Variant 2 Read and observe Read and observe on page 72 first. Mirrors with manual dimming» Fig. 58 1 Basic mirror position (not dimmed) 2 Mirror blackout Mirrors with auto-dimming - Variant 1 Mirror dimming» Fig. 58 - is automatically controlled after the engine start. When the interior lights are switched on or the reverse gear is engaged, the mirror moves back into the basic position (not dimmed). Mirrors with auto-dimming - Variant 2 » Fig. 59 A Warning light - lights when dimming is activated B Switch for the activation of the automatic mirror dimming C Light sensor on page 72 first. The exterior mirrors can (depending on vehicle equipment) have a manual or electric fold-in function, automatic dimming and memory function. The rotary knob can be moved into the following positions (depending on vehicle equipment) Adjust the left-hand exterior mirror Switch off mirror control Adjust the right-hand exterior mirror Exterior mirror heater (only operates when the engine is running) Folding in the mirrors electrically (to fold back, move the rotary knob to another position) » Setting the mirror area › Move the rotary knob in the direction of arrows » Fig. 60. If the mirror setting fails at any time, the mirrors can be adjusted manually by pressing on the edge of the mirror area. Lights and visibility 73 Setting the mirror surfaces synchronously This function allows the simultaneous adjustment of the two mirror areas. This function can be activated/deactivated in Infotainment» Owner´s Manual Infotainment. › Turn the knob for the mirror control to the position for the driver mirror adjustment. › Adjust the mirror areas to the desired position. Manual folding mirrors The mirror can be manually folded in towards the side window. To restore it to its original position, fold back from the side window until it audibly clicks into place. Automatic folding in/back of both mirrors The exterior mirrors are automatically collapsed after locking the vehicle in the park position. After unlocking the vehicle, the mirrors are folded back to the driving position » . This function can be activated/deactivated in Infotainment» Owner´s Manual Infotainment. Mirror with auto-dimming The exterior mirror dimming is controlled together with auto rear-view mirror dimming » page 73. Memory function for mirror (vehicles with electrically adjustable driver's seat) It is possible to save the current setting of the exterior mirror when saving the driver's seat position with » page 76, Memory Function of the electrically adjustable seator » page 77, Memory function of the remote control key. Tilting the mirror area of the front passenger mirror (vehicles with electrically adjustable driver's seat) The front passenger mirror area can be tilted to the stored position to improve the view to the curb when reversing. Operating conditions. The function is activated in Infotainment » Owner´s Manual Infotainment. The setting of the mirror area has been previously stored» page 76, Memory Function of the electrically adjustable seat or. » page 77, Memory function of the remote control key. The reverse gear is engaged. The knob for the mirror control is in the position for the passenger mirror adjustment. 74 Using the system The mirror area returns to its initial position after the rotary knob is set to another position or if the speed is greater than 15 km/h. WARNING Do not touch the exterior mirror surfaces, if the exterior mirror heating is switched on - hazard of burning. CAUTION ■ Never manually fold in/out the electrically folding exterior mirrors - there is a risk of damage to the mirror! ■ When the mirror is swung by external influences (due to impact during ma- noeuvring, for example), then first fold-in the mirror by turning the knob and wait for a loud clapping noise. Read and observe Seats and head restraints Front seats Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Manual adjustment Electrical adjustment Memory Function of the electrically adjustable seat Memory function of the remote control key Folding front passenger seat Armrest setting 75 76 76 77 77 78 on page 75 first. The seats can be adjusted by the respective operating element being pulled, pressed or turned in the direction of the arrows » Fig. 61. A Adjusting the seat in the longitudinal direction (after releasing the control lever must lock audibly) B Adjusting the seat height1) C Adjust the tilt of the backrest (do not lean on the backrest when adjusting) D Setting the extent of the curvature of the lumbar support Note After a certain time, play can develop within the adjustment mechanism of the backrest angle. WARNING ■ Only adjust the driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary – otherwise there is a risk of an accident! ■ Caution when adjusting the seat! You may suffer injuries or bruises as a result of adjusting the seat without paying proper attention. Manual adjustment Fig. 61 Control elements on the seat 1) Only valid for some countries. Seats and head restraints 75 Electrical adjustment Memory Function of the electrically adjustable seat Fig. 63 SET button and memory buttons Fig. 62 Control elements on the seat Read and observe on page 75 first. The seats can be adjusted by the respective operating element being pressed in the direction of area of the arrow » Fig. 62. A seat adjustment ▶ 1 - Move in the longitudinal direction ▶ 2 - Change in inclination ▶ 3 - Change in height B Adjusting the seat backrest ▶ 4 - Change in inclination C Adjusting lumbar support ▶ 5 - Change curvature ▶ 6 - The degree of curvature change WARNING The electric front seat adjustment is functional even with the ignition off. Therefore, when leaving the vehicle, never leave people who are not completely independent, such as children, unattended in the vehicle - there is a risk of injury! Note If the inclination angle of the seat backrest relative to the seat surface is greater than 102 °, then it is not possible for safety reasons to save this setting in the memory of the electrically adjustable seats or the remote control key. 76 Using the system Read and observe on page 75 first. Among the memory buttons B on the driver's seat, a setting for the driver´s seat and exterior mirror position can be saved » Fig. 63. Storing driver's seat and exterior mirror settings for the forwards drive › Switch on the ignition, adjust the seat and the exterior mirrors. › Hold down the A » Fig. 63button and within 10 seconds press the desired memory button B at the same time. Storing is confirmed by an acoustic signal. Storing front passenger´s exterior mirror settings for reversing The function of lowering the front passenger mirror area when reversing must be enabled in Infotainment» Owner´s Manual Infotainment. › Turn on the ignition and press the desired memory button B » Fig. 63. › Turn the rotary knob for the exterior mirror control to the position for the front passenger mirror area » page 73. › Engage reverse gear. › Adjust the front passenger's mirror to the desired position. › Disengage reverse gear. The set position of the exterior mirror is stored. Retrieving the saved setting › With the ignition off and the driver’s door open-press- the desired memory button B. › In other cases (e.g. if the ignition is switched on or the driver's door closed), hold the button. Stopping the ongoing adjustment › Press any button on the driver's seat or the button on the remote control key. Note Every time you save new seat and exterior mirror settings for driving forwards, you must also save the front passenger mirror setting for reversing again. Read and observe Memory function of the remote control key › To fold the seat down, pull the lever in the direction of arrow 1 and fold Read and observe on page 75 first. Every time the vehicle is locked, the driver´s seat and exterior mirror settings are saved and assigned to the key with which the vehicle was locked. After the following unlocking of the vehicle with the same key, the driver´s seat and exterior mirrors that are saved to this key will be adopted. This function can be activated/deactivated in Infotainment » Owner´s Manual Infotainment. Storing front passenger´s exterior mirror settings for reversing The function of lowering the front passenger mirror area when reversing must be enabled in Infotainment» Owner´s Manual Infotainment. › Unlock the vehicle with the remote control key and switch on the ignition. › Turn the rotary knob for the exterior mirror control to the position for the front passenger mirror area » page 73. › Engage reverse gear. › Adjust the front passenger's mirror to the desired position. › Disengage reverse gear. The adjusted position of the exterior mirror is stored in the remote control key memory. Stopping the ongoing adjustment › Press any button on the driver's seat or the button on the remote control key. on page 75 first. The front passenger seat can, depending on specification, be folded forward into a horizontal position. down the seat back in the direction of arrow 2 » Fig. 64. The locking mechanism must audibly snap into place. › To fold back, pull the lever in the direction of arrow 1 pull and fold back the seat back in the direction of arrow 2 . The locking mechanism must audibly snap into place. › Check this by pulling on the seat backrest. WARNING ■ If the seat backrest is folded down, only the seat behind the driver´s seat can be used to transport passengers. ■ The front passenger airbag should be switched off when transporting ob- jects on the seat which was folded forwards » page 20. ■ Do not adjust the seat back while driving - There is a risk of injury and an accident! ■ When moving the seat backrest, keep limbs away from between the seat cushion and seat backrest – risk of injury! ■ Never transport the following items on the seat backrest when folded forwards. ■ Objects that could restrict the driver's view. ■ Objects which make it impossible for the driver to control the vehicle (e.g. if they roll under the pedals, or protrude into the driver's zone). ■ Objects which could lead to injury to passengers (e.g. if accelerating sharply, braking or changing direction). Folding front passenger seat Fig. 64 Folding the front passenger seat forward Seats and head restraints 77 Seat backrests Armrest setting Fig. 65 Adjust armrest Read and observe on page 75 first. › To adjust the height, lift the armrest in the direction of the arrow A into one Fig. 66 Fold the seat backrest forwards from the interior/pull the belt for the side trim of the six locking positions » Fig. 65. › To close, lift the armrest in the direction of arrow A until the stop and then fold down against the direction of the arrow. › To Set the armrest lengthways in the direction of arrow B Move to the desired position. Rear seats Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Seat backrests Fold down armrest 78 79 Fig. 67 Fold the backrest forward from the luggage compartment: Variant 1 / Variant 2 Before folding the seat backrests forwards, adapt the position of the front seats in such a way that they are not damaged by the folded seat backrests. Where appropriate, remove the rear headrests » page 80. Folding forwards from the passenger compartment › Push the release lever A in the direction of arrow 1 and fold down the seat backrest in the direction of arrow 2 » Fig. 66. In the undivided seat back, press the release handles A on both sides of the seat back at the same time. 78 Using the system Folding forward from the luggage compartment On vehicles with a net partition, the left and then the right and middle rear seat backrest must first be unlocked. The net partition must be rolled up in the housing. Fold down armrest Fig. 68 Fold down armrest › Pull the corresponding lever in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 67. The respective seat backrest is unlocked or folded forward. Folding backwards › Pull the seat belt C for the side panel in the direction of arrow 3 » Fig. 66. › Raise the seat backrest against the direction of arrow 2 until the release handle A audibly locks. Check this by pulling on the seat backrest. › Make sure that the red pin B is hidden. In the undivided seat back, pull the two outer belts to the side panel. After folding back the backrest, the release handles A should audibly click into place on both sides of the backrest and the red mark B should not be visible on either side of the backrest. WARNING ■ The seat backs in occupied rear seats must be properly engaged. ■ When transporting objects in the luggage compartment that has been en- larged by folding the backrest forward, ensure the safety of the passengers transported on the other rear seats. ■ The seat backrests must be securely locked in position so that no objects in the luggage compartment can slide into the passenger compartment on sudden braking – risk of injury. CAUTION When moving the seat backrest the seat belts should not be trapped - there is a risk of damage to the seat belts. The armrest can be folded down by pulling the loop A in the direction of arrow » Fig. 68. Headrests Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects: 79 80 80 Setting the height of the front headrests Setting the height of the rear headrests Removing/inserting the rear headrests Note In sports seats, the headrests are integrated into the seat backrests and cannot be adjusted in height. Setting the height of the front headrests Fig. 69 Setting the height of the front headrest Seats and head restraints 79 › To adjust the height, hold the locking button A and move the rest in the desired direction » Fig. 69. Setting the height of the rear headrests › Hold the locking button A in the direction of arrow 1 , at the same time us- ing a flat screwdriver with a max. width of 5 mm to press the locking button in the opening B in the direction of arrow 2 and pull out the rest in the direction of arrow 3 » Fig. 71. › To insert the headrest, push the headrest into the seat backrest in the direction of arrow 4 until the locking button clicks into place. Seat heaters Fig. 70 Setting the height of the back headrest › Grasp the headrest and moveupwards in the direction of arrow 1 » Fig. 70. › To move the headrest down, press the securing button A in the direction of arrow 2 and hold it down while pressing the headrest in the direction of arrow 3 . Removing/inserting the rear headrests Fig. 72 Buttons for heating the front seats/rear seats The seat backrests and surfaces of the front seats and the outer rear seats can be heated electrically. Seat heating buttons » Fig. 72 Left seat heating Right seat heating › To turn on the heating to max, press the key or button. By repeatedly pressing the button, the heat is turned down until it is completely switched off. The level of the seat heating is indicated by the number of illuminated warning lights underneath / in the button. The seat heating only operates when the engine is running. Fig. 71 Removing/inserting the rear headrests Before removing/inserting the headrests, fold the corresponding seat backrest slightly forward » page 78. › To remove the headrest, pull it out of the seat backrest up to the stop. 80 Using the system When the ignition is switched off, the seat heating / ventilation is also switched off. if the engine is started again within 10 minutes, then the driver's seat heating / ventilation is switched on again automatically according to the set ting before switching off the ignition. WARNING If you are sensitive to pain and/or temperature, e.g. through medication, paralysis or because of chronic illness (e.g. diabetes), we recommend not to use the seat heating. If the seat heating is used, we recommend to make regular breaks in your journey when driving long distances, so that the body can recuperate from the stress of the journey. Please consult your doctor, who can evaluate your specific condition. CAUTION The following instructions must be observed to avoid damage to the seats. ■ Do not kneel on the seats or otherwise apply concentrated pressure to them. ■ Do not switch on the heating for unoccupied seats. ■ Do not switch on the heating for seats which have objects on them (e.g. a child seat, bag or similar). ■ Do not switch on the heating for seats which have seat covers or protective covers on them. Note If the on-board voltage decreases, the seat heating switches off automatically » page 178, Automatic shutdown of consumers - vehicle battery discharge protection. Useful features Interior fittings Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects: 82 82 82 83 83 84 84 84 85 85 85 86 86 87 87 87 88 88 Ticket holder Storage compartment on the driver's side Stowage compartments in the doors Storage compartment in the front centre console Phonebox USB and AUX input Cup holders Waste container Multimedia holder Storage compartment under the front arm rest Glasses compartment Storage compartment on the front passenger side Storage compartment for umbrella Clothes hook Storage pockets on the rear sides of the front seats Storage compartment in the rear centre console Long cargo channel Removable through-loading bag WARNING ■ Do not place anything on the dash panel. These objects might slide or fall down when driving and may distract you from concentrating on the traffic – There is a risk of an accident! ■ Make sure that while driving no objects can enter the driver's footwell There is a risk of an accident! ■ Do not transport any objects on the front passenger seat except objects (e.g. child safety seat) provided for this purpose – risk of accident! ■ No objects should be placed in the storage compartments nor in the drinks holders; the vehicle occupants could be endangered if there is sudden braking or the vehicle collides with something. Useful features 81 WARNING (Continued) ■ For safety reasons, lockable storage compartments should be closed while driving - there is a risk of injury from the opened lid or through the loose objects in the compartment. ■ Make sure no objects protrude from the storage compartments - There is a risk of injury! ■ Do not exceed the permissible loads for the storage compartments and pockets - There is risk of injury and risk of damage to the compartments and pockets! ■ Ash, cigarettes, cigars etc. should only be stored in the ashtray - There is a risk of fire/burns! ■ The storage compartments and the waste containers are not a substitute for the ashtray and must also not be used for such purposes – There is a risk of fire! CAUTION Do not place any large or sharp objects in the storage compartments and pockets - there is a risk of damage to the compartments and pockets. Storage compartment on the driver's side Fig. 74 Opening the storage compartment Read and observe and on page 81 first. › To open, lift the handle and fold out the compartment in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 74. › To close, swing the lid against the direction of the arrow until it audibly clicks into place. Stowage compartments in the doors Ticket holder Fig. 73 Ticket holder Read and observe and on page 81 first. The ticket holder» Fig. 73 is provided for the holding and displaying e.g. car park tickets. 82 Using the system Fig. 75 Storage compartments: in the front door/in the rear door Read and observe and on page 81 first. Storage compartments » Fig. 75 A Storage compartment B Bottle holder with a capacity of max. 1.5 l C Bottle holder with a capacity of max. 0.5 l WARNING The storage compartment A » Fig. 75is to be used exclusively for storing objects which do not stick out - There is a risk of restricting the effectiveness of the side airbags. Storage compartment in the front centre console Fig. 76 Open the open storage compartment / storage compartment Read and observe and on page 81 first. › To open, press the edge of the lid in the direction of arrow » Fig. 76. › To close, pull on the lid edge against the direction of the arrow. Certain models do not have a storage compartment lid» Fig. 76. Phonebox Fig. 77 Phonebox Read and observe and If a telephone is directed with its rear side downwards on the pad in the storage compartment » Fig. 77, the phone signal is amplified by the roof antenna. Telephones that support the Qi standard for wireless charging, can also be charged wirelessly in the storage compartment. WARNING While wireless charging is taking place, no objects may be between the pad and the telephone being charged. ■ Metal objects can become hot due to the action of the induction field There is a risk of injury. If there is a metal object in the storage compartment that has become hot, then take out the telephone and let the object cook in the storage compartment! CAUTION While wireless charging is taking place, there may benoobjects between the pad and the telephone being charged - thePhoneboxFunction could be impaired. ■ With cards with a magnetic strip or chip, SD card, USB flash drives and similar devices, there is a risk of data loss and damage to the disk. ■ Metal objects can become hot due to the action of the induction field - there is a risk of damage to the telephone. Note ■ At the start of the wireless charging, the appropriate message appears in the Infotainment display. ■ For optimum telephone signal strength and uninterrupted wireless charging, we recommend placing the phone in the storage compartment without the protective sleeve, if possible. ■ It is normal for the telephone to heat up during the wireless charging. on page 81 first. The storage compartment in the front centre console can be equipped with the Phonebox function. Useful features 83 WARNING USB and AUX input ■ Do not use any cups or beakers which are made of brittle material (e.g. Fig. 78 USB and AUX inputs glass, porcelain). This could lead to injuries in the event of an accident. ■ Never put hot beverage containers in the cup holder. If the vehicle moves, they may spill – risk of scalding! CAUTION Do not leave open beverage containers in the cup holder during the journey. There is a risk of spilling e.g. when braking which may cause damage to the electrical components or seat upholstery. Read and observe and on page 81 first. Waste container The USB input (with in) and AUX input (with in) are located above the storage compartment in the front centre console » Fig. 78. Information on use » Owner´s Manual Infotainment. Cup holders Fig. 80 Waste containers: inserting and moving/opening Fig. 79 Cup holder: front/rear Read and observe and on page 81 first. The cup holder is located in the front centre console A and in the rear armrest B » Fig. 79. Two beverage containers can be placed into the cup holder. Fig. 81 Replacing the bags Read and observe and on page 81 first. The waste container can be inserted into the slots in the doors. 84 Using the system Insert waste container › Position the waste container at the front edge of the slot. › Push the waste container to the back in the direction of the arrow A » Fig. 80. › Push the waste container as required in the direction of arrow B . Storage compartment under the front arm rest Fig. 83 Opening the storage compartment Remove the waste container › Remove the waste container in the opposite direction to the arrow A » Fig. 80. Open/close waste container › Lift the lid in the direction of arrow C » Fig. 80. Closing takes place in reverse order. Read and observe Replace bags › Remove the waste container from the slot. › Press the two locking lugs on the frame in the direction of arrow 1 » Fig. 81. › Pull the bag together with the frame down in the direction of arrow 2 . › Remove the bag from the frame. › Pull the new bag through the frame and pull it over the frame in the direction of arrow 3 . › Place the bag with the frame in the direction of arrow 4 into the container body, so that the two lugs engage audibly on the frame. › To openPull the arm on the handle A in direction of arrow » Fig. 83. › To close, lift the armrest in the direction of arrow until the stop and then fold and on page 81 first. down against the direction of arrow. Glasses compartment Fig. 84 Opening the glasses storage box Note We recommend that you use 20x30 cm bags. Multimedia holder Fig. 82 Multimedia holder Read and observe and on page 81 first. › To open, press on the outer edge of the glasses compartment in area A . The compartment folds in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 84. › To close, swivel the compartment against the direction of the arrow until it audibly clicks into place. CAUTION Read and observe and on page 81 first. The multimedia holder» Fig. 82 is provided for storing mobile phones, MP3 players etc. ■ Do not put any heat-sensitive objects in the glasses storage box - with high temperatures there is risk of damage. ■ The box must be closed before leaving and locking the vehicle – risk of im- pairment to the functions of the anti-theft alarm system. Useful features 85 Storage compartment on the front passenger side Storage compartment for umbrella Fig. 86 Opening the storage compartment Fig. 85 Open storage compartment / close storage compartment and open air supply Read and observe and on page 81 first. The storage compartment is equipped with an interior light (this is illuminated when the parking lights / low beam are switched on), a pen/card holder and an air outlet. Storage compartment › Toopen Pull handle A in the direction of arrow 1 and fold down the cover in the direction of arrow 2 » Fig. 85. › To close, swivel the cover in the direction of arrow 3 until it audibly clicks into place. Air supply › To open, turn the rotary switch until it stops in the position» Fig. 85. › To close, turn the rotary switch until it stops in the position . The temperature of the storage compartment supplied with air is dependent on the setting in the air conditioning. 86 Using the system Read and observe and on page 81 first. The storage compartment under the passenger seat is used for storing an umbrella. › To open, pull the handle in direction of arrow 1 pull and open the compartment in the direction of arrow 2 » Fig. 86. › To close, screw in the lid in the opposite direction of arrow 2 until it audibly clicks into place. CAUTION Never store a wet umbrella in the storage compartment - there is a risk of damage to the umbrella. Note We recommend that you use the umbrella from the ŠKODA Original Accessories. Read and observe Clothes hook Fig. 87 Clothes hooks and on page 81 first. The storage pockets » Fig. 88 are intended for the storage of maps, magazines, etc. Storage compartment in the rear centre console Fig. 89 Opening the storage compartment Read and observe and on page 81 first. The clothes hooks are located on the middle door pillars of the vehicle and on the handle of the headliner above each of the rear doors » Fig. 87. The maximum permissible load of each of the hooks is 2 kg. WARNING ■ Never leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets of the items of clothing that has been hung up - There is a risk of injury. ■ Do not use hangers to hang up the clothes - there is a risk of restricting the effectiveness of head airbags and a risk of injury from the hanger. ■ Make sure that any clothes hanging from the hooks do not impede your vision. Read and observe and on page 81 first. › Toopen Pull the handle on the upper section of the recess and open out the compartment in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 89. › To close, swivel the compartment against the direction of the arrow. Storage pockets on the rear sides of the front seats Fig. 88 Map pockets Useful features 87 Long cargo channel Removable through-loading bag Fig. 90 Opening the cover: from the passenger compartment / from the luggage compartment Fig. 91 Tighten ribbon / secure through-loading bag Read and observe and on page 81 first. After folding-up the rear armrest and cover, an opening in the seat backrest becomes visible through which the through-loading bag with skis can be pushed. › To open from the passenger compartment, fold down the rear armrest slightly » page 79. › Pull handle A in the direction of arrow 1 and fold down the cover in the direction of arrow 2 » Fig. 90. › To open from the luggage compartment, push the securing tab B in the direction of the arrow and fold the cover with the armrest forwards. › To close, fold the cover and the rear armrest upwards until the stop. This should audibly click into place. The cover must be secured after the closing process. Ensure that the red field above the securing tab B is not visible. WARNING The through-loading channel is only intended for transporting skis that are placed in a properly secured, through-loading bag. Read and observe and on page 81 first. The removable through-loading bag (hereinafter referred to as through-loading bag) is used exclusively for transporting skis (max. 4 pairs). Stowing the through-loading bag and skis › Fold the rear armrest and the cover in the seat backrest downwards » Fig. 90 on page 88. › Place the empty, through-loading bag in the opening in such a way that the end of the bag with the zip is in the boot. › Place the skis with the tips facing to the front and the sticks with the tips facing to the rear. into the through-loading bag and close the bag. Securing the through-loading bag and skis › Tighten the strap A around the skis in front of the bindings» Fig. 91. The strap must hold the skis tight. › Fold the seat backrest a little forward » page 78. › Guide the securing strap B through the opening in the seat backrest around the upper part of the seat backrest. › Then, fold the seat backrests back until the locking button clicks into place. Check this by pulling on the seat backrest. › Insert the securing strap B into the lock C until it clicks into place. WARNING ■ The total weight of the skis which are transported must not exceed 24 kg. ■ Always stow and secure the skis and the bag securely - otherwise there is a risk of injury or accident! 88 Using the system CAUTION Never fold and stow the through-loading bag when it is wet - There is a risk of damaging the through-loading bag. 12-volt power outlet Electrical sockets Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects: 12-volt power outlet 230-volt socket 89 89 WARNING ■ Do not place anything on the dash panel. These objects might slide or fall down when driving and may distract you from concentrating on the traffic – There is a risk of an accident! ■ Make sure that while driving no objects can enter the driver's footwell There is a risk of an accident! ■ Stow all devices safely during the journey to prevent them from being thrown around the interior in the event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or an accident – The is a risk to life! ■ The devices may warm up during operation – The is a risk of injury or fire! ■ Improper use of the power sockets and the electrical accessories can cause fires, burns and other serious injuries. ■ The 12-Volt sockets also work if the ignition is switched off. When leaving the vehicle, never leave persons who are not completely independent, such as children, unattended in the vehicle. CAUTION When using the 12-volt sockets, the following notes are to be observed. ■ The sockets can only be used for the connection of approved electrical accessories with a total power consumption of up to 120 watts - otherwise the there is a risk of damage to the electrical system of the vehicle. ■ Connecting appliances when the engine is not running will drain the battery of the vehicle! ■ Before switching the ignition on / off or before starting the engine, switch off the devices which are connected to the sockets - there is a risk of damage to the equipment due to voltage fluctuations. Fig. 92 Cover of the 12 volt power outlet: in the front centre console/ in the boot Read and observe and on page 89 first. › Touse, remove the cover of the socket» Fig. 92 - or open the cover of the socket» Fig. 92 - . › Connect the plug for the electrical appliance to the socket. 230-volt socket Fig. 93 Open the cover of the 230 volt power outlet Read and observe and on page 89 first. The 230-volt socket has a child safety lock. When inserting the plug, the fuse is released, the socket is activated and the warning light above the socket is illuminates green (if this flashes red, then the socket is deactivated). › To use, fold up the cover of the socket in the direction of arrow» Fig. 93 and plug the electrical appliance plug into the socket. Useful features 89 The socket may be automatically deactivated for the following reasons ▶ Excessive current. ▶ Low battery charge state. ▶ High socket temperature. Ashtray If disabling reasons no longer exist, the socket is automatically activated. WARNING ■ Make sure that no liquid or moisture enters into the socket - There is a risk to life! If fluid does manage to get into the power socket, completely dry out the socket before reuse. ■ The child lock on the power socket is unlocked when using adapters and extension cables which carry volts – There is a risk of injury! ■ Do no insert any objects (e.g. knitting needles) into the contacts of the power socket – There is a risk to life! Fig. 94 Removing front ashtray / Removing rear ashtray insert Read and observe CAUTION ■ The power socket can only be used for connecting approved electrical acces- sories with a two-pin 230V plug, with a total power uptake of up to 150 watt. ■ The plug of the electrical appliance must be plugged in up to the stop, other- wise the child safety lock can be unlocked and the socket may be activated but the electric appliance is still not receiving power. ■ Do not connect bulbs with neon tubes in the socket - there is a risk of damaging the lamp. ■ For appliances with an independent power source (e.g. such as notebooks), first connect the power source itself and only after that connect the appliance. on page 90 first. Removable ashtray › Hold the ashtray A (not by the lid) remove in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 94. Insertion takes place in reverse order. Ashtray with removable insert › To remove, open the insert of the respective ashtray, hold the insert in the area B and remove in the direction of the arrow» Fig. 94. Insertion takes place in reverse order. Cigarette lighter Ashtray and cigarette lighter Fig. 95 Cigarette lighter Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Ashtray Cigarette lighter 90 90 The ashtray can be used for ash, cigarettes, cigars and the like WARNING Never place hot or flammable objects in the ashtray – risk of fire! Read and observe on page 90 first. › To use the lighter, push it in as far as the stop and wait until the glowing lighter clicks out again » Fig. 95. 90 Using the system › Take out the glowing lighter instantly, use it and insert it back into the socket. Attaching the rear headrests WARNING ■ The cigarette lighter also works if the ignition is switched off. When leav- ing the vehicle, never leave people who are not completely independent, such as children, unattended in the vehicle - there is a risk of burns, fire or damage to the vehicle interior. ■ Be careful when using the cigarette lighter - There is a risk of burns. Note The cigarette lighter socket can also be used as a 12 volt socket. Fig. 96 Inserting: Adapter / holder Tablet holder Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Attaching the rear headrests Handle holder 91 92 External devices (e.g. tablet, smartphone, etc.) measuring min. 122 mm and max. 195 mm can be secured in the support. The maximum permissible load of the holder is 750 g. CAUTION Never exceed the maximum permissible load of the holder - there is a risk of damage or functional impairment. Fig. 97 Removing: Holder / adapter Read and observe on page 91 first. › Toinsert, attach the opened adapter to the guide rods of the front headrest and clip in the direction of arrow 1 » Fig. 96 » . › Clip the holder in the direction of arrow 2 into the adapter. › To remove, pull on the securing tab A in direction of arrow 3 and take the holder in direction of arrow 4 out of the adapter » Fig. 97. › Press the adapter and remove from the guide rods of the headrest in the direction of arrow 5 . WARNING Carefully clip in the adapter - there is a risk of injuring your finger. Useful features 91 Handle holder Transport of cargo Luggage compartment and transporting objects Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Fig. 98 Tilt and rotate holder Fig. 99 Adjust holder size Read and observe on page 91 first. The holder may be by 30° in the direction of the arrow 1 tipped and by 360° in the direction of arrow 2 turned » Fig. 98. › To adjust the holder size, pull out the securing tab A in the direction of ar- row 3 and push the part B in the direction of arrow 4 to the desired position » Fig. 99. Fastening elements Fixing nets Multifunction pocket Folding double hooks Foldable hook Fasten the flooring Floor covering on both sides Net on the luggage compartment cover Luggage compartment cover Roll-up cover Storage compartment with cargo element Storage compartments under the floor covering Multi-function pocket Class N1 vehicles 93 94 94 95 95 95 95 96 96 97 98 98 99 99 When transporting heavy objects, the driving characteristics change due to the shift in centre-of-gravity. The speed and style of driving must be adjusted accordingly. When transporting cargo the following the instructions must be adhered to ▶ Distribute the load evenly in the luggage compartment and secure it with suitable lashing straps to the lashing eyes or fixing nets so that they cannot slip. ▶ Place heavy objects as far forward as possible. ▶ Tyre pressure is to match the load. In the event of an accident, even small and light objects gain so much kinetic energy that they can cause severe injuries. The magnitude of the kinetic energy is dependent on the speed at which the vehicle is travelling and the weight of the object. Luggage compartment light The light switches on/off when the luggage compartment lid is opened or closed. 92 Using the system If the boot lid is open and the ignition switched off, the light will go out automatically after 10 minutes. Fastening elements WARNING ■ Never exceed the maximum permissible load of the respective fasteners, nets, hooks etc. Heavy objects were not secured sufficiently – There is a risk of injury! ■ Do not exceed the permissible axle loads and permissible gross weight of the vehicle – There is a risk of an accident! ■ An unsecured dirt or improperly attached load could slip during a sudden manoeuvre or in an accident in the vehicle - There is a risk of injury! ■ Loose cargo could hit a deployed airbag and injure occupants – danger of death! ■ When transporting loads in the luggage compartment that has been enlarged by folding the rear seats forward, ensure the safety of the passengers transported on the other rear seats . Fig. 100 Fastening elements: Variant 1/variant 2 (G-TEC) CAUTION ■ Never exceed the maximum permissible load of the respective fasteners, nets, hooks etc. - these could be damaged. ■ Make sure that the heating elements of the rear window heater, the ele- ments of the integrated aerial in the rear window or in the rear side windows are not damaged by abrasive items. ■ Do not place sharp objects in the nets and storage compartments in the luggage compartment - there is a risk of damage to the net as well as the compartments. ■ Put the items in the storage compartments carefully and not load these punctiform - there is a risk of damage to the compartments. Fig. 101 Fastening elements: Variant 3/variant 4 Read and observe and on page 93 first. The fasteners are located on both sides of the luggage compartment. Overview of the fastening elements » Fig. 100and » Fig. 101 A Fasteners for securing fastening nets and multifunction pocket B Lashing eyes only for fastening fixing nets C Lashing eyes for fastening of cargo and fastening nets (in variant 1, the rear and centre eye is additionally provided for securing the multifunctional bag) D Lashing eyes for fastening cargo and fastening nets E Lashing eyes for fastening cargo and fastening nets The lashing eyelet B is located behind the folding rear seat backrest . Transport of cargo 93 The maximum permissible static load of the individual lashing eyes C and E is 350 kg. The maximum permissible load of the individual lashing eyes is D is 150 kg. Fixing nets CAUTION On vehicles with lashing eyes D » Fig. 100 on page 93only the cross-bag are attached behind the seats and the floor net (the net can be attached to the rear fasteners A » Fig. 100 on page 93at the rear). Multifunction pocket Fig. 104 Securing the multifunction pocket Fig. 102 Fastening examples for nets Read and observe Fig. 103 Fastening vertical pocket and on page 93 first. The pocket » Fig. 104 can be secured to the fastening elements A and the rear and centre lashing eyes C » Fig. 100 on page 93. The maximum permissible load for the bag attached to the fastening element is 3 kg. CAUTION In vehicles with a variable loading floor, it is not possible to attach the bag to the fastening elements. Read and observe and on page 93 first. Fastening examples for nets » Fig. 102 A Horizontal pocket B Floor net C Vertical pocket The maximum permissible load of each of the nets is 1.5 kg. If the vehicle is equipped with the variable loading floor and this is in the upper position, then the lashing eyes E » Fig. 101 on page 93 can be used for attaching the nets. 94 Using the system Fasten the flooring Folding double hooks Fig. 105 Folding double hooks Read and observe and on page 93 first. Folding double hooks for attaching small items of luggage, such as bags etc. are provided on one or both sides of the luggage compartment depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle (e.g. Bags etc.). An item of luggage with a maximum weight of 5 kg can be attached to each side of the double hook. Foldable hook Fig. 106 Fold down hook Fig. 107 Fixing the floor covering: Version 1 / version 2 Read and observe and on page 93 first. Fastening options for the flooring » Fig. 107 With the loop on a hook on the luggage compartment cover With the hook on the frame of the luggage compartment lid CAUTION For version 1, the following information applies. ■ The hook on the luggage compartment cover is only provided for the fixing of the floor covering, do not hang objects on it - there is a risk of damage to hook. ■ The flooring must be secured on the hook only with an open boot, therefore, before closing the lid, check to see if the flooring is attached to the hook there is a risk of damage to hook. CAUTION The floor covering can be fixed with Version 2 only if the variable loading floor is folded in the upper position » Fig. 119 on page 100. Read and observe and on page 93 first. Foldable hooks for hanging small items of luggage, such as bags, etc., are provided on both sides of the luggage compartment. › To the use on the lower part A Press the hook and pull it down in direction of the arrow » Fig. 106. The maximum permissible load of the hook is 7 kg. Floor covering on both sides Read and observe and on page 93 first. You can fit a double-sided floor covering in the luggage compartment. One side is made of fabric, the other side is washable (suitable for transporting wet or dirty items ). Transport of cargo 95 CAUTION The double sided floor covering can only be used in vehicles without the variable loading floor» page 99 - There is a risk of damage to the variable loading floor. Fig. 110 Luggage compartment cover stowed behind the rear seats Net on the luggage compartment cover Fig. 108 Net on the luggage compartment cover Read and observe and on page 93 first. If the support straps A » Fig. 109 are attached to the boot lid, then opening the lid will raise the boot lid cover (hereafter referred to as cover). Read and observe and on page 93 first. The net at the bottom of the luggage compartment cover » Fig. 108 is provided for transporting light and soft items. The maximum permissible load of the net is 1.5 kg. Luggage compartment cover The cover can be removed from the vehicle and stowed behind the rear seat backrests if required » Fig. 110. Before removing the cover, the sunshade at the back must be rolled up» page 70. Removing › On both sides of the boot lid unhook the straps A in direction of arrow 1 » Fig. 109. › Hold the raised cover and press on the two sides on the underside of the cover in the area of the recess C . › Remove the cover in the direction of the arrow 2 . Fitting › Place the fixtures B on the cover above the brackets C on the side trim » Fig. 109. › Press on the two sides to the upper side of the cover in the region of the mounts C . The fixtures B must lock into place of the recess C on both sides of the luggage compartment. › On both sides of the boot lid, unhook the straps A . WARNING Do not place any objects on the cover during the trip - There is a risk of injury if you brake or have a collision! Fig. 109 Remove the luggage compartment cover 96 Using the system CAUTION ■ Observe the following instructions to avoid canting and the subsequent damage to the cover or the side trim. ■ The cover must be inserted properly and the load must not exceed the height of the cover. ■ The cover must not be jammed in the surrounding seal of the luggage compartment lid when it is in the raised position. ■ There must be no object in the gap between the cover in the raise position and the rear backrest. Roll-up cover Read and observe and on page 93 first. Extending › Grasp the cover on the handle A and pull it out in the direction of the arrow 1 until it clicks » Fig. 111. Retracting › Push the cover in the area of handle A in the direction of the arrow 2 » Fig. 111. The cover rolls up automatically. The rolled-up cover can now be removed. Removing/inserting › Press on the side of the cross bar in the direction of arrow 3 and remove the cover in the arrow direction 4 » Fig. 111. Insertion takes place in reverse order. Stowage If the vehicle is equipped with the variable loading floor, then the removable roll-up luggage compartment cover can be stowed in the recesses of the luggage compartment side trim. › Fold the variable loading floor into the upper position » page 100. › Remove the side covers in the direction of arrows 1 » Fig. 112. › Insert the front part of the roll-up luggage compartment cover under a porFig. 111 Roll-up cover: Pull out / roll up / remove tion of the side trim D on the left. › Fold the rear part of the roll-up luggage compartment cover in the direction of the arrow 2 . › Reinsert the lamp in the opposite direction to the arrow 1 . › Fold out the variable loading floor to the upper position. WARNING No objects should be placed on the roll-up cover - there is a risk of damage to the cover and a risk of injury in the event of a sudden stop or a vehicle collision! Fig. 112 Removing side covers / stowing foldable luggage compartment cover Note If you want to stow the roll-up luggage compartment cover and the roof rack at the same time, then it is necessary that the rear part of the roll-up luggage compartment is covering the rear roof rack. Transport of cargo 97 Storage compartment with cargo element Fig. 113 Remove storage compartment › Use thecargoelements to secure the load as close as possible to the rear seats» Fig. 114 . Storage compartments under the floor covering Fig. 115 Lift floor covering/storage compartments under the floor covering Read and observe and on page 93 first. For vehicles that are not equipped with an emergency spare wheel located under the flooring of the luggage compartment B » Fig. 115. Fig. 114 Removing cargo element/example on how to mount the load by means of the cargo element Every storage compartment B is designed for storing small objects of up to 15 kg. in weight in total. The space behind the storage compartment is designed for storing small objects with a maximum total weight of 2.5 kg. Use of the storage compartments › Dividing the luggage compartment with variable loading floor » page 101. › Lift the floor covering in the direction of arrow» Fig. 115 and hook into hook A on the upper edge of the variable loading floor. › Stow the cargo in the storage compartments. › Unhook hook A and fold back the flooring against the direction of the arrow (fold back the variable loading floor to the initial position if necessary). The cargo element is designed for attaching and securing objects with a maximum total weight of 8 kg. When transporting tall objects in the compartments, the hook A must be hooked onto the upper edge of the variable loading floor. Storage compartment › Remove the storage compartment cover in the direction of the arrow» Fig. 113. Insertion takes place in reverse order. CAUTION Before closing the boot lid, check that the cargo transported in the storage compartments does not strike against the luggage compartment cover - there is a risk of damage to the lid. Read and observe and on page 93 first. The storage compartment with cargo element may be located on either of the two sides of the luggage compartment, depending on the equipment variant. Cargoelement › Touse theCargoRemove element in the direction of arrow» Fig. 114 - . 98 Using the system › Place the rear bar against the front bar and press them together at both Multi-function pocket ends B . › The front hooks on both sides of the luggage compartment fold back opposite to the direction of arrow 1 . Removing/inserting › Remove the roll-up cover » page 97. › Remove the pocket from the fittings in the direction of the arrow 6 » Fig. 116. Insertion takes place in reverse order. › Insert the end of the bar marked within the right-hand mounting and the end of the bar marked with in the left-hand mounting. The arrows should be pointing forward. Class N1 vehicles Read and observe and on page 93 first. In class N1 vehicles that are not fitted with a protective grille, a lashing set that complies with the EN 12195 standard (1-4) must be used for fastening the load. Fig. 116 Multi-function pocket: Pull out / insert / push in / remove Read and observe and on page 93 first. The multifunction pocket (hereinafter referred to as pocket) is provided for storing clothing and light objects with no sharp edges. The maximum permissible load of the multifunction box is 3 kg. Removal and fitting › Fold down the front hooks on both sides of the luggage compartment in the direction of arrow 1 » Fig. 116. › Grasp the rear bar A with both hands and withdraw the pocket in arrow direction 2 . › Place the rear bar onto the two hooks that are folded forward in the direction of the arrow 3 all the way to the stop. Proper functioning of the electrical installation is essential for safe vehicle operation. It is important to ensure that the electrical installation is not damaged during the adjustment process or when the storage area is being loaded and unloaded. Variable loading floor in the luggage compartment (Estate) Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Positions of the variable loading floor Fold together / fold out the variable loading floor Dividing the luggage compartment 100 100 101 Pushing in › Remove the rear bar of the hook in direction of arrow 4 push in the pocket in the direction of arrow 5 » Fig. 116. Transport of cargo 99 Positions of the variable loading floor The maximum permissible load of the variable loading floor is 75 kg. For the transport of heavy loads, adjust the variable loading floor in the lower position » Fig. 118. Set into the lower position › Check that the area below the variable loading floor is empty. › Lift the variable loading floor by the handle A » Fig. 118 over the loading edge in the direction of arrow 2 . › Pull the loading floor towards you in the direction of arrow 3 until it sinks to the bottom position, and push forward. Fold together / fold out the variable loading floor Fig. 117 Set variable loading floor to the upper position / variable loading floor in the upper position Fig. 119 Fold up variable loading floor / folded variable cargo floor in the upper position Fig. 118 Set variable loading floor to the lower position / variable loading floor in the lower position The variable loading floor can be set to the upper or lower position. Set to the upper position › Lift the variable loading floor by the handle A » Fig. 117about 20 cm high and pull towards you. › Lift the loading floor to the height of the roll-up luggage compartment cover in the direction of arrow 1 until you hear the clicking sound and press forward. The space below the variable loading floor can be used for stowing objects such as the removed roll-up luggage compartment cover » page 97, the roof cross bars» page 102 etc. 100 Using the system › To fold together, hold the variable loading floor on the handle A and lift in the direction of arrow 1 » Fig. 119. › Fold up the variable loading floor by moving it in the direction of the arrow 2. Folding out takes place in reverse order. The variable loading floor is folded together / out in the same way in the upper and lower position. Dividing the luggage compartment Using the net partition Fig. 120 Dividing the boot with variable loading floor › To divide, lift the variable loading floor by the handle A and push in the rear edge of the variable loading floor in the grooves B in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 120. Fig. 121 Open part of the roll-up luggage compartment cover / release lever The variable loading floor is secured against movements in the grooves B . Folding out takes place in reverse order. The variable loading floor is divided in the same way in the upper and lower position. Net partition Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Using the net partition Removing and installing the net partition housing 101 102 Fig. 122 Correctly secure net partition behind the front seats in the pulled-out state The net partition can either be pulled out and secured from behind the rear seats or behind the front seats. Pull out and secure the net partition behind the rear seats › Fold out part of the roll-up luggage compartment cover A in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 121. › Pull out the net partition at the upper crossbar C and hook into one of the receptacles D » Fig. 122. Transport of cargo 101 › On the other side, press on the crossbar in the direction of the arrow and hook it into the appropriate receptacle D . › Make sure that the crossbar is firmly seated in the two mountings D . › Fold back part A of the roll-up luggage compartment cover in the opposite direction of the arrow » Fig. 121. Using the net partition behind the rear seats › Fold out part A of the roll-up luggage compartment cover in the direction of arrow » Fig. 121. › Press on the crossbar and remove it from the receptacles D » Fig. 122, first on one side, then on the other side. › The crossbar C Hold in such a way that the net partition can slowly roll up without being damaged. › Fold back part A of the roll-up luggage compartment cover in the opposite direction of the arrow » Fig. 121. Pull out and secure the net partition behind the front seats The process is analogous to that for behind the rear seats. Before pulling out the net partition, the rear seat backs are to be folded forwards. After rolling up the net partition into the housing, the rear seat backs are folded back » page 78. › To install, insert the recesses on the housing A into the mountings on the rear seat backrests and push the housing against the arrow 1 up to the stop. › Fold the rear seat backrests to their original position. Transport on the roof rack Fig. 124 Attachment points CAUTION If the net partition blocks when pulling it out, push the release lever B in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 121. Removing and installing the net partition housing Fig. 123 Removing the net partition housing Fig. 125 Remove the side panels of the luggage compartment/stow the roof rack The attachment points A and B are located on both sides of the vehicle » Fig. 124. › To remove, fold forwarded the rear seat backrests and open the rear right door. › Push the housing A in the direction of the arrow 1 and remove it from the mountings in the direction of the arrow 2 » Fig. 123. 102 Using the system The mounting and dismounting of the basic carrier is carried out according to the instructions provided. Roof load The maximum permitted weight of the load incl. carriers is 75 kg. Stowing the roof racks With vehicles have the variable loading floor, then the roof racks can be stowed in the recesses of the luggage compartment side trim. › Fold the variable loading floor into the upper position » page 100. › Remove the side panels of the luggage compartment in the direction of ar- rows 1 » Fig. 125. › Remove the key from the roof rack» and stow in the recess C . › Insert the front roof rack A into the front recesses of the side panel and the rear roof rack B into the back recesses of the side trim. › Replace the side trims of the luggage compartment in the opposite direction of the arrow 1 . › Fold out the variable loading floor to the upper position » page 100. WARNING The following instructions must be observed to aid road safety when transporting cargo on the roof rack. ■ Always distribute the load on the roof rack evenly and secure properly with suitable lashing straps or tensioning straps. ■ When transporting heavy objects or objects which take up a large area on the roof rack system, the handling of the car may change as a result of the displacement of the centre of gravity. The style of driving and speed must therefore be adapted to the current circumstances. ■ The permissible roof load, permissible axle loads and gross permissible weight of the vehicle must not be exceeded under any circumstances – risk of accident! CAUTION ■ Before stowing the roof rack, the key must be removed from the carrier - otherwise there is a risk of key corruption. ■ If you want to stow the roof rack and the roll-up luggage compartment cover at the same time, then it is necessary that the rear part of the roll-up luggage compartment is covering the rear roof rack. CAUTION ■ Make sure that the sliding / tilting roof or the boot lid does not collide with the roof load when opened. ■ Ensure the roof aerial is not impaired by the load being transported. Note We recommend that you use a roof rack from ŠKODA Original Accessories. Heating and ventilation Heating, manual air conditioning system, Climatronic Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects: 104 104 105 105 106 Heating and manual air conditioning Climatronic (automatic air conditioning) Climatronic - automatic operation Air distribution control Air outlet vents The heater heats and ventilates the vehicle interior. The air conditioning system also cools and dehumidifies the vehicle interior. The heating effect is dependent upon the coolant temperature, thus full heat output only occurs when the engine has reached its operating temperature. The cooling system works under the following conditions. The cooling system is switched on. The engine is running. The outside temperature is above 2 °C. The blower is switched on. When the cooling system is switched on, it prevents misting of the windscreen and windows. It is possible to boost the effectiveness of the cooling system by briefly activating the air recirculation system» page 105. Health protection To reduce health risks (e.g. common colds), the following instructions for the use of the cooling system are to be observed. ▶ The difference between the outside temperature and the inside temperature should not be greater than 5 °C. ▶ The cooling system should be turned off about 10 minutes before the end of the journey. ▶ Once a year, a disinfection of the air conditioner must be carried out by a specialist company. Heating and ventilation 103 WARNING ■ The blower should always be on to prevent the windows from misting. Otherwise there is a risk of an accident. ■ Under certain circumstances, air at a temperature of about 5 °C can flow out of the vents when the cooling system is switched on. Note ■ The air inlet in front of the windscreen must be free of e.g. ice, snow or leaves to ensure that the heating and cooling system operates properly. ■ After switching on the cooling Condensation from the evaporator of the air conditioning may drip down and form a puddle below the vehicle. This is not a leak! ■ If the coolant temperature is too high, the cooling system is switched off to ensure that the engine cools down. Heating and manual air conditioning Switch the cooling system on/off Switch on/off the rear window heating » page 70 Switch recirculation on/off » page 105 When the function is switched on, the warning light illuminates below the button. Information on the cooling system After pressing the button , the warning light underneath the button illuminates even if not all conditions are met for the cooling system. The cooling system starts to work as soon as the following conditions have been met » page 103. When the air distribution control is turned to position the cooling system is activated. Note To ensure adequate thermal comfort, during operation of the manual air conditioning there could be an increase in the engine idle speed in some circumstances. Climatronic (automatic air conditioning) Fig. 126 Controls of the heating / air conditioning Read and observe on page 104 first. Individual functions can be set or switched on by turning the dial or pressing the corresponding button » Fig. 126. Setting temperature ▶ Reducing the temperature / increasing the temperature B Set the blower speed (Level 0: Fan off, level 6: highest speed) C Set the direction of the air outlet » page 106 D Depending on equipment fitted: ▶ Auxiliary heating and ventilation on / switch off » page 107 ▶ Switching the windscreen heater on/off » page 70 A 104 Using the system Fig. 127 Controls the Climatronic Read and observe on page 104 first. Individual functions can be set or switched on by turning the dial or pressing the corresponding button » Fig. 127. A Display the temperature setting for the left side B Display the temperature setting for the right side C Set the direction of the air outlet » page 106 Adjust fan speed (the setting is indicated by the number of illuminated control lamps shown in the knob) E Adjust the temperature for the left side (or for both sides)1) ▶ Reducing the temperature / increasing the temperature F Adjust the temperature for the right side (or for both sides)2) ▶ Reducing the temperature / increasing the temperature G Depending on equipment fitted: ▶ Auxiliary heating and ventilation on / switch off » page 107 ▶ Switching Climatronic system off » page 104, in section Introduction H Interior temperature sensor Switch recirculation on/off » page 105 Intense air flow to the windscreen on / off (when switching on, the air flow to the windows and is also switched on) Switch on/off the rear window heating » page 70 Switch on/off the windscreen heating » page 70 Climatronic set in the Infotainment » Owner´s Manual Infotainment Synchronize the temperature inside the entire vehicle according to the temperature setting on the driver's side Switching automatic mode on » page 105 Switch the cooling system on/off D CAUTION Do not cover the interior temperature sensor H » Fig. 127 - the function of the Climatronic could be affected. Note In order to ensure adequate thermal comfort, there may be an increase in engine idle speed during operation of the Climatronic in some circumstances. Climatronic - automatic operation Read and observe on page 104 first. The automatic mode is used in order to maintain a constant temperature and to demist the windows in the interior of the car. › To turn on, press the » Fig. 127 on page 104 press. › To turn off, press any button for the air distribution or change the blower speed. The temperature regulation is continued. Holding the button will turn on automatically. Operating modes Automatic mode works in three modes - moderate, medium, and intensive. Setting the individual operating modes» Owner´s Manual Infotainment. When the function is switched on, a warning light lights up within or below the button. After the automatic mode is switched on, Climatronic works in the last selected mode. The currently selected mode is displayed in the Infotainment display. Some functions can also be operated in Infotainment » Owner´s Manual Infotainment. Air distribution control Setting temperature The temperature can be set on the Climatronic control unit or in Infotainment » Owner´s Manual Infotainment. In the range between 16 ° C to 29.5 ° C, an automatic temperature control takes place. At a temperature setting below 16 ° C, lights up in the temperature display, the Climatronic functions with maximum cooling performance. At a temperature setting over 29.5 ° C, lights up in the temperature display, the Climatronic functions with maximum heating output. 1) 2) Read and observe on page 104 first. The recirculation mode prevents contaminated outside air getting into the Interior of the vehicle. In recirculated air mode air is sucked out of the interior of the vehicle and then fed back into the interior. › To switch on press thebutton. The warning light below the button lights up. › Toswitch off, press the button again. The warning light below the button goes out. Applies to left-hand drive vehicles. Applies to right-hand drive vehicles. Heating and ventilation 105 Heating and manual air conditioning system If the air distribution control is set to position when the recirculation modes is switched on, the recirculated-air mode is switched off. By pressing the button, the air recirculation also in this position can be switched on again. Air outlet vents When the is switched on and the temperature regulator is turned to the left, the recirculated-air mode is switched on. Climatronic The Climatronic can have a sensor that measures the air recirculation mode and automatically turns on if there is an increased concentration of pollutants in the incoming air. When the pollutant concentration decreases to the normal level, the recirculated air mode is automatically switched off. The automatic on / off of the air recirculation function can be set in Infotainment » Owner´s Manual Infotainment. This only works when the outside temperature is above 2 ° C. Fig. 128 Air vents at the front An automatic shut-off of the air recirculation function is performed by pressing the button, possibly depending on the moisture conditions in the vehicle interior. WARNING The recirculation system cannot be switched on for a longer period of time, because no fresh air is fed through from the outside. “Stale air” may result in fatigue in the driver and occupants, reduce attention levels and also cause the windows to mist up. As soon as windows mist up, turn on the recirculation system immediately - The is a risk of an accident! CAUTION We recommend not smoking in the vehicle when the recirculating air operation is switched on. The smoke sucked from the interior is deposited on the evaporator of the air conditioner. This produces a permanent odour when the air conditioning system is operating which can only be eliminated through considerable effort and expense (replacement of compressor). Fig. 129 Air vents at the rear Read and observe on page 104 first. The direction of airflow can be adjusted using the air outlet vents 3, 4 » Fig. 128 and 6 » Fig. 129 - the outlets can be opened and closed individually. The setting of the airflow direction is carried out by moving the adjustment element A » Fig. 128 or» Fig. 129 in the desired direction. › To open, turn the controller B » Fig. 128 or» Fig. 129 upwards. › Toclose, turn the controller B » Fig. 128 or» Fig. 129 downwards. Depending on the setting for air distribution, the air will flow from the following air vents. 106 Using the system Set the direction of the air outlet Air vents» Fig. 128 and » Fig. 129 1. 2. 4 1. 2. 4. 5. 7 3. 4. 6 4. 5. 7 3. 4. 5. 6. 7 CAUTION The air inlet in front of the windscreen must be free (e.g. of ice, snow or leaves) to ensure that the auxiliary heating operates properly. Note ■ The auxiliary heating only switches the blower on, if it has achieved a coolant temperature of approx. 50 °C. ■ In the engine compartment, water vapour may form during the operation of the heater. CAUTION Do not cover the air vents - the air distribution could be compromised. Switch on / off Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventilation) Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Switch on / off Remote control 107 108 The auxiliary heating heats the vehicle interior as well as the engine. For heating, fuel is consumed from the fuel tank. The auxiliary ventilation enables fresh air to flow into the vehicle interior with the engine switched off, whereby the interior temperature is effectively decreased (e.g. with the vehicle parked in the sun). The auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventilation) (referred to just as auxiliary heating in the following) ensures the heating / ventilation depending on the setting of the air conditioning and the air outlet vents before switching off the ignition. WARNING ■ The auxiliary heating must never be operated in closed rooms (e.g. garag- es) – risk of poisoning! ■ The auxiliary heating must not be allowed to run during refuelling – risk of fire. ■ The exhaust pipe of the auxiliary heating is located on the underside of the vehicle. If you want to use the auxiliary heating, do not park the vehicle in places where the exhaust fumes can come into contact with flammable materials such as dry grass, undergrowth, leaves, spilled fuel etc. - There is a risk of fire. Fig. 130 Button for switching on / off the Climatronic / manual air conditioning Read and observe and on page 107 first. Functional requirements of the auxiliary heating. The charge state of the vehicle battery is sufficient. The fuel supply is adequate (the warning light is not illuminated in the instrument cluster). Manual on / off ▶ Using the button on the operating part of the air conditioning» Fig. 130. ▶ Using the (switch on) / (switch off) button on the remote control operation. Automatic on / off ▶ Via an automatically programmed and activated pre-set time in Infotainment. ▶ According to the environmental conditions. Switching off the auxiliary heating takes place automatically when there is a lack of fuel (warning light in the instrument cluster lights up). Heating and ventilation 107 After switching off the system, the coolant pump and the auxiliary heating will continue running a little while longer in order to burn the remaining fuel in the heating. Setting automatic on / off Climatronic:on the Climatronic operating part, press thebutton, then tap the function surfacein the Infotainment display. There will be a display of the last set operating mode with the option to change this. Manual air conditioning: on Infotainment, press the button, then tap the function surface in the Infotainment display. Display warning light A Lights up green for 2 seconds. Lights up red for 2 seconds. Slowly flashes green for 2 seconds. Quickly flashes green for 2 seconds. Then follow the instructions in the Infotainment display. When automatic switching on is activated, the warning light in the symbol button lights up for about 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off » Fig. 130. Flashes red for 2 seconds. Remote control Lights up orange for 2 seconds, then green or red. Fig. 131 Radio remote control Lights up orange for 2 seconds, then flashes green or red. Flashes orange for 5 seconds. Meaning The auxiliary heating has been switched on. The auxiliary heating has been switched off. The ignition signal was not received. The auxiliary heating is blocked, e.g. because the tank is nearly empty or there is a fault in the auxiliary heating. The switch off signal was not received. The battery is weak, however the switching on or off signal was received. The battery is weak, however the switching on or off signal was not received. The battery is discharged, however the switching on or off signal was not received. Replace the battery » page 195. CAUTION Read and observe and on page 107 first. Description of the remote control » Fig. 131 A Warning light B Aerial Switch on the auxiliary heating Switch off the auxiliary heating To switch the remote control on or off, hold the remote control vertically, with the aerial B » Fig. 131pointing upwards. The antenna must not be covered with the fingers or the palm of the hand during this process. The auxiliary heating can only be switched on/off safely using the remote control if the distance between the radio remote control and the vehicle is at least 2 m. 108 Using the system ■ The remote control must be protected against moisture, severe shocks and direct sunlight - there is a risk of damage to the remote control. ■ The range of the remote control with a charged battery is a few hundred me- tres (depending on obstructions between the remote control and the vehicle, weather conditions, the battery condition etc.). Note Do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is stationary. If possible, start your journey as soon as the engine has started. Through this, the engine reaches its operating temperature faster. Driving Starting-off and Driving Starting and stopping the engine Electronic immobiliser and steering lock Introduction Read and observe This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Electronic immobiliser and steering lock Switch on/off ignition Starting / stopping the engine Problems with the engine start - vehicles with starter button 109 110 110 111 Depending on equipment fitted, it is possible to switch the ignition on/off and start/stop the engine with the key in the ignition or using the starter button. WARNING ■ Never switch off the engine before the vehicle is stationary – risk of acci- dent! ■ While driving with the engine stopped the ignition must always be switched on. Otherwise, the steering may lock - danger of an accident! ■ Do not withdraw the ignition key from the ignition lock until the vehicle has come to a stop » page 114, Parking. Otherwise, the steering may lock danger of an accident! ■ Never leave the vehicle unattended with the engine running - there is a risk of theft etc! ■ Never (e.g. in garages) run the engine in a closed place - there is a risk of poisoning and death! CAUTION ■ Only start the engine when the engine and the vehicle are stationary - there is a risk of starter and engine damage! ■ Do not push-start the engine – There is a risk of damaging the engine and the catalytic converter! The battery from another vehicle can be used as a jump-start aid. ■ On vehicles with the starter button, pay attention to where the key is located. The system can recognize the valid key, even if it has been accidentally left on the vehicle roof - there is danger of loss or damage to the key! and on page 109 first. The electronic immobiliser (hereinafter referred to as immobiliser) makes the theft or unauthorised use of your vehicle more difficult. Immobiliser The immobiliser allows the engine to start provided an original vehicle key only is used. Malfunction of the immobiliser If a component in the immobiliser key fails, it is not possible to start the engine. A corresponding message appears in the display of the instrument cluster to explain the immobiliser is active. To start, use the other vehicle key or seek help from a specialist garage. Steering lock - locking › On vehicles with ignition lock, remove the key and turn the steering wheel until the steering lock engages. › On vehicles with a starter button, switch off the ignition and open the driver's door. If the driver's door is opened and the ignition is switched off afterwards, the steering is only locked automatically after the vehicle has been locked. Steering lock - unlock › On vehicles with ignition lock, insert the key into the ignition and turn on the ignition. If this is not possible, then move the steering wheel slightly back and forth, as a result of which the steering lock should unlock. › On vehicles with starter button, get into the vehicle and close the driver's door. Under certain circumstances, the steering lock can be unlocked only when the ignition is switched on or the engine is started. WARNING Never let the vehicle roll with locked steering lock - there is a risk of accident! Starting-off and Driving 109 Starting engine › On vehicles with Ignition lock, turn the key to position 3 and the engine starts» Fig. 132 on page 110 . Then release the key, the engine will start automatically. Switch on/off ignition If the engine does not start within 10 seconds, turn the key to position 1 . Repeat the start-up process after 30 s. › On vehicles withstarter button, press the button briefly» Fig. 132 on page 110 - , the motor will start automatically. For vehicles with diesel engines, the glow plug warning light goes on during starting. The engine starts after the warning light goes out. Fig. 132 Positions of the vehicle key in the ignition lock / starter button Read and observe and on page 109 first. Positions of the vehicle key in the ignition lock» Fig. 132 - 1 Ignition switched off, engine switched off 2 Ignition switched on 3 Starting engine Switching on /off ignition in vehicles with starter button › Press the» Fig. 132 - button, the ignition is turned on / off. On vehicles with manual transmission the pedal must not be depressed to switch on / off the ignition, otherwise the engine will start. Switching the engine off › Stop the vehicle. › On vehicles withignition lock, turn the key to position 1 » Fig. 132 on page 110. › On vehicles withstarter button, press the button» Fig. 132 on page 110 - , The engine and the ignition will be switched off simultaneously. For vehicles with automatic transmission, the ignition key can only be removed if the selector lever is in position P . Do not switch the engine off immediately at the end of your journey if the engine has been working at high revs over a prolonged period, but leave it to run at an idling speed for about 1 minute. This prevents any possible accumulation of heat when the engine is switched off. On vehicles with automatic transmission, the brake pedal must not be depressed to switch on / off the ignition, otherwise the engine will start. Emergency shutdown of the engine in vehicles with starter button The system is equipped with a protective device against accidental switching off, the engine can only be shut off while driving in the event of an emergency. Starting / stopping the engine › Keep the knob pressed» Fig. 132 on page 110 - or press it twice within 1 sec- Read and observe and on page 109 first. Before starting the engine › Firmly apply the handbrake. › For vehicles with manual transmission, shift gear stick to neutral, depress the clutch pedal and hold it there until the engine starts. › For vehicles with automatic transmission, place the selector lever in position P or N and » depress the brake pedal until the engine starts. 110 Driving ond. After the emergency stop of the engine, the steering lock will remain unlocked. CAUTION When the outdoor temperature is below -10 ° C, the selector lever when start ing must always be in P mode. Note ■ The engine running noises may be louder at first for a short time after start- The START STOP system (hereinafter referred to as the system) reduces CO2 emissions and harmful emissions, and saves fuel. ing the cold engine. ■ You should not switch on any major electrical components during the heating period, otherwise the vehicle battery will be drained unnecessarily. ■ After switching off the ignition, the radiator fan may (also intermittently) continue to operate for approx. 10 minutes. If the system determine that the engine is not needed when the vehicle stops or is at a standstill (e.g. at the traffic lights), it turns off the engine and starts it again when moving off. Problems with the engine start - vehicles with starter button Therefore the system may react differently in situations which seem identical from the driver's perspective. Fig. 133 Starting the engine - press the button with the key The system function depends on many factors. Some of them are down to the driver, the others are systemic and can neither be influenced nor identified. The system is automatically activated every time the ignition is switched on (even where this has previously been manually deactivated with the button ). Note If the engine has stopped due to the system, the ignition remains on. Operation Read and observe and Fig. 134 Display on page 109 first. If no engine start is possible and the display of the instrument cluster shows a message that the key could not be detected by the system or there is a system fault, then try to start the engine as follows. › Press the starter button with the key » Fig. 133. If the engine does not start, the help of a specialist garage is required. CAUTION The key may not be detected by the system if the battery in the key is running out of charge or the signal fails (strong electromagnetic field) or is shielded (e.g. in an aluminium case). The engine is automatically started as soon as the clutch pedal is depressed. Vehicles with automatic transmission The engine is automatically switched off as soon as the vehicle comes to a halt and the brake pedal is operated. START-STOPsystem Introduction The engine is automatically started as soon as the brake pedal is released. This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Operation Manually deactivating/activating the system Vehicles with manual transmission The engine is automatically switched off as soon as the vehicle comes to a halt, the shift lever is moved into neutral and the clutch pedal is released. 111 112 Starting-off and Driving 111 Conditions for the system function The following conditions must be met for the system to function correctly. The driver's door is closed. The driver has fastened the seat belt. The bonnet is closed. The driving speed was higher than 4 km.h after the last stop. System status The system status is shown in the display when the vehicle comes to a halt » Fig. 134. The engine is automatically switched off; when the vehicle moves off, the ignition process will be automatically initiated. The engine is not automatically switched off. Note ■ If the driver's seat belt is removed for more than 30 seconds or the driver's door is opened after the engine has switched off automatically, the engine will have to be restarted manually. ■ No automatic engine shut-down takes place when a vehicle with automatic transmission is moving at low speed (e.g. during a traffic jam) and remains stationary after pressing the brake pedal lightly. Automatic engine shut-down takes place if you press the brake pedal down with more force. ■ For vehicles with automatic transmission there is no automatic engine shutdown when the system detects a manoeuvring action due to a large steering angle. Manually deactivating/activating the system The engine does not shut down when the vehicle stops, if e.g. the following applies. ▶ The engine temperature for the proper function of the system has not yet been reached. ▶ The charge state of the vehicle battery is too low. ▶ The current consumption is too high. ▶ High air conditioning or heating output (high fan speed, big difference between the desired and actual interior temperature). If the engine has shut down automatically but the system detects that the engine is required to run (e.g. if the brake pedal is pressed repeatedly) then the system automatically starts up the engine. More information about the current system status can be displayed on the Infotainment screen» Owner´s Manual Infotainment. If there is a system fault, the following message will appear in the display of the instrument cluster. Seek help from a specialist garage. Fig. 135 Button for the START-STOP system › To deactivate/activate the system, press the button» Fig. 135. When the system is deactivated, the symbol in the button lights up. If the system is turned off, it will be automatically reactivated after turning the ignition off and on. Note If the system is deactivated when the engine is turned off automatically, then the automatic start process takes place. Brakes and Parking Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Handbrake Parking 112 Driving 113 114 The wear and tear on the brake pads is dependent on the operating conditions and driving style. In difficult conditions (e.g. urban, sporty driving), the condition of the brakes should be checked between service intervals by a specialist garage. Brake response can be slower if the brakes are covered in moisture or, in winter, have a layer of ice or salt on them. The brakes should be cleaned and dried by applying the brakes many times over » . Corrosion on the brake discs and dirt on the brake pads can occur if the vehicle has been parked for a long period and if you do not make much use of the braking system. The brakes are cleaned by applying the brakes several times over » . Before negotiating a long or steep gradient, reduce speed and shift down a gear. As a result, the braking effect of the engine will be used, reducing the load on the brakes. If, nevertheless, there is a need for additional braking, it should be carried out at intervals. WARNING (Continued) ■ Do not depress the brake pedal, if there is no requirement to slow down. This causes the brakes to overheat and can also result in a longer braking distance and excessive wear - There is a risk of an accident! ■ Only brake for the purpose of drying and cleaning the brake discs if the traffic conditions permit this. Do not place any other road users in jeopardy. ■ Recommendations for new brake pads should be followed. ■ When stopping and parking, the parking brake should always be applied firmly, otherwise the vehicle could move off - There is a risk of an accident! ■ If a front spoiler, full wheel trim, etc. is mounted retrospectively, it must be ensured that the air supply to the front wheel brakes is not reduced. Otherwise, the front brakes could be in danger of overheating – There is a risk of an accident! Handbrake Emergency braking warning - If it is necessary to brake hard, the system may cause the brake lights to automatically flash, to alert the traffic behind. Fig. 136 Handbrake New brake pads must first be““run in”” because these do not initially have the best possible braking effect. Drive especially carefully for the first 200 km or so. If the brake fluid level is too low, it can cause faults in the braking system; the warning light will light up in the instrument cluster » page 33, Braking system. If the warning light does not light up, yet the stopping distance is perceived to be longer than before, the driving style should be adapted in view of the unknown cause of the problem, and braking kept to a minimum - seek the help of a specialist garage without delay. The brake booster increases the pressure generated with the brake pedal. The brake booster only operates when the engine is running. WARNING ■ Greater physical effort for braking is required when the engine is switched off – risk of accident! ■ During the braking procedure on a vehicle with manual transmission, when the vehicle is in gear and at low revs, press the clutch pedal. Otherwise, the functionality of the brake system may be impaired – risk of accident! Read and observe on page 113 first. The handbrake secures the vehicle against unwanted movement when stopping and parking. Apply › Pull the handbrake lever firmly upwards. Release › Pull the handbrake lever up slightly and at the same time push in the lock button » Fig. 136 . › Move the lever right down while pressing the lock button. The handbrake warning lightlights up when the handbrake is applied, provi ded the ignition is on. Starting-off and Driving 113 A warning signal sounds if the vehicle is inadvertently driven off with the handbrake applied. The handbrake warning is activated if the vehicle is driven at a speed of over 5 km/h for more than 3 seconds. WARNING Disengage the handbrake completely. A handbrake which is only partially disengaged can result in the rear brakes overheating. This can have a negative effect on the operation of the brake system – risk of accident! Note Push the armrest cover all the way back to the stop before applying the handbrake» page 78. Manual shifting of gears and pedals Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects: 114 115 Manual gear changing Pedals Manual gear changing Fig. 137 The shift pattern Parking Read and observe on page 113 first. When stopping and parking, look for a place with a suitable surface » . Only carry out the activities while parking in the specified order. › Bring the vehicle to a stop and depress the brake pedal. › Firmly apply the handbrake. › On vehicles with automatic transmission place the selector lever in the P po- The shift pattern for the individual gear positions is shown on the gear lever » Fig. 137. › Switch off the engine. › For vehicles with Manual transmission, select 1st gear or Reverse gear R. › Release the brake pedal. Always depress the clutch pedal all the way down. This prevents uneven wear on the clutch. sition. WARNING ■ The parts of the exhaust system can become very hot. Therefore, never stop the vehicle in places where the underside of your vehicle could come into contact with flammable materials (e.g. dry grass, leaves, spilled fuel or the like). - Risk of fire and serious injury can occur! ■ When leaving the vehicle never leave people unattended in the car who could, for example, lock the vehicle or release the brake - There is a risk of an accident and an injury! The gearshift indicator must be observed when changing gear » page 42. Reverse gear is engaged › Stop the vehicle. › The clutch pedal is fully depressed. › Switch the gear lever to N. › Push the shift lever downwards fully to the left and then forward into R» Fig. 137. The reversing lights will come on once reverse gear is engaged, provided the ignition is on. WARNING Never engage reverse gear when driving – risk of accident! 114 Driving CAUTION If not in the process of changing gear, do not leave your hand on the gearshift lever while driving. The pressure from the hand can cause the gearshift mechanism to wear excessively. Pedals The operation of the pedals must not be hindered under any circumstances! Only a floor mat (ex-factory or from the ŠKODA Original Accessories range) which can be secured to the attachment points should be used in the driver's footwell. WARNING There should be no objects in the driver's footwell, otherwise the pedal operation can be impeded - risk of accident! WARNING (Continued) ■ If the vehicle stalls with the engine running, in the D, S, R or Tiptronic mode, then the vehicle must be prevented from rolling away by means of the brake pedal, parking brake or using the Auto Hold function. Even when the engine is idling, the power transmission is never completely interrupted – the vehicle creeps. ■ When leaving the vehicle, the selector lever must always be set to P . Otherwise, the vehicle could be set in motion - risk of accident! CAUTION If you want to move the selector lever from position N to position D / S whilst driving, the engine must be running at idling speed. Select selector lever position Fig. 138 Selector lever settings / display Automatic gearbox Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Select selector lever position Selector lever lock Manual shifting of gears (Tiptronic) Starting-off and driving 115 116 116 117 Read and observe and on page 115 first. The automatic transmission performs an automatic gear change irrespective of the engine load, the operation of the accelerator, the vehicle speed and the selected driving mode. The selector lever can be moved through shifting to one of the following positions » Fig. 138. In some positions you have to push the locking button » page 116, Selector lever lock. The modes of the automatic transmission can be adjusted by the driver by means of the selector lever. When the ignition is switched on, the gearbox mode and the currently selected gear are indicated in the display » Fig. 138. WARNING ■ Do not accelerate when selecting drive mode prior to moving off - There is a risk of an accident! ■ Never move the selector lever to mode R or P when driving – There is a risk of an accident! Park - the position can be set only when the vehicle is at a standstill. The drive wheels are mechanically locked. R Reverse gear - The position can only be selected when the vehicle is stationary and the engine is idling. N Neutral (idle position) - Power transmission to the drive wheels is interrupted. P Starting-off and Driving 115 D/S Forward mode / sport programme - the gear change takes place in the position S at higher engine speeds than in mode D (Sprung position) - choice between positions D and S If the Sport driving mode is selected with the engine running » page 140, Selection of the driving mode (Driving Mode Selection) , the transmission is automatically set in the S mode. E – Economical driving mode If the driving mode Eco or Individual (engine - Eco) » page 140 is selected and the selection lever is in the setting D/S, the transmission is automatically set to mode E. This mode cannot be selected with the selector lever. The forward mode is switched up or down automatically in modeE at lower engine speeds than in mode D. The selector lever is not locked when quickly moving across the position N (e.g. from R to D/S). This, for example, helps to rock out a vehicle that is stuck, e.g. in a bank of snow. The selector lever lock will engage if the lever is in position N for more than approx. 2 seconds without the brake pedal being depressed. If it is not possible to release the gear selector from mode P in the usual manner, then this can be emergency unlocked » page 197. Note If you want to switch the selector lever from mode P to mode D/S or vice versa, move the selector lever quickly. This prevents that you accidentally select mode R or N. Manual shifting of gears (Tiptronic) Selector lever lock Fig. 140 Selector lever/multi-function steering wheel Fig. 139 Shift lock button Read and observe Read and observe and on page 115 first. The selector lever is locked in mode P and N to prevent that the forward driving is selected accidentally, thereby setting the vehicle in motion. The selector lever is locked only when the vehicle is stationary and at speeds up to 5 km/h. The selector lever lock is indicated by the illumination of the warning light . Releasing selector lever from mode P or N (selector lever lock) › Press the brake pedal and the lock button at the same time in the direction of 1 » Fig. 139 . To move the selector lever from mode N to D / S only the brake pedal is pressed. 116 Driving and on page 115 first. Tiptronic mode makes it possible to manually shift gears with the selector lever or multifunction steering wheel. Switching to manual shifting using the selector lever › Push the gear selector from position D/S towards the right, or left in a righthand drive vehicle. The current gear is maintained. Switching to manual shifting by using the rocker switches under the multifunction steering wheel › To change gear, pull one of the rocker switches - / + briefly towards the steering wheel » Fig. 140. › To cancel manual shift, pull the rocker switch + towards the steering wheel for more than 1 s. If you do not pull one of the rocker switches - / + for more than 1 minute, manual shifting of the gears is deactivated automatically. Changing gear › To shift up, tap the selector lever forwards + or pull the rocker switch + briefly towards the steering wheel » Fig. 140. › To shift down, tap the selector lever backwards - or pull the rocker switch - briefly towards the steering wheel » Fig. 140. The currently selected gear is indicated in the display » Fig. 138 on page 115 . The gearshift indicator must be observed when changing gear » page 42. When accelerating, the gearbox automatically shifts up into the higher gear just before the maximum permissible engine speed is reached. If a lower gear is selected, the gearbox does not shift down until there is no risk of the engine overrevving. Note It may be beneficial, for example, when travelling downhill, to use manual shifting of gears. Shifting to a lower gear reduces the load on the brakes and hence the wear on the brakes. Starting-off and driving Read and observe and on page 115 first. Moving off and stopping temporarily › Firmly depress and hold the brake pedal. › Start the engine. › Press the locking button and move the selector lever to the desired position » page 115. › Release the brake pedal and accelerate. The selector lever position N does not have to be selected when stopping for a short time (e.g. at a crossroads). However, the brake pedal should be depressed, in order to prevent the vehicle from rolling. Accelerating at maximum speed during the journey (kickdown function) If the accelerator pedal is depressed while the vehicle is in forward drive mode, the kick-down function is turned on. › Disable the TCS » page 121, Braking and stabilisation systems. › START STOP deactivate » page 112, Manually deactivating/activating the system. › Fully depress and hold the brake pedal with your left foot. › Fully depress the accelerator pedal with your right foot. › Release the brake pedal - the vehicle is running at maximum acceleration. Driving in neutral (“coasting”) When releasing the accelerator pedal, the vehicle moves without the braking effect of the engine. Operating conditions ▶ The selector lever is in the D/S position. ▶ Driving mode Eco or Individual (Drive - Eco) is selected» page 140, Selection of the driving mode (Driving Mode Selection). ▶ The vehicle is travelling at more than 20 km/h. ▶ No trailer or other accessory is connected to the trailer socket. The gear is selected again automatically, when you depress the accelerator or brake pedal or pull the left rocker switch - towards the steering wheel » page 116, Manual shifting of gears (Tiptronic). WARNING Rapid acceleration ( e.g. on slippery roads) can lead to a loss of control over the vehicle – There is a risk of accident! Running in and economical driving Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Running in the engine Tips on economical driving DriveGreen function Radiator shutters 118 118 118 119 The gear change is adjusted accordingly to achieve maximum acceleration. Starting at maximum speed (launch control function)1) The launch control function is available in mode S or Tiptronic. 1) This function is only valid for some engines. Starting-off and Driving 117 Running in the engine DriveGreen function During the first 1 500 km, the driving style is decisive for successful the running in process is. Fig. 141 Shown in the infotainment display During the first 1 000 km, the engine should not be charged with more than 3/4 of the maximum permitted engine revs and without the trailer. From about 1 000 to 1 500 km the engine can be pushed up to the maximum permitted engine speed. Tips on economical driving Fuel consumption depends on the driving style, road and weather conditions, and similar such factors. The DriveGreen function (hereinafter referred to as DriveGreen) evaluates the driving efficiency based on the information respecting the driving style. For an economical driving style, the following instructions must be observed. ▶ Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking. ▶ Observe the recommended gear » page 42. ▶ Avoid full throttle and high speeds. ▶ Reduce idling. ▶ Avoid short distances. ▶ Ensure the correct tyre inflation pressure is maintained » page 181. ▶ Avoid unnecessary ballast. ▶ Remove the roof rack before driving if it is not needed. ▶ Only turn on electrical consumers (e.g. seat heating) for as long as necessary. In Infotainment, the display is shown of up to three consumers which are currently showing the highest degree of fuel consumption » Owner´s Manual Infotainment, chapter CAR - vehicle settings. ▶ Briefly ventilate before turning on the cooling system, do not use the cooling system with the windows open. ▶ Do not leave windows open at high speeds. DriveGreen can be displayed on the Infotainment as follows. › Press the button in Infotainment and then tap on the function interfaces → DriveGreen. A driving liquid display With the driving is fluid, the display is located in the middle (near the green dot). When accelerating, the display moves down, and upwards when braking. B “Green leaf” The greener the leaf, the more economical the driving style. With less economical driving, the leaf is presented without any green colouring or it can be completely hidden. C bar graph The higher the green bars, the more economical the driving style. Each bar shows the driving efficiency in 5-second steps, the current bar is on the left. D scoring (0 - 100) The higher the indicated value, the more economical the driving style. When you tap the function surface D , a detailed assessment showing the driving efficiency during the last 30 minutes is displayed. If the trip lasts less than 30 minutes from the start, then the overview will add the assessment from the previous journey (the bars are shown in dark green). E the average fuel consumption from the start When you tap the E function surface, a detailed overview of the average fuel consumption during the last 30 minutes is shown. 118 Driving If the trip lasts less than 30 minutes from the start, then the overview will add the overview of the average fuel consumption from the previous journey (the bars are shown in dark green). F symbols The display may show the following four symbols, which give information on the current driving style. Economical driving style The current speed has a negative effect on fuel consumption. If the driving is not fluid, drive with anticipation Recommended gear Tips for economical driving Tap on the B leave to display tips for economical driving. Note Resetting the single-trip memory “from start” also resets the average consumption E and the driving assessment D . Radiator shutters The radiator shutters located in front of the radiator (hereinafter: shutter) help to reduce CO2 emissions as well as harmful emissions and to save fuel. If the system detects that it is possible to reduce the amount of air flowing to the radiator, it closes the blinds. As a result, the air resistance of the vehicle is reduced. Avoiding damage to your vehicle Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects: 119 119 Driving Tips Driving through water Driving Tips Only drive on roads and terrain that correspond to the vehicle parameters» page 208, Technical data. The driver is always responsible for deciding whether the vehicle can cope with the conditions and the terrain. WARNING ■ Adjust the speed and driving style to the current visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. Too high a speed or an erroneous manoeuvre may cause serious injury and damage to the vehicle. ■ Combustible objects such as dry leaves or twigs caught under the base of the vehicle could ignite on hot vehicle parts - risk of fire! CAUTION ■ Pay attention to the ground clearance of the vehicle! When driving over ob- jects which are larger than the ground clearance, the vehicle can get damaged. If, due to a function impairment of the shutters, a driving speed of 150 km/h is reached, an appropriate message is shown in the display of the instrument cluster. ■ Any objects that get trapped under the vehicle floor must be removed as After the display of the above message, the top speed of the vehicle is automatically limited to around 160 km/h. Driving through water If this message appears in the winter, the cause may be ice or snow caught up in the blinds. After the ice or snow has thawed, the blinds are functional again. If the impairment not due to ice or snow, then assistance from a specialist should be sought. soon as possible. These items can cause damage to the vehicle (e.g. to parts of the fuel or brake system). Fig. 142 Maximum permissible water level when driving through water Starting-off and Driving 119 The following must be observed to avoid damage to the vehicle when driving through bodies of water (e.g. flooded roads). Assist systems › Therefore determine the depth of the water before driving through bodies of General information water. The water level must not go above the web of the lower beam » Fig. 142. › Drive at no more than walking pace, otherwise a wave may form in front of the vehicle, which could cause the water to enter into the vehicle’s systems (e.g. the air intake system for the engine). › Never stop in the water, do not reverse and do not switch the engine off. CAUTION ■ If water gets into the vehicle’s systems (e.g. the air intake system for the en- gine) it can cause serious damage to the vehicle! ■ Oncoming vehicles can generate water waves which can exceed the permis- sible water level for your vehicle. ■ Do not drive through salt water, as the salt can cause corrosion. An vehicle coming into contact with salt water is to be thoroughly rinsed with fresh water. Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects: 120 Radar sensor WARNING ■ The assistance systems only serve to support and do not relieve the driver of the responsibility for driving the vehicle. ■ The increased safety provision, as well as the increased occupant protection provided by the assistance systems must not tempt you to take risks risk of accident! ■ Adjust the speed and driving style to the current visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. ■ The assistance systems have physical and system-related limitations. For this reason, the driver may experience some undesired or delayed system responses in certain situations. You should therefore always be alert and ready to intervene! ■ Only activate, deactivate or set the assistance systems so that you have the vehicle fully under control in every traffic situation - risk of accident! Radar sensor Fig. 143 Installation location of the radar sensor Read and observe on page 120 first. The radar sensor» Fig. 143 (hereinafter on referred to as sensor) uses electromagnetic waves to capture the traffic situation ahead of the vehicle. 120 Driving The sensor is a component of the ACC » page 134 and Front Assist » page 138 systems. The brake and stabilization systems are automatically activated each time the ignition is switched on, unless otherwise indicated. The sensor function may be impaired in the events of one of the following. ▶ The sensor cover is soiled (e.g. with mud, snow etc.). ▶ The area in front of and around the sensor cover is obscured (e.g. by labels, auxiliary headlights etc.). ▶ When visibility is poor, (e.g. fog, heavy rain, thick snowfall). The error display is in Chapter » page 32, Warning lights. If the sensor is covered or dirty, the corresponding message appears in the instrument cluster display for the ACC system» page 138, Malfunctionsor Front Assist system » page 140, Malfunctions. WARNING ■ If you suspect that the sensor is damaged, deactivate the ACC system and Front Assist system» page 136, » page 140. Have the sensor checked by a specialist garage. ■ A collision or damage in the front or lower area of the vehicle could affect the sensor function - there is risk of accident! Have the sensor checked by a specialist garage. ■ Do not cover the area in front of and around the sensor cover. This can lead to impaired function of the sensor - risk of accidents! Stabilisation control (ESC) Read and observe on page 121 first. ESC improves vehicle stability in critical driving situations (e.g. if the vehicle starts to skid) by the braking the individual wheels to maintain the desired direction. If there is a TCS intervention, the indicator light flashes in the instrument cluster. ESC Sport allows for a sportier driving style. With a slight over or under steering of the vehicle no ESC interventions will take place and the TCS is restricted so that it´s possible for the wheels of the driven axle to spin. The activation/deactivation of the ESC Sport can take place as follows. CAUTION Remove the snow with a brush and the ice with a solvent-free de-icer. ▶ By holding the button toactivate / by pressing the button to deactivate » Fig. 144 on page 122. ▶ Infotainment » Owner´s Manual Infotainment. Braking and stabilisation systems Withactivation the warning light lights up in the instrument cluster and an appropriate message is displayed in the instrument cluster. Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Stabilisation control (ESC) Anti-lock braking system (ABS) Engine drag torque control (MSR) Traction control (TCS) Electronic differential lock (EDL and XDS) Driver Steering Recommendation (DSR) Brake Assist (HBA) Hill Start Assist (HHC) Multi collision brake (MCB) Trailer stabilization system (TSA) WARNING The general information relating to the use of assistance systems must be observed » page 120, in section Introduction. 121 121 122 122 122 122 123 123 123 123 With deactivation the warning light extinguishes in the instrument cluster and an appropriate message is displayed in the instrument cluster. Anti-lock braking system (ABS) Read and observe on page 121 first. ABS prevents the wheels locking when braking. Thus helping the driver to maintain control of the vehicle. The intervention of the ABS is noticeable from the pulsating movements of the brake pedal which is accompanied by noises. Assist systems 121 When the ABS system is active, do not brake periodically or reduce the pressure on the brake pedal. Duringdeactivation the warning lightlights up in the instrument cluster and an appropriate message is displayed in the instrument cluster. Engine drag torque control (MSR) Duringactivation extinguished the warning light is and an appropriate message is displayed in the instrument cluster. Read and observe on page 121 first. MSR counteracts the tendency of the drive wheels to lock during downshifts or sudden deceleration (e.g. on icy or an otherwise slippery road surface). If the drive wheels should lock, then the engine speed is automatically increased. This reduces the braking effect of the engine and the wheels can rotate freely again. Traction control (TCS) The TCS should normally always be enabled. The system should be deactivated only in the following situations, for example. ▶ When driving with snow chains. ▶ When driving in deep snow or on a very loose surface. ▶ When it is necessary to “rock” a car free when it has become stuck. Note On vehicles without the ESC system, the warning light does not illuminate upon deactivation of the TCS system, but a message is only displayed on the display of the instrument cluster. Electronic differential lock (EDL and XDS) Read and observe on page 121 first. EDL prevents the turning of the respective wheel of the driven axle. EDL brakes a spinning wheel if required and transfers the drive power force to the other drive wheel. Driving becomes easier on road surfaces with different traction under each wheel of the driven axle. Fig. 144 System button: Vehicle with ESC / vehicle without ESC Read and observe on page 121 first. TCS prevents the spinning of the wheels of the driven axle. TCS reduces the drive power transmitted to the wheels in the case of slipping wheels. Thus, for example, driving on road surfaces with low grip is made easier. During a TCS intervention, the indicator light flashes in the instrument cluster. The deactivation/activation of TCS can be carried out, depending on equipment, in one of the following ways. ▶ Infotainment » Owner´s Manual Infotainment. ▶ By pressing the » Fig. 144button. ▶ By pressing the » Fig. 144button. 122 Driving EDL switches off automatically to avoid excessive heat generation on the brake of the wheel being braked. Once the brakes have cooled down, there is an automatic re-activation of EDL. XDS is an extension to the electronic differential lock (EDL). XDS does not respond to the relieved inner curve wheel of the driven axle in the case of fast cornering. By applying braking force to the relieved wheel, spinning is prevented by the XDS. This has a positive effect on the driving stability and steerability of the vehicle. Driver Steering Recommendation (DSR) Read and observe on page 121 first. The DSR indicates to the driver in critical situations a steering recommendation in order to stabilise the vehicle. DSR is activated, for example, on the right and left vehicle side when braking sharply on different road surfaces. Brake Assist (HBA) Read and observe Trailer stabilization system (TSA) on page 121 first. HBA increases the braking effect and helps to shorten the braking distance. The HBA is activated by the very quick operation of the brake pedal. To achieve the shortest possible braking distance, the brake pedal must be applied firmly until the vehicle has come to a complete standstill. The HBA is automatically switched off when the brake pedal is released. Hill Start Assist (HHC) Read and observe on page 121 first. When moving off on a gradient, HHC allows you to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal without the vehicle rolling downhill. Read and observe on page 121 first. The TSA helps the combination stable in situations where the trailer sways and then the whole trailer combination. TSA brakes the individual wheels of the towing vehicle in order to damp the rocking motion of the entire vehicle combination. The following conditions are required for the correct TSA function. The trailer was shipped from the factory or purchased from the ŠKODA genuine accessories. The trailer is electrically connected to the towing vehicle by means of the trailer socket. The parking aid is activated. The speed is greater than 60 km/h. The vehicle is braked by the system for about 2 seconds after releasing the brake pedal. Further information » page 149, Towing device and trailer. The HHC is active on gradients upwards of 5 % if the driver door is closed. HHC is always active on slopes when in forward or reverse start off. OFF ROADmode Multi collision brake (MCB) Read and observe on page 121 first. MCB helps to decrease speed after a collision by means of automatic braking interventions and to stabilise the vehicle. This reduces the risk of a subsequent crash due to uncontrolled vehicle movement. The automatic brake interventions can take place only if the following conditions are met. A head-on or side collision occurred. The impact speed was greater than approx. 10 km/h. The brakes, the ESL and other required electrical systems remain functional after impact. The accelerator pedal is not actuated. Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects: 124 124 125 125 125 125 Operation Hill Descent Assistant ESC OFF ROAD TCSOFF ROAD EDS OFF ROAD ABS OFF ROAD The OFF ROAD mode includes several features that help to overcome difficult navigable routes when travelling on non-paved roads. But even with OFF ROAD mode activated, your vehicle is never a true SUV. Assist systems 123 WARNING ■ The general information relating to the use of assistance systems must be observed » page 120, in section Introduction. ■ A lack of fuel can cause irregular engine running or cause the engine to shut down. This would lead the OFF ROAD mode to lose its effectiveness risk of accident! CAUTION ■ The OFF ROAD mode is not designed for the use on common roads. ■ All four wheels must be fitted with the same tyres approved by ŠKODA AUTOto ensure theOFF ROAD mode operates correctly. So that an engagement of the OFF ROAD mode can take place, the following conditions must be met. The OFF ROAD mode is enabled. The vehicle is moving at a speed of more than 30 km/h. The warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster. The following functions are integrated in the OFF ROAD mode. ▶ Downhill Drive Support » page 124. ▶ ESC OFF ROAD » page 125 ▶ TCS OFF ROAD » page 125 ▶ EDL OFF ROAD » page 125 ▶ ABS OFF ROAD » page 125 Note If the engine stalls while driving and is started again within 30 seconds, then OFF ROAD mode will be automatically activated. Operation Hill Descent Assistant Read and observe and on page 124 first. The hill descent assistant (hereinafter referred to as assist system), with its automatic braking action on all wheels, ensures a constant speed is maintained on a steep slope when driving forwards and reversing. Fig. 145 Button for selecting the driving mode / functional surface in Infotainment display Read and observe and on page 124 first. We recommend that you activate the OFF ROAD mode for every trip on nonpaved roads. › To activate, press the » Fig. 145button. In the Infotainment display a running mode menu » Fig. 145 appears. › Press theOffroad functional surface in the Infotainment display. › to deactivation press » Fig. 145the key and in the infotainment display choose another mode than theOffroad mode. During an intervention of the assistant, the warning light flashes in the instrument cluster. The assistant is automatically engaged under the following conditions. The engine is running. For vehicles with Manual transmission the shift lever is in the neutral position and or the 1st, 2nd, 3rd gear, or reverse gear is engaged. On vehicles with an automatic transmission, the selector lever is in the R, N, D/S position or in the Tiptronic position. The downhill gradient is at least 10 % (when driving over sleepers, the limit can briefly drop to 8 %). Neither the accelerator nor the brake pedal is operated. Driving speed Initiate the downhill decent at a reasonable speed up to 30 km / h the hill descent assist maintains this speed when driving downhill constant. The assistant can maintain a constant speed of about 2 - 30 km / h. 124 Driving If a forwards or reverse gear is engaged for vehicles with Manual transmission, the speed must be high enough to avoid stalling the engine. By pressing the accelerator or brake pedal, the speed can be increased or reduced. This is true even if the shift lever is in the neutral position and the selector lever in the N position. The engagement of the assistant is resumed after the pedal is released. WARNING For the correct operation of the assistant the road surface must be sufficiently adherent. The assistant cannot properly fulfil its function on slushy soil due to physical reasons (e.g. ice or mud). - there is a risk of an accident! Note During an active intervention of the assistant, the brake lights do not light up. and on page 124 first. The ESC OFF ROAD makes driving on a dirt roads easier, as no ESC interventions occur when the vehicle is slightly over or under steered. TCSOFF ROAD Read and observe and on page 124 first. The TCS OFF ROAD makes starting and driving on an unpaved surface easier as it partially allows wheel-spin. Note When disabled, the TCS » page 122 OFF ROAD mode works without the support of the TCS OFF ROAD. EDS OFF ROAD Read and observe and on page 124 first. The ABS OFF ROAD supports the driver when braking on an unpaved surface such as gravel, snow, etc. The system generated by a controlled locking of the wheels braked wheel before a “wedge” of piled material, which shortens the braking distance. The system is only available, if the front wheels are in the straight-ahead position. The system operates at speeds of up to 50 km/h. Parking aid (ParkPilot) Introduction ESC OFF ROAD Read and observe ABS OFF ROAD Read and observe and on page 124 first. The EDS supports OFF ROAD vehicle traction when driving on a surface with different grip under the drive wheels or when driving over bumps. A spinning wheel or wheels are braked earlier and with more force than with the intervention of the standard EDS system. This chapter contains information on the following subjects: 126 127 127 128 Function Display in the Infotainment display Activation / deactivation Automatic system activation when moving forward The parking aid (hereinafter referred to as system) uses acoustic signals or the Infotainment display when manoeuvring around obstacles in the vicinity of the vehicle. WARNING ■ The general information relating to the use of assistance systems must be observed » page 120, in section Introduction. ■ Moving persons or objects may not be recognized by the system sensors. ■ Under certain circumstances, surfaces of certain objects and types of clothing cannot reflect the system signals. There is a danger that such objects or people may not be recognised by the system sensors. ■ External noise sources may affect the signals of the system sensors. There is a danger that obstacles may not be recognised by the system sensors. ■ Before reversing, you should satisfy yourself that there are no small obstacle, such as a rock, thin post etc., in front or behind your vehicle. Such obstacles may not be recognised by the system sensors. Assist systems 125 CAUTION ■ Keep the system sensors » Fig. 146 on page 126 clean, and free from snow and ice, and do not cover with any objects of any kind, otherwise the system functioning may be limited. ■ In adverse weather conditions (heavy rain, water vapour, very low or high temperatures, etc.), the functioning of the system may be impaired - “incorrect recognition of obstacles”. ■ Accessories additionally installed on the vehicle rear, such as bicycle carriers, can impair the system function. Depending on the equipment, the following system versions can exist » Fig. 147. ▶ Variant 1: warns of obstacles in the areas C , D . ▶ Variant 2: warns of obstacles in the areas A , B , C , D . ▶ Variant 3: warns of obstacles in the areas A , B , C , D , E . Approximate range of sensors (in cm) Area » Fig. 147 Version 1 (4 sensors) Version 2 (8 sensors) Variant 3 (12 sensors) A - 120 60 120 90 160 60 - 160 60 - 160 90 90 Function B C D E Audible signals The interval between the acoustic signals becomes shorter as the clearance is reduced. At a distance of approx. 30 cm a continuous tone starts to sound danger area. From this moment do not continue to move towards the obstacle! Fig. 146 Installation location of the sensors on the left side of the vehicle: front / rear Fig. 147 Sampled areas and range of the sensors The acoustic signals can be set in Infotainment » Owner´s Manual Infotainment. Towing a trailer When towing, or when another accessory is connected to the trailer socket only the areas A and B » Fig. 147 are active in the system. Note ■ If not all fields around vehicles with Version 3 are shown after the system is activated, the vehicle will need to be moved a few metres forwards or backwards. ■ The signal tones for front obstacle recognition are factory-set to be higher than for rear obstacle recognition. Read and observe and on page 125 first. The system uses ultrasound waves to calculate the distance between the bumper and an obstacle. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the ultrasonic sensors are located in the back or in the front bumper » Fig. 146. 126 Driving Display in the Infotainment display Activation / deactivation Fig. 148 Display Read and observe and on page 125 first. Function surfaces and warnings » Fig. 148 A Road display. Depending on the Infotainment type: Switching off park assistant display. Switching audible parking signals on/off. Change to rear-view camera display . There is an obstacle in the collision area (the distance to the obstacle is less than 30 cm). Do not continue in the direction of the obstacle! There is an obstacle in the road (the distance to the obstacle is greater than 30 cm). An obstacle is located outside of the road (the distance to the obstacle is greater than 30 cm). System failure (there is no indication of obstacles). Road display The road display A » Fig. 148indicates the road on which the vehicle would take the current steering wheel and shift / selector lever position. The shift lever is in the neutral position and the gear selector is in mode N. the road display is at the front. Fig. 149 System key (option 2, 3) Read and observe and on page 125 first. Activation The activation of the system is initiated when the reverse gear is engaged, or, with vehicles with thevariant 2 and 3, also by pressing the » Fig. 149button. When activating, an alarm sounds and the symbol illuminates in the button. Deactivation On vehicles with Version 1, the system can be deactivated by moving out of reverse gear. For vehicles withversion 2 and 3, the system is automatically deactivated by pressing the button or at a speed above 15 km/h (the symbol in the button goes out). Fault display If a warning signal sounds for 3 seconds after activating the system and there is no obstacle close to your car, this indicates a system fault. The fault is also indicated by the symbol flashing in the button. Seek help from a specialist garage. Note The system can only be activated with the button at a speed of below 15 km/h. Assist systems 127 WARNING Automatic system activation when moving forward ■ The general information relating to the use of assistance systems must be observed » page 120, in section Introduction. ■ The camera may not be soiled or obscured, otherwise the system function will be significantly affected - there is a risk of an accident. For information on cleaning » page 165, Exterior vehicle care. Fig. 150 Infotainment display: Display with automatic activation CAUTION ■ The camera image is distorted by contrast with eyesight. The display is therefore only of limited use for estimating distances to following vehicles. ■ Some items, such as thin columns, chain link fences or lattice, may not be Read and observe and on page 125 first. The automatic system activation occurs when moving forward at a speed below 10 km/h when the vehicle approaches an obstacle. After activation, the following is shown in the left pane of the Infotainment display » Fig. 150. represented adequately in terms of display resolution. ■ In a crash or damage the vehicle's rear camera can possibly deviate from the correct position. If this is the case, have the sensor checked by a specialist garage. Note The camera is equipped with a cleaning system » page 72. The spraying is carried out automatically when the rear window is sprayed. Acoustic signals are sounded as of a distance from the obstacle of around 50 cm. The automatic display can be activated / deactivated in Infotainment » Owner's Manual Infotainment. Operation Reversing camera Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Operation Guidelines and function interfaces 128 129 The rear view camera (hereinafter referred to as system) helps the driver when parking and manoeuvring by displaying the area behind the vehicle in the Infotainment display (hereinafter referred to as display). Fig. 151 Installation location of the camera / scanned area behind the vehicle Read and observe and on page 128 first. The camera for capturing the area behind the vehicle is in the grip of the boot lid » Fig. 151. 128 Driving Area behind the vehicle » Fig. 151 A Detection range of the camera B Area outside the detection range of the camera The system can assist the driver when parking and manoeuvring under the following basic conditions. The ignition is switched on. The reverse gear is engaged.1) The luggage compartment lid is completely closed. The vehicle is travelling at less than 15 km/h. The area behind the vehicle is clearly visible. The selected parking / manoeuvring area is clear and even. Note ■ The display can be interrupted by pressing the symbol key » Fig. 149 on page 127. ■ After disengaging the reverse gear, automatic display of the parking aid is carried out (variant 2, 3) » page 126. Guidelines and function interfaces Distance of the orientation lines behind the vehicle » Fig. 152 A The distance is about 40 cm (safety distance limit). B The distance is about 100 cm. C The distance is about 200 cm. The distance may vary slightly depending on the load of the vehicle and the road inclination. The distance between the side lines corresponds approximately to the vehicle width including mirrors. Function interfaces » Fig. 152 Depending on the Infotainment Type: Turns the display of the area behind the vehicle Display settings - brightness, contrast, colour Switching audible parking signals on/off Enabling and reduced park assistance display Change to park assistance display CAUTION The objects shown in the display can be closer or even further away than they appear. This is especially the case in the following situations. ■ Protruding objects, such as the rear of a truck and the like. ■ When driving from a horizontal surface into a slope or a depression. ■ When driving from a slope or a depression onto a horizontal surface. Park Assist Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Fig. 152 Infotainment display: Orientation lines / function interfaces Read and observe and on page 128 first. Orientation lines are shown along with the monitored area behind the vehicle in the display. 1) 130 131 131 132 132 132 Functioning Parking space search Parking Departing from a parallel parking space Automatic brake assist Malfunctions The area behind the vehicle can be displayed for a few seconds more after disengaging the reverse gear. Assist systems 129 Park Assist (hereinafter referred to as system) helps drivers park in suitable parallel and perpendicular parking places or also to manoeuvre out of parallel parking spaces. Note ■ We recommend performing the parking at a safe speed to about 5 km/h. ■ The parking procedure can be stopped at any time by pressing the The system takes over the steering movements only when parking or leaving a parking space. The driver operates the brake, accelerator or clutch pedal and the shift / selector lever. » Fig. 153 on page 131button or by a steering intervention. The state in which the steering wheel is operated by the system, is referred to as parking operation. Read and observe The Park Assist is an extension of the parking aid » page 125 and operates on the basis of data collected by the ultrasonic sensors. For this reason, the chapter on the parking aid is to be read carefully and the safety notes are to be observed. WARNING ■ The general information relating to the use of assistance systems must be observed » page 120, in section Introduction. ■ During the parking process, the system automatically performs rapid steering movements. While it is doing so, do not place your hands between the steering wheel – risk of injury! ■ During a parking manoeuvre on loose or slippery surfaces (gravel, snow, ice, etc.) you may stray from the calculated road. Therefore, do not use the system in such situations. CAUTION The correct evaluation of the parking space and the parking procedure depends on the circumference of the wheels on the vehicle. ■ The system only works correctly if the vehicle is fitted with the wheel size approved by ŠKODA AUTO. ■ Abstain from using the system when the vehicle is fitted with snow chains or a temporary spare wheel. ■ If wheels other than those approved by ŠKODA AUTO are fitted, the resulting position of the vehicle in the parking space can differ slightly. This can be avoided by readjusting the system at a specialist garage. CAUTION If other vehicles are parked behind or on the curb, the system can drive your vehicle over the kerb or up to the kerb - there is a risk of damage to the wheels. intervene in time where appropriate. Functioning and on page 130 first. The system support is provided in the following manner. ▶ While the parking space search is going on, a measurement and evaluation of the parking space size is completed. ▶ Suitable parking spaces are shown in the display of the instrument cluster (hereinafter only in the display). ▶ The display shows instructions and information before the start and during the parking. ▶ Based on the calculated road surface, the front wheels will be automatically rotated during the parking. Conditions for the system function The system can look for a parking space only if the following basic conditions are met. The system is activated. The vehicle is travelling at less than 40 km/h. The vehicle is travelling at less than 20 km/h. The distance to a number of parked vehicles is approximately 0.5-1.5 m. TCS is activated » page 122. The system can only carry out the parking procedure if the following basic conditions are met. The vehicle is travelling at less than 7 km/h. The parking procedure takes less than 6 minutes. There is no driver intervention in the automatic steering operation. TCS is activated » page 122. The TCS does not engage. No trailer or other accessory is connected to the trailer socket. Activation/deactivation The system can be activated/deactivated by pressing the button» Fig. 153 on page 131. When the system is activated, the symbol illuminates. 130 Driving Parking space search Parking Fig. 153 System button / display Fig. 154 Display Read and observe and on page 130 first. Read and observe and on page 130 first. The system searches for a parking space in a number of parallel and transverse parked vehicles on the passenger or driver's side. The system supports the driver when reverse parking in the parking space found in a number of traverse and parallel parked vehicles. Search for a parking space parallel to the roadway › Slowly drive past a row of parallel parked vehicles. › Press the buttononce to» Fig. 153 -. Display » Fig. 154 Parking space recognised with the information to drive on Parking space recognised with the information to reverse Note to drive into the parking space Note to reverse to the parking space The display shows the following . Search for a parking space traverse to the roadway › Slowly drive past a row of traverse parked vehicles. › Press the buttontwice » Fig. 153. The display shows the following . Change sides for the parking The system will automatically search for a parking space on the passenger side. Activate the turn signal on the driver's side if you wish to look for a parking space on this side of the road. The display changes and the system searches for a parking space on the driver's side. Note If the symbol (km / h) is shown in the display while you are looking for a parking space, the vehicle speed should be reduced below 40 km/h (parallel parking) or below 20 km/h (transverse parking). Parking manoeuvre The parking space found is shown in the display» Fig. 154 - . › Continue driving forwards until appears in the display. › Stop and ensure that the vehicle does not continue moving forward until the parking procedure starts. › Select reverse gear or move the selector lever into position R. › As soon as the following message is shown in the display: Steering int. active. Check area around veh.!, let go of the steering wheel. The steering will be taken over by the system. › Observe the direct vicinity of the vehicle and reverse carefully. If necessary, the parking procedure can be continued with further steps. › If the arrow in the information display is flashing to the front , engage 1. gear or move the selector lever into the position D/S. The display shows the icon (brake pedal). Assist systems 131 › Depress the brake pedal and wait until the steering wheel automatically ro- Automatic brake assist › Carefully drive forwards. › If the backwards arrow is flashing in the display - , select reverse gear Read and observe tates into the required position, the symbol goes out. again or move the selector lever into position R. The display shows the icon (brake pedal). › Depress the brake pedal and wait until the steering wheel automatically rotates into the required position, the symbol goes out. › Carefully move backwards. You can repeat these steps several times in succession. As soon as the parking procedure is complete, an audible signal sounds and the following message appears in the display. Departing from a parallel parking space Read and observe and on page 130 first. and on page 130 first. Automatic brake assist when speeding If a velocity of 7 km / h is exceeded during the parking manoeuvre for the first time, the speed will be automatically reduced by the system to less than 7 km / h. This prevents the parking manoeuvre from aborting. Automatic emergency braking If the system detects a risk of collision during parking, automatic emergency braking takes place to prevent a collision. The parking is terminated by the emergency braking. CAUTION The automatic emergency braking is not triggered by the system when the parking process stops due to the speed of 7 km/h being exceeded! Malfunctions The system supports the driver when leaving a parking space of a parallel parking space. Read and observe Leaving a parking space process › Press the symbol key » Fig. 153 on page 131. If, for some unknown reason, the system is not available, an appropriate message appears in the display of the instrument cluster. The following message is displayed: Park Assist: Set indicators and engage reverse gear! › Activate the turn signal for side of the vehicle where the parking space is out of which you wish to manoeuvre. › Select reverse gear or move the selector lever into position R. The further procedure is analogous to that for reverse parking. › Follow the system instructions shown in the display. and on page 130 first. System unavailable If the system is not available because the vehicle has a fault, a message appears concerning the unavailability. Seek help from a specialist garage. System fault In the case of a system fault, an error message appears. Seek help from a specialist garage. As soon as the parking procedure is complete, an audible signal sounds and the following message appears in the display. Cruise Control System If the parking space is too small, it is not possible to use the system to leave the parking space. A corresponding message is shown in the information cluster display. This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Introduction Functionality Operation description 132 Driving 133 133 The Cruise Control System (CCS) maintains a set speed without you having to actuate the accelerator pedal. The state where the CCS maintains the speed is referred to hereinafter as the control. WARNING ■ The general information relating to the use of assistance systems must be observed » page 120, in section Introduction. ■ After pressing the clutch pedal, no interrupted control occurs! For example, if a different gear is engaged and the clutch pedal is released, control is continued. Functionality Read and observe on page 133 first. CCS status displays » Fig. 155, » Fig. 156 Speed is set, control is inactive (in the colour display the digits of speed limits is shown in grey). Control active (in the colour display the digits of the speed limits are highlighted). No speed set. System fault - seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately. Basic requirements for start of control The CCS is activated. On vehicles with manual transmission, second gear or higher is engaged. On vehicles with an automatic transmission, the selector lever is in the D/S position or in the Tiptronic position. The current speed is higher than 20 km/h. This, however, is only possible to the extent permitted by the engine output and braking power of the vehicle. Fig. 155 MAXI DOT display (monochrome): Examples of status displays the CCS WARNING If the engine output or engine braking effect is insufficient to maintain the set speed, the driver must assume control of the accelerator and brake pedals! Operation description Fig. 157 Cruise control system controls Fig. 156 Segment display: Examples of status displays the CCS Read and observe on page 133 first. Overview of the CCS controls » Fig. 157 A Activate CCS (control deactivated) Assist systems 133 B C a) The automatic distance control (hereinafter referred to as ACC) maintains the set speed or the distance to the vehicle ahead without the accelerator or brake pedal being pressed. Interrupt control (sprung position) Deactivate CCS (delete set speed) Take control againa) / Increase speed Launch control / reduce speed The front of the vehicle and the distance to the vehicle ahead is monitored by a radar sensor » page 120. If no speed is set, the current speed is used. The state in which the ACC maintains the speed or the proximity is described as control from here on. Once the controls are activated, the CCS maintains the vehicle at the set speed; the indicator light lights up in the instrument cluster. WARNING Controls are automatically interrupted if any of the following occur. ▶ The brake pedal is operated. ▶ When one of the brake assist systems (e.g. ESC) intervenes. ▶ Through an airbag deployment. ■ The general information relating to the use of assistance systems must WARNING ■ Always deactivate the cruise control system after use to prevent uninten- tional switching on of the system. ■ Control may only be resumed if the set speed is not too high for the cur- rent traffic conditions. Note During control, speed can be increased by pressing the accelerator pedal. Releasing the accelerator pedal will cause the speed to drop again to the set speed. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Operation Automatic stop-start Operation overview Start control Stop/resume control Set/change the desired speed Set the clearance level Special driving conditions Overtaking and towing Malfunctions 134 Driving 135 135 136 136 136 137 137 137 138 138 be observed » page 120, in section Introduction. ■ The driver must always be ready to take over the operation of the accelerator and brake pedal. ■ The ACC does not react when approaching a stationary obstacle, such as traffic jams, vehicle breakdowns or vehicles waiting at a traffic light. ■ The ACC does not respond to crossing or oncoming objects. ■ If the ACC does not decelerate fast enough, immediately apply the vehicle's foot brake. WARNING For safety reasons, do not use the ACC under the following conditions. ■ When driving in turning lanes, motorway exits or construction sites, to avoid an unwanted acceleration to the stored speed. ■ When visibility is poor, (e.g. fog, heavy rain, thick snowfall). ■ When road conditions are poor (e.g. ice, slippery road, gravel, dirt road). ■ Driving into “sharp” corners or in steep gradients / on steep inclines. ■ When driving through places where metal objects (such as metal buildings, railroad tracks, etc.) can be found. ■ When driving through very divided and enclosed spaces (such as large-capacity garages, car ferries, tunnels and the like.). Note ■ The ACC is designed primarily for use on motorways. ■ The ACC reduces the speed by automatically releasing the accelerator or by means of a braking procedure as appropriate. If the brakes are used for an au tomatic speed reduction at any moments, then the brake light illuminates. ■ In case of failure of more than one brake light on the vehicle or on the con- nected trailer, the ACC becomes unavailable. ■ The control automatically cancels the engagement of the brake supportive assistance systems (e.g. ESC) or when the maximum permitted engine speed is exceeded. Operation ACC display » Fig. 158 1 Vehicle detected (control active) 2 Line showing the displacement of the distance when setting » page 137, Set the clearance level 3 Set distance to the vehicle ahead 4 Vehicle detected (control deactivated) ACC status displays » Fig. 159 Regulation is inactive (in the colour display the digits of speed limits is shown in grey). Regulation active - no vehicle detected (in the colour display the digits of the speed limits are highlighted). Control deactivated - no speed stored. Regulation active - vehicle detected (in the colour display the digits of the speed limits are highlighted). Fig. 158 Display in the instrument cluster: Examples of ACC displays Note to reduce speed If the delay of the ACC is insufficient in relation to the vehicle in front, the warning light lights up in the instrument cluster and the display shows a message to engage the brake pedal. Note Some ACC notifications in the display of the instrument cluster may be hidden by notifications for other functions. An ACC notification automatically appears for a brief moment when there is a change in status of the ACC. Automatic stop-start Read and observe Fig. 159 Instrument cluster display: Examples of ACC status displays Read and observe on page 134 first. The ACC allows a speed of 30 - 160 km/h to be set or a distance to the preceding vehicle to be very short of very long to be set. The ACC adjusts the set speed with respect to the detected vehicle ahead, thus maintaining the selected proximity. The ACC can detect a vehicle that is up to approx. 120 m ahead using the radar sensor. on page 134 first. Vehicles with an automatic transmission can decelerate to a standstill and start moving again using the ACC. Decelerate to a standstill If a vehicle ahead decelerates to a standstill, the ACC will also decelerate your vehicle to a standstill. Starting to drive again after a holding period As soon as the vehicle ahead starts moving again after a holding period, your vehicle will also move and the speed will continue to be regulated. Control is automatically disconnected in case of longer holding periods. Assist systems 135 Operation overview Start control Read and observe on page 134 first. Basic requirements for start of control ACC is enabled. On vehicles with manual transmission, the second gear or a higher gear is selected and the current speed is greater than 25 km/h. On vehicles with automatic transmission the selector lever is in the position D / S or in the Tiptronic position and the current speed is higher than 2 km / h. Fig. 160 Operating lever Read and observe on page 134 first. Overview of ACC functions operated with the lever » Fig. 160 1 Activate ACC (control deactivated) 2 Start control (resume) / increase speed by 1 km/h at a time (sprung position) 3 Interrupt control (sprung position) 4 Deactivate ACC 5 Increase speed by 10 km/h at a time 6 Decrease speed by 10 km/h at a time A Set proximity level B Start control / reduce speed in increments of 1 km/h If the lever is set from the position directly into the sprung position the current speed is stored and the control process is started. Start control › Press » Fig. 160 on page 136 press. › oder:Set the lever into the sprung position » Fig. 160 on page 136 set. The ACC takes the current driving speed and performs the control, the warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster. If the control is started by moving the lever to the position and should the speed be stored already, the ACC adopts this speed and executes control. Note If control is started at a speed of less than 30 km/h on vehicles with an automatic transmission, the speed of 30 km/h is stored. The speed increases automatically to 30 km/h or is regulated with respect to the speed of the vehicle ahead. Stop/resume control Read and observe on page 134 first. Stop control › Set the lever into the sprung position » Fig. 160 on page 136 set. › oder:apply the brake. Control stops, the speed remains stored. Resume control › Start control » page 136, Start control. Note Control is also stopped when the clutch pedal is held down for longer than 30 s or the TCS is deactivated. 136 Driving Set/change the desired speed Read and observe on page 134 first. The desired speed can be set or changed using the control lever » Fig. 160 on page 136. Setting/changing the speed by increments of 10 km/h at a time () - requirements ACC is enabled. › Using the switch on the lever, adjust the line 2 to the desired distance. Note ■ If the proximity is changed in infotainment, the change will only come into effect after a subsequent activation of the ACC. ■ The higher the speed, the greater the proximity to the vehicle ahead. Special driving conditions Increasing/reducing the speed by increments of 1 km/h at a time (/requirements ACC is enabled. Vehicle control takes place. Changing the speed by adopting the current speed () - requirements ACC is enabled. The vehicle is moving at a speed other than that which is stored. Note ■ If during control the speed is increased by pressing the accelerator, control is temporarily stopped. Upon releasing the accelerator, control is automatically resumed. ■ If during control the speed is reduced by applying the brake, control is stopped. Control needs to be restarted in order to resume » page 136. ■ If the vehicle is controlled by a lower speed than the stored speed, then the current speed is stored by pressing the button again and the speed is reduced in increments of 1 km/h. Fig. 161 Cornering / narrow vehicles or vehicles travelling side by side Set the clearance level Read and observe on page 134 first. The proximity to the vehicle ahead can be set with the lever» Fig. 160 on page 136 or in the Infotainment» Owner´s Manual Infotainment. Setting by means of the lever › Set the switch Set in the spring-tensioned position or » Fig. 160 on page 136. The display of the instrument cluster shows line 2 » Fig. 158 on page 135, which indicates the proximity. Fig. 162 Lane changes of other vehicles / stationary vehicles Read and observe on page 134 first. The following (and similar) situations require special attention and possibly the intervention of the driver (braking, accelerating etc.). Assist systems 137 When cornering When driving into or driving out of long corners, it could be that a vehicle is travelling in the adjacent lane and is scanned by the radar» Fig. 161 - . The host vehicle is then controlled according to this vehicle. Narrow vehicles or vehicles travelling side by side A narrow or offset vehicle driving can only be recognized by the ACC if this is located in the scanning range of the radar» Fig. 161 - . Other vehicles changing lanes Vehicles that change onto the lane with a small distance» Fig. 162 - may not be detected by ACC in good time. Stationary vehicles The ACC does not detect stationary objects! When a vehicle detected by the ACC turns or sheers off and there is a stationary vehicle in front of this vehicle, » Fig. 162 - the ACC does not respond to the stationary vehicle. Vehicles with special load or special body parts Other vehicles with a load or with body parts protruding from the sides, back or top of the vehicle contour may not be detected by the ACC. Overtaking and towing Read and observe on page 134 first. When overtaking When your vehicle is being controlled at a speed that is lower than the set speed and the turn signal is operated, ACC assesses this situation as meaning that the driver wishes to overtake. The ACC automatically accelerates the vehicle, thereby reducing the proximity to a vehicle ahead. If your vehicle changes to the overtaking lane and no vehicle is detected ahead, ACC accelerates until the set speed is reached and then keeps it constant. Acceleration can be cancelled at any time by touch on the brake pedal or pressing the button on the lever » Fig. 160 on page 136. Towing a trailer When towing, or if another accessory is connected to the trailer socket, ACC control is set with a lower rate. The manner of driving should therefore be adapted to this limitation. Malfunctions Read and observe on page 134 first. If, for some unknown reason, ACC is not available, the warning light appears in the display of the instrument cluster and an appropriate message is shown. Sensor covered / dirty If the sensor is dirty or covered, a message indicating that there is no sensor view appears. Clean the sensor cover or remove the obstacles» Fig. 143 on page 120. ACC not available If the ACC is currently unavailable, a message concerning the unavailability appears. Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and then start it again. If ACC continues to be unavailable, seek the assistance of a specialist garage. ACC fault With an ACC fault, an error message appears. Seek help from a specialist garage. Front Assist Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Operation Distance warning Warning and automatic braking Deactivation/activation Malfunctions The Front Assist (hereinafter referred to as system) warns you of the danger of a collision with a vehicle or another obstacle in front of the vehicle, and tries to avoid a collision or mitigate its consequences by automatically applying the brakes where necessary. The area in front of the vehicle is monitored by a radar sensor » page 120. WARNING ■ The general information relating to the use of assistance systems must be observed » page 120, in section Introduction. ■ The system does not respond to crossing or oncoming objects. 138 Driving 139 139 139 140 140 CAUTION In case of failure of more than one brake light on the vehicle or on the electrically connected trailer, the system becomes unavailable. The proximity at which the warning is displayed depends on the current speed. The warning may occur when driving between about 60 km/h and 210 km/h. Warning and automatic braking Operation Read and observe and on page 138 first. The system support is provided in the following manner. ▶ Alerts you about a dangerous proximity to the vehicle ahead. ▶ Warns you of an impending collision. ▶ Assists with a brake action triggered by the driver. ▶ If the driver fails to respond to a detected danger, automatic braking is performed. The system can work only if the following basic conditions are met. The system is activated. TCS is activated » page 122. The vehicle is travelling forwards at a speed of more than approx. 5 km/h. Note The system can be impaired or may not be available, for example when driving in “sharp ”curves or with an ESC engagement » page 121. Distance warning Fig. 163 Display in the instrument cluster: Distance warning Fig. 164 Display in the instrument cluster: Warning or emergency braking at low speed Read and observe and on page 138 first. Emergency braking at low speed If there is a risk of a collision in a vehicle speed range of about 5 km/h to 30 km/h, the system triggers an automatic braking. With automatic braking, the warning light » Fig. 164appears in the display. Advance warning If the system detects a risk of collision, the warning light » Fig. 164appears in the display and you will hear an acoustic signal. The pre-warning display can occur in the following situations. ▶ If there is a risk of collision with a moving obstacle at a driving speed range of approx. 30 km/h to approx. 210 km/h. ▶ If there is a risk of collision with a stationary obstacle at a driving speed range of approx. 30 km/h to approx. 85 km/h. When the advance warning is issued, the brake pedal must be pressed or the moving obstacle avoided! Read and observe and on page 138 first. If a safe distance from the vehicle ahead is fallen short of, the warning light » Fig. 163appears in the display. Immediately increase the proximity if the current traffic situation allows you to do so! Acute alert If the driver does not react to the advance warning, the system briefly applies the brake automatically via an active brake intervention to draw attention to the potential danger of a collision again. Automatic Braking If the driver does not respond to acute warning, the system begins to automatically brake the vehicle. Assist systems 139 If an automatic brake intervention is triggered by the system, the pressure in the brake system increases and the brake pedal cannot be operated with the normal pedal stroke. Read and observe The automatic braking interventions can be cancelled by pressing the accelerator pedal or by means of a steering intervention. If, for some unknown reason, the system is not available, an appropriate message appears in the display of the instrument cluster. Brake Support If the driver does not brake sufficiently in the event of an impending collision, the system automatically increases the braking force. Sensor covered / dirty If the sensor is dirty or covered, a message indicating that there is no sensor view appears. Clean the sensor cover or remove the obstacles» Fig. 143 on page 120. The brake support only occurs as long as the brake pedal is being firmly pressed down. Deactivation/activation Read and observe and on page 138 first. The function is automatically activated each time the ignition is switched on. The system should only be disabled in exceptional cases » . The system can be activated or deactivated in one of two ways. ▶ In the instrument cluster display » page 46, Menu itemAssist systems. ▶ Infotainment » Owner´s Manual Infotainment. The following functions can be activated or deactivated separately in infotainment. ▶ Distance warning ▶ Advance warning If the distance-warning function was deactivated before switching off the ignition, it remains deactivated after switching on the ignition. WARNING In the following situations, Front Assist should be switched off for safety reasons. ■ When the vehicle is being towed away. ■ When the vehicle is on a rolling test bench. ■ If an unfounded warning was issued or a system action carried out. ■ When on a truck, car ferry or similar. 140 Driving Malfunctions and on page 138 first. System unavailable If the system is currently unavailable, a message concerning the unavailability appears. Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and then start it again. If the system still is not available, seek the assistance of a specialist garage. Selection of the driving mode (Driving Mode Selection) Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Adaptive Chassis Control (DCC) ModeComfort Mode Normal Mode Sport Mode Eco Individual mode Offroadmode Mode selection and Infotainment display Settings for mode Individual 141 141 141 141 141 142 142 142 143 By selecting the driving mode, the driving behaviour can be adapted to the desired mode of operation. The following modes are available Comfort, Normal, Sport, Eco and Individual and Offroad. TheComfort is only on vehicles with adaptive chassis control (DCC) and the mode Offroad available only on vehicles Octavia Scout. WARNING The general information relating to the use of assistance systems must be observed » page 120, in section Introduction. Adaptive Chassis Control (DCC) Read and observe on page 141 first. The adaptive chassis control (following known as DCC) provides the ability to adjust the shock characteristics for the sporty, normal or comfortable driving when the corresponding control mode is selected. The DCC evaluates steering response and road conditions while driving continuously and adjusts the suspension behaviour within the selected driving mode accordingly. ModeComfort Read and observe on page 141 first. This mode is suitable for driving on roads with poorer surface or for long motorway journeys. on page 141 first. This mode is suitable for a conventional driving. Mode Sport Read and observe Front axle differential lock The driving force distribution between the front wheels is adapted to the sporty driving style. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) The acceleration is quicker than in Normal mode with distance control » page 134. Xenon headlight The headlamps adapt to the driving style more dynamically than in mode Normal » page 65. ProActive passenger protection The first level of protection is deactivated » page 143. Engine noise The engine noise is noticeable in the interior more intensely than in Normal mode. Mode Eco Read and observe Mode Normal Read and observe Drive The vehicle acceleration is more dynamic than in Normal mode. on page 141 first. This mode is suitable for a sporty driving. Selecting this mode primarily affects the function of the following systems. DCC The DCC adjusts the chassis for the sporty driving style. Steering The power steering is reduced slightly, i.e., the driver needs to exert more force for steering . on page 141 first. This mode is suitable for a relaxed style of driving and helps to save fuel. Selecting this mode primarily affects the function of the following systems. Drive Vehicle acceleration is more relaxed than in Normal mode. The recommended gear is controlled such to achieve the lowest possible fuel consumption » page 42. If the START-STOP system is deactivated manually» page 112, this will be automatically activated. The automatic gearbox is set automatically to mode E » page 116. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Acceleration occurs more relaxed than in Normal » page 134mode with distance control. Xenon headlight The system is in economic mode » page 65. The headlamps are in basic setting and do not adapt to the direction of travel. Assist systems 141 Air conditioning (Climatronic) The air conditioning is controlled so as to save energy. For this reason, for example, it may take longer to reach the desired interior temperature in mode Normal. Fig. 166 Shown in the infotainment display Note ■ If a trailer or other accessory is to be connected to the trailer socket, driving mode Eco is not available. ■ The maximum vehicle acceleration (kick down function) is possible also in driving mode Eco. Read and observe Individual mode Read and observe on page 141 first. In the mode Individual each system can be set independently » page 143, Settings for mode Individual. Offroadmode Read and observe on page 141 first. The mode Off-road is suitable for driving outside paved roads. Further information » page 123, OFF ROADmode. Note The mode Off-road is deactivated after switching off and switching on the ignition and the mode Normal is set automatically. Mode selection and Infotainment display on page 141 first. Procedure for the selection of the driving mode › Press the button or » Fig. 165. In the Infotainment display a running mode menu » Fig. 166 appears. The mode is changed by repeatedly pressing the button or by tapping the corresponding function surface in the Infotainment display. If a driving mode other than Normal is selected, then the symbol lights up on the button or . If the mode Sport or Individual was set prior to the engine being switched off (Drive - Sport), the drive changes to Normal mode after the engine is started. In order to switch back to Sport, select mode Sport or Individual or set the selector lever of the automatic transmission to mode S. Function surfaces in the display » Fig. 166 A Sets the mode Individual and information on the setting of the currently selected mode B Cancel the menu to select driving mode C Modes (the surface of the selected mode is shown in green) Note ■ The currently selected running mode is displayed in the Infotainment in the status bar of the main menu of the symbol . ■ If the driving mode menu is not operated within a few seconds, the Infotainment switches to the last selected menu or switches off. Fig. 165 Button for selecting the driving mode: Version 1 / version 2 142 Driving Settings for mode Individual Read and observe on page 141 first. In the Individual mode, the following menu items can be set. ■ DCC: - Adjustment of the shock absorber characteristics ■ Steering: - Set the power steering characteristics ■ Drive: - set the drive characteristics ■ Front differential lock: - Sets the characteristics of the front axle differential lock ■ ACC: - Set the vehicle acceleration when adaptive cruise control is activated ■ Dynamic cornering light: - Set the characteristics of the Xenon headlights ■ Air conditioning: - Set the Climatronic characteristics ■ Engine sound: - Sets the engine noise in the vehicle ■ Reset mode - Setting for all menu items in the Individual mode to Normal ■ Cancel - Keep the current settings ■ Reset - cancels all menu items in the Normal mode Proactive passenger protection (Crew Protect Assist) Proactive passenger protection (hereafter known as system) increases passenger protection in the front seats in situations that could lead to vehicle impact or overturning. In critical driving situations (e.g. during emergency braking or a sudden change in direction), the following steps can be taken separately or combined in order to reduce the risk of serious injury. ▶ The front passenger's and driver's seatbelts, if worn, are automatically tensioned closely over the body. ▶ Opened door windows in the front doors are closed automatically up to a gap of about 5 cm from the edge. ▶ The sliding/tilting roof is closed. The first protection level can be deactivated in one of the following ways. ▶ System deactivation in Infotainment » Owner´s Manual Infotainment. ▶ Deactivation of TCS » page 122. ▶ Selecting the driving mode Sport » page 142. Provided that the driving mode Sport is not selected, the system is activated over the two levels of protection after switching the ignition off and on again. The second level of protection The system intervenes only if the situation is evaluated as critical, such as when panic braking at high speeds. This level of protection cannot be deactivated. WARNING The general information relating to the use of assistance systems must be observed » page 120, in section Introduction. Note ■ The system component service life is monitored electronically. Further infor- mation » page 35, Safety systems. ■ If the front passenger front airbag is deactivated, the belt tensioning func- tion for the front passenger seat is switched off. Lane Departure Warning (Lane Assist) Introduction Fig. 167 Sensor for Lane Assist Once the critical driving situation has passed, the tension on the seatbelts will be released again. The system operates at two levels of protection. The first level of protection The system already intervenes in situations that may occur during dynamic driving. As a result, this primarily helps to keep the driver and the passenger in the correct seated position. This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Operation Activation / deactivation Malfunctions 144 145 145 Assist systems 143 The lane departure warning (hereinafter known as system) helps to keep the vehicle between the boundary lines of a lane. Operation The system recognises the boundary lines of the lane using a sensor » Fig. 167. When the vehicle approaches a detected line between lanes, the system makes a light movement of the steering wheel in the opposite direction to the boundary line. This corrective steering intervention can be manually overridden at any time. WARNING ■ The general information relating to the use of assistance systems must be observed » page 120, in section Introduction. ■ Lane Assist can help you keep the vehicle within the lane. However, it does not steer the vehicle for you. The driver retains full responsibility for steering at all times. ■ Some objects or markings on the road can be recognised as the boundary lines - an erroneous steering intervention may be the result. WARNING The system may not be able to recognise the boundary line, or recognise it incorrectly, for example, in the following situations. ■ When visibility is poor, (e.g. fog, heavy rain, thick snowfall). ■ When driving in “sharp” bends. ■ The sensor is blinded by the sun or oncoming traffic. ■ The field of view of the sensor is limited by an obstacle or a preceding vehicle. CAUTION Do not attach any stickers or similar objects in front of the sensor on the windscreen to avoid impairing the functions of the system. Note ■ The system is designed for driving on motorways and roads with adequate longitudinal markings. ■ The system can detect both continuous and broken lines. Fig. 168 Monochromatic display of the instrument cluster: Examples of system indications Fig. 169 Colour display of the instrument cluster: Examples of system indications Read and observe and on page 144 first. System displays» Fig. 168 and » Fig. 169 The system is activated, but not ready to intervene. The system is active and ready to intervene. The system intervenes when approaching the right-hand boundary lane. Adaptive tracking takes place. The system can intervene when the following basic conditions are present. The system is activated. The vehicle is travelling at more than around 65 km/h. The boundary line of at least one side of the lane is detected. 144 Driving The driver's hands are on the steering wheel. The lane is more than 2.5 m in width. If the turn signal is switched on (e.g. when turning), no steering intervention takes place when the vehicle approaches the boundary line. The system regards the situation as an intended lane change. Warning lights in the instrument cluster The system is active, but not ready to intervene. The system is active and ready to intervene or is currently intervening. Adaptive lane assist Adaptive tracking helps to keep the vehicle in the position between the boundary lines selected by the driver, by means of steering intervention. If the position within the lane is changed, the system quickly adapts and holds the newly-selected position. Steering wheel vibrations In the following situations, it may occasionally be the case that due to the steering wheel vibrations, the system indicates that a driver steering intervention is required. ▶ The system is not able to keep the vehicle by a within the lane due to a steering intervention. ▶ During an intense system-related steering intervention, the system suddenly cannot recognize the boundary lines. WARNING The system function may be restricted if, for example there is danger due to ruts on a downhill road or in a crosswind. Malfunctions Read and observe and on page 144 first. If, for some unknown reason, the system is not available, an appropriate message appears in the display of the instrument cluster. Sensor covered / dirty If the windscreen is dirty, iced or misted up in the sensor area, a message appears indicating that there is no sensor view. Clean the windscreen or remove the obstacles from the sensor area. System unavailable If the system is currently unavailable, a message concerning the unavailability appears. Try to re-activate the machine. If the system still is not available, seek the assistance of a specialist garage. System fault In the case of a system fault, an error message appears. Seek help from a specialist garage. Request to take over steering If the system detects that there are no hands are on the steering wheel, this will not work properly. You will be prompted to take over steering. Place your hands on the steering wheel. Traffic sign recognition Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Activation / deactivation Read and observe and on page 144 first. The activation/deactivation of the system can be carried out in one of two ways. ▶ In the instrument cluster display » page 46, Menu itemAssist systems. ▶ Infotainment » Owner´s Manual Infotainment. 146 147 147 Function Additional display Malfunctions and information messages The road sign recognition system (hereinafter referred to as system) shows certain road signs (e.g. Mandatory speed limits) on the instrument cluster display. Adaptive tracking can also be enabled or disabled In Infotainment. After switching off and switching on the ignition, the system setting is retained. Assist systems 145 WARNING ■ The general information relating to the use of assistance systems must be observed » page 120, in section Introduction. ■ Vertical traffic signs must always take precedence over the traffic signs shown in the display. The driver is always responsible for correctly assessing the traffic situation. ■ On the system side, only a traffic sign display is undertaken, neither a warning when limit is exceeded or driving speed adjustment is undertaken! ■ Speed specifications in the displayed road signs refer to customary speed units. For example, the notification in the display can then refer to km/h or mph, depending on the country. WARNING The traffic signs may not be displayed or displayed incorrectly in the system e.g. in the following situations. ■ When visibility is poor, (e.g. fog, heavy rain, thick snowfall). ■ The sensor is blinded by the sun or oncoming traffic. ■ The field of view of the sensor is limited by an obstacle or a preceding vehicle. ■ Travelling at high speed. ■ The traffic signs are covered (e.g. by trees, snow or dirt). ■ The traffic signs are not standard (round with a red border) or are damaged. ■ The traffic signs are attached to flashing neon signs. ■ The traffic signs were changed (the navigation data are out of date). Fig. 171 Display in the instrument cluster: Display examples Read and observe on page 146 first. Description of indications and displayed traffic signs Display » Fig. 171 Display of detected traffic signs » page 43, Driving data (Multifunction display) Additional display (monochromatic display) Additional display (colour display) The system can display the following (vertical) traffic signs where identified. ▶ Speed limit. ▶ Overtaking prohibited. Additional signs, such as 'when wet' or signs which only apply for a limited time can also be displayed. Note The system is only available in some countries. The system displays only traffic signs that are in the “viewing area” of the sensor » Fig. 170. Function Data from the sensor is supplemented by information from the Infotainment Navigation. This is the reason why traffic signs with maximum speeds can also be shown on sections of roads which do not have any traffic signs. Fig. 170 Sensor for traffic sign recognition 146 Driving Mode when towing a trailer For vehicles with a factory-fitted towing device the display for the trailer operation applicable road signs can be enabled or disabled in the Infotainment display » Owner´s Manual Infotainment. Additional display Read and observe Fatigue detection on page 146 first. If the menu item Road sign is currently not shown» Fig. 171 on page 146 - , the road sign with the speed limit will appear in the upper display area of the instrument cluster» Fig. 171 on page 146 - , . If several traffic signs are detected simultaneously, in some cases the next traffic sign will also be displayed in the colour display -» Fig. 171 on page 146 . The fatigue detection system (hereinafter referred to as system) recommends the driver takes a break from driving when driver fatigue can be detected due to the driver's steering behaviour. From the starting of the journey, the system evaluates the steering behaviour at speeds 65-200 km/h. If, while driving, there have been changes in the steering behaviours that are evaluated by the system as indicating possible fatigue, a break recommendation is issued. This additional function can be activated/deactivated in Infotainment » Owner ´s Manual Infotainment. Conditions under which a break from driving is detected by the system ▶ The vehicle is stopped and the ignition is turned off. ▶ The vehicle is stopped, the seat belt is taken off and the driver's door is opened. ▶ The vehicle is stopped for more than 15 minutes. Malfunctions and information messages If none of these conditions are met or if the driving style is not changed, the system recommends a driving break again after 15 minutes. Read and observe The system can be activated/deactivated in the Infotainment » Owner´s Manual Infotainment. All detected traffic signs can be displayed via the multifunction display in the menu item Traffic Sign Recognition» Fig. 171 on page 146 - . on page 146 first. If, for some unknown reason, the system is not available, an appropriate message appears in the display of the instrument cluster. Sensor covered / dirty If the screen in the sensor area is dirty, iced or misted, a caution to clean the screen appears. Clean the windscreen or remove the obstacles from the sensor area. System fault In the case of a system fault, an error message appears. Seek help from a specialist garage. System limitation (Navigation data not available) If the Infotainment Navigation submits no data, a message regarding the limitation of the system function appears. Check whether the map documents are up to date or whether the vehicle is currently in a location for which no navigation data are available. Traffic signs unavailable No speed restriction is detected, a message is displayed regarding the unavailability of road signs. Pause recommendation The icon appears and the following message for a few seconds in the display of the instrument cluster and a message about the fatigue detected. An audible signal is also emitted. WARNING ■ The general information relating to the use of assistance systems must be observed » page 120, in section Introduction. ■ For the driving ability is always the driver's responsibility. Never drive if you feel tired. ■ The system may not detect all cases where a break is needed. ■ Therefore, take regular, sufficient breaks during long trips. ■ There will be no system warning during the so-called micro-sleep. Note ■ In some situations, the system may evaluate the driving incorrectly and thus mistakenly recommend a break (e.g. sporty driving, adverse weather conditions or poor road conditions). ■ The system is designed primarily for use on motorways. Assist systems 147 WARNING Before storing the pressure values, the tyres must be inflated to the specified inflation pressure » page 181. If incorrect pressure values are saved, the system may also not issue a warning even if the tyre inflation pressure is too low. Tyre pressure monitoring Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Storing the tyre pressure values Storing the tyre pressure values and Infotainment display Storing the tire pressure values using the key 148 148 149 The tyre pressure monitoring function (hereinafter referred to as the system) monitors the tyre pressure while driving. If the tyre inflation pressure changes, the warning light lights up in the instrument cluster and an audible signal sounds» page 35, Tyre pressure. CAUTION The tyre pressure values must be saved every 10,000 km or once annually in order to ensure correct system functioning. Storing the tyre pressure values and Infotainment display Fig. 172 Button for storing the pressure values / of the display: the system includes a front right tire pressure change The system can only function properly if the tyres have the prescribed inflation pressure and these pressure values are stored in the system. WARNING ■ The general information relating to the use of assistance systems must be observed » page 120, in section Introduction. ■ Having the correct tyre inflation pressure is always the driver's responsibility. Tyre inflation pressure must be checked regularly » page 181. ■ The system cannot warn in case of very rapid tyre inflation pressure loss, e.g. in case of sudden tyre damage. Storing the tyre pressure values Read and observe on page 148 first. The tyre pressure values are always stored in the system if one of the following events occurs. ▶ Change of tyre inflation pressure. ▶ Change one or more wheels. ▶ Change in position of a wheel on the vehicle. ▶ The warning light lights up in the instrument cluster. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the tyre pressure values are stored either in Infotainment or by pressing a button. 148 Driving Read and observe on page 148 first. › Inflate all tyres to the prescribed pressure. › Turn on the ignition and switch on Infotainment. › Press the button in Infotainment and then tap on the function interfaces Tap → Vehicle status. › Use the function interfaces Select the menu item Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator. › Tap on the function interface» Fig. 172. Follow the instructions that appear on the display. A message in the display provides information about the storage of the tyre pressure values. Note When warning light lights up in the instrument cluster, the affected tyre can be displayed in Infotainment » Fig. 172. Storing the tire pressure values using the key Fig. 173 Button for storing the pressure values Towing device and trailer Hitch Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Read and observe on page 148 first. › Inflate all tyres to the prescribed pressure. › Switch on the ignition. › Press and hold » Fig. 173 Press and hold. The warning light lights up in the instrument cluster. An acoustic signal sounds and the warning light goes out - this indicates that the tyre pressure values have been saved. › Release the symbol key release. 150 150 151 151 152 152 152 153 154 Description Adjusting the ready position Check the setting of the standby position Assembling the bar ball – Step 1 Assembling the bar ball – Step 2 Check proper fitting Removing the bar ball – Step 1 Removing the bar ball – Step 2 Vertical load with mounted accessories The maximum trailer nose weight when towing a trailer is 75 kg, Vehicles with four-wheel drive 80 kg and G-TEC vehicles 56 kg. Other data (e.g. shown on the nameplate of the hitch) on provides information about the test values of the device . WARNING ■ Before each time you make a journey when using the ball rod, check that it is seated correctly and is secured in the mounting recess. ■ When the knee-joint bar is not used and properly secured in the receiving shaft, it is damaged or incomplete, this must not be used - there is a risk of an accident. ■ Do not perform any modifications or changes to the towing device. ■ Keep the mounting recess of the towing device clean at all times. Such dirt prevents the ball rod from being attached securely! Note If the towing device is removed completely, it must be replaced with the original reinforcement of the rear bumper which is part of the mount for the towing eye. Towing device and trailer 149 Description Adjusting the ready position Fig. 174 Support for the hitch equipment / ball bar / key (Version 1 and 2) Fig. 175 1. Step: Key Version 1 / key Version 2 Read and observe on page 149 first. Fig. 176 Step 2: Both key Options The knee-joint bar is detachable and is located in the storage compartment for the spare / emergency wheel. The hitch comes with two key versions. The handling of the hitch is identical for the two key versions. The difference is only in the key version. Support for the towing device and tow bar » Fig. 174 1 13-pin power socket 2 Safety eye 3 Mounting recess 4 Cap 5 Dust cap 6 Ball rod 7 Operating lever 8 Lock cap 9 Trigger pin 10 Lock 11 Locking ball 12 Key – Version 1 13 Key – Version 2 Note If you lose the key, please get in touch with a specialist garage. 150 Driving Read and observe on page 149 first. The ball rod must be set to the ready position prior to installation » page 151, Check the setting of the standby position. 1. Step - applies to the key version 1 › Remove the cap from the lock › Insert key A into the lock so that the green marking is pointing upwards. › Turn key A in the direction of arrow 1 so that the red marking is pointing upwards » Fig. 175. 1. Step - applies to the key version 2 › Remove the cap from the lock › Insert key B into the lock so that the eye of the key is pointing downwards. › Turn the key in the direction of arrow B 2 so that the conclusions release shows up » Fig. 175. 2. Step - applies to both key versions › Grip the tow bar below the protective cap. › Push release pin C in the direction of arrow 3 to the stop, and simultaneously push operating lever D in the direction of arrow 4 to the stop » Fig. 176. Assembling the bar ball – Step 1 Operating lever D remains locked in this position. Check the setting of the standby position Fig. 178 Insert ball rod / trigger bolt in the extended state Read and observe Fig. 177 Ready position: Key Version 1 / key Version 2 / position of the lever and the release bolt with two key versions Read and observe on page 149 first. Correctly adjusted standby position » Fig. 177 Applies to key version 1 - the red marking on key A is pointing upwards. Applies to key version 2 - the eye of the key B is pointing upwards. Operating lever C is locked in the lower position. The trigger pin D can be moved. In the ready position, the key cannot be removed or turned into a different position. The ball bar is thus set ready for installation. on page 149 first. Insert ball rod - applies to both key versions › Remove the cover for the mounting recess 4 in a downwards direction» Fig. 174 on page 150. › Adjust the ball rod to the ready position » page 150, Adjusting the ready position. › Grip the tow bar from underneath » Fig. 178 and insert into the mounting recess in arrow direction 1 until you hear it click into place » . The lever A automatically turns upwards in the direction of arrow 2 and the release pin B pops out (both its red and green parts are visible) » . If lever A does not turn automatically, or if the release pin B does not pop out, remove the ball rod from the mounting recess by turning lever A downwards as far as it can go. Clean the contact surfaces on the ball rod and the mounting recess. WARNING ■ Keep your hands outside the lever's range of motion when attaching the ball rod – risk of finger injuries! ■ Never attempt to pull the operating lever violently upwards to turn the key. Doing so would mean the ball rod is not attached correctly! Towing device and trailer 151 WARNING After fitting the tow bar, always secure the lock and remove the key. The tow bar must not be operated with the key inserted. Assembling the bar ball – Step 2 Check proper fitting Fig. 181 Correctly connected tow bar Fig. 179 Lock lock: Key Version 1 / key Version 2 Fig. 180 Place cap on the lock Read and observe on page 149 first. Applies to the key version 1 › Turn key A in the direction of arrow 1 so that the green marking is pointing upwards » Fig. 179. › Remove the key in the direction of the arrow 2 . Applies to key version 2 › Turn the key B in the direction of arrow 3 so that the conclusions release points down » Fig. 179. › Remove the key in the direction of the arrow 4 . Applies to both key versions › Fit and press cap C onto the lock in the direction of arrow 5 » Fig. 180. › Check that the ball rod is securely attached » page 152, Check proper fitting. 152 Driving Read and observe on page 149 first. Correctly secured ball head » Fig. 181 The ball rod does not come off the mounting recess even after strong “shaking”. Operating lever A is as far up as possible. The release pin B is completely exposed (both its red and green parts are visible). The key is removed and the cap C attached to the lock. Removing the bar ball – Step 1 Fig. 182 Remove the cap from the lock Removing the bar ball – Step 2 Fig. 184 Release ball bar Fig. 183 Unlock lock: Key version 1 / key version 2 Read and observe on page 149 first. Read and observe on page 149 first. No trailer or other accessory is connected to the tow bar. We recommend putting the protective cover onto the ball head before removing the tow bar. › Grasp the ball rod from below » Fig. 184. › Push release pin A in the direction of arrow 1 to the stop, and simultane- Applies to both key versions › Remove the cover A from the lock in the direction of the arrow 1 » Fig. 182. The ball rod is released in this position and falls freely into the hand. If it does not fall freely into the hand, use your other hand to push it upwards. Applies to key version 1 › Insert key B into the lock in the direction of arrow 2 so that the green marking is pointing upwards. › Turn key B in the direction of arrow 3 so that the red marking is pointing upwards » Fig. 183. › Place the cap 4 » Fig. 174 on page 150 onto the mounting recess. Applies to key version 2 › Insert key C into the lock in the direction of arrow 4 so that the eye of the key is pointing downwards. › Turn key C in the direction of arrow 5 so that the eye of the key is pointing upwards » Fig. 183. ously push operating lever B in the direction of arrow 2 to the stop . If lever B is held firmly and not pushed downwards to the stop, it will move back up after the ball rod is removed and will not latch into the ready position. The knee-joint bar will then need to be brought into this position before the next time it is installed» page 150, Adjusting the ready position. The knee-joint bar must be cleaned before storing in the box with the vehicle tool always. WARNING Never allow the ball rod to remain unsecured in the boot. This could cause damage to the boot upon sudden braking, and could put the safety of the occupants at risk. CAUTION ■ Store the ball rod in the box in the ready position and with the key facing up- wards - otherwise there is a risk of damage to the key! ■ Do not use excessive force when handling the operating lever (e.g. do not climb on it)! Towing device and trailer 153 Vertical load with mounted accessories Using hitch Fig. 185 Representation of the maximum length of the mounted accessories and the permissible total weight of the accessory depending on the load centre of gravity Read and observe The maximum length of the mounted accessories (from the ball of the towing device) is 70 cm » Fig. 185. The total permitted weight of the accessories including load changes with increasing distance of the load centre of gravity from the ball head of the towing device. Distance of the load centre of Permissible total weight of the accessory, ingravity from the ball head cluding load B C D a) 0 cm 30 cm 60 cm 70 cm 75 kg / 56 kga) 75 kg / 56 kga) 35 kg / 28 kga) 0 kg / 0 kga) Applies to G-TEC vehicles. CAUTION Never exceed the permissible total weight of the accessories incl. load and maximum length of the accessories - There is a risk of damage to the towing device. Note We recommend that you use accessories from ŠKODA Original Accessories. 1) Applies to vehicles with xenon headlights. 154 Driving Fig. 186 Swivel out the 13-pin power socket, safety eyelet on page 149 first. When using the accessories (e.g. bicycle carrier), the maximum length and the permissible total weight including load must be considered. A Trailer (accessory) connect and disconnect Connect and disconnect › Fit the ball rod. › Grip the 13-pin socket at point A and swing out in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 186. › Remove the protective cap 5 » Fig. 174 on page 150. › Place the trailer (the accessory) onto the tow ball. › Plug the trailer (accessory) connector into the 13-pin socket A » Fig. 186. (If the trailer / accessories have a 7-pin connector, use a corresponding reduction piece from the ŠKODA Original Accessories). › Suspend the breakaway cable of the trailer at the safety eyelet B (the breakaway cable must sag in all trailer settings in view of the vehicle). Uncoupling takes place in reverse order. Exterior mirrors You should have additional exterior mirrors fitted if you are not able to see the traffic behind the trailer using the standard rear-view mirrors. Headlights The front of the vehicle may lift up when a trailer (accessory) is being towed and the headlights may dazzle other road users. Set the range of the headlights » page 63, Operating the lights1). Power supply of the trailer / accessory power system In the electrical connection between the vehicle and trailer (accessory), the trailer (accessories) is supplied with power from the vehicle (with ignition switched on and off). With the engine switched off, the vehicle battery is discharged by the connected consumers. Loading a trailer At low charge state of the vehicle battery, the power supply to the trailer (accessories) is interrupted. Correct the tyre inflation pressure on the vehicle for “full load”» page 181. WARNING ■ An improperly connected electrical installation of the trailer (accessories) may result in an accident or serious injury from electrical shock. ■ Do not make any adjustments to the electrical installation of the vehicle and the trailer (accessories) - risk of an accident or serious injury from electrical shock. ■ After the electrical connection between the vehicle and trailer (accessory) the trailer / accessory lights should be checked for function. ■ Never use the securing eye to tow - The is a risk of an accident! Distribution of the cargo Distribute the cargo in the trailer in such a way that heavy items are located as close to the trailer axle as possible. Secure the load from slipping. The distribution of the weight is very poor if your vehicle is unladen and the trailer is laden. Nevertheless, maintain a particularly low speed if you cannot avoid driving with this combination. WARNING Sliding cargo can significantly adversely affect stability and driving safety risk of accident! CAUTION ■ An improperly connected electrical installation of the trailer (accessories) can lead to the inoperability of the vehicle electronics. ■ The total power consumption of all the connected loads to the trailer power supply must not exceed 350 watts, otherwise there is a risk of damage to the electrical system of the vehicle. Trailer The permissible trailer load must not be exceeded under any circumstances. Permissible trailer load - Octavia Engine 1.0 l./85 kW TSI 1.2 l./63 kW TSI 1.4 l/81 kW TSI G-TEC 1.4 l./110 kW TSI 1.6 l./81 kW MPI Transmission MG DSG MG MG DSG MG DSG MG AG Permissible trailer load, braked (kg) Gradients of up to 12% Gradients of up to 8%a) 1300 1300 1100 1400 1400 1500 1500 1100 1100 1500 1500 1300 1700 1700 1800 1800 1300 1300 Permissible trailer load, unbraked (kg) 610 620 610 690 700 620 630 600 620 Towing device and trailer 155 Engine 1.8 l./132 kW TSI 1.6 l. / 66 kW TDI CR 1.6 l. / 81 kW TDI CR 2.0 l. / 105 kW TDI CR 2.0 l. / 110 kW TDI CR 2.0 l. / 135 kW TDI CR a) Transmission Permissible trailer load, braked (kg) Gradients of up to 12% Gradients of up to 8%a) Permissible trailer load, unbraked (kg) MG 1600 1800 650 DSG DSG 4x4 MG MG5 MG6 MG 4x4 DSG MG DSG 1600 1600 1400 1500 1000 1700 1500 1600 1600 1800 1800 1700 1800 1300 2000 1800 1800 1800 660 710 640 650 640 700 650 660 670 MG MG 4x4 DSG DSG 4x4 1600 2000 1600 1800 1800 2000 1800 2000 660 710 670 730 Only valid for some countries. Permissible trailer load - Octavia RS Engine 2.0 l./162 kW TSI 2.0 l./169 kW TSI 2.0 l. / 135 kW TDI CR a) Only valid for some countries. 156 Driving Transmission MG DSG MG DSG MG DSG DSG 4x4 Permissible trailer load, braked (kg) Gradients of up to 12 % Gradients of up to 8%a) 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600 1800 1800 1800 1800 1800 1800 1800 2000 Permissible trailer load, unbraked (kg) 710 720 720 730 720 730 750 Permissible trailer load - Octavia Combi Engine 1.0 l./85 kW TSI 1.2 l./63 kW TSI 1.4 l/81 kW TSI G-TEC 1.4 l./110 kW TSI 1.6 l./81 kW MPI 1.8 l./132 kW TSI 1.6 l. / 66 kW TDI CR 1.6 l. / 81 kW TDI CR 2.0 l. / 105 kW TDI CR 2.0 l. / 110 kW TDI CR 2.0 l. / 135 kW TDI CR a) Transmission Permissible trailer load, braked (kg) Gradients of up to 12 % Gradients of up to 8%a) Permissible trailer load, unbraked (kg) MG DSG MG MG DSG MG DSG MG AG MG 1300 1300 1100 1400 1400 1500 1500 1100 1100 1600 1500 1500 1300 1700 1700 1800 1800 1300 1300 1800 620 630 620 700 710 630 640 610 620 660 DSG DSG 4x4 MG MG5 MG6 MG 4x4 DSG MG DSG MG MG 4x4 DSG DSG 4x4 1600 1600 1400 1500 1000 1700 1500 1600 1600 1600 2000 1600 1800 1800 1800 1700 1800 1300 2000 1800 1800 1800 1800 2000 1800 2000 670 720 650 660 640 710 660 670 680 670 720 680 730 Only valid for some countries. Permissible trailer load - Octavia Combi RS Engine 2.0 l./162 kW TSI Transmission MG DSG Permissible trailer load, braked (kg) Gradients of up to 12 % Gradients of up to 8%a) 1600 1600 1800 1800 Permissible trailer load, unbraked (kg) 720 730 Towing device and trailer 157 Engine 2.0 l./169 kW TSI 2.0 l. / 135 kW TDI CR a) Transmission Permissible trailer load, braked (kg) Gradients of up to 12 % Gradients of up to 8%a) Permissible trailer load, unbraked (kg) MG 1600 1800 730 DSG MG 1600 1600 1800 1800 740 730 DSG DSG 4x4 1600 1800 1800 2000 740 750 Only valid for some countries. Permissible trailer load - Octavia Combi Scout Engine 1.8 l./132 kW TSI 1.6 l. / 81 kW TDI CR 2.0 l. / 110 kW TDI CR 2.0 l. / 135 kW TDI CR a) Transmission DSG 4x4 MG 4x4 MG 4x4 DSG 4x4 Permissible trailer load, braked (kg) Gradients of up to 12 % Gradients of up to 8%a) 1600 1700 2000 1800 Permissible trailer load, unbraked (kg) 1800 2000 2000 2000 750 750 750 750 Only valid for some countries. WARNING The maximum vertical load and the maximum trailer load must not be exceeded - there is risk of an accident! Trailer operation Driving speed For safety reasons, do not drive with the trailer any faster than 100 km/h (when the towing vehicle is a passenger car of category M1) or 80 km/h (when the towing vehicle is a truck of category N1). Immediately reduce your speed as soon as even the slightest swaying of the trailer is detected. Never attempt to stop the trailer from “swaying” by accelerating. Brakes Apply the brakes in good time! If the trailer is fitted with a trailer brake, apply the brakes gently at first, then brake firmly. This will avoid brake jolts resulting from the trailer wheels locking. 158 Driving On downhill sections shift down a gear in good time to also use the engine as a brake. WARNING Always drive particularly carefully with the trailer. CAUTION With frequent towing, the vehicle is excessively loaded so this must also be checked between service intervals. Anti-theft alarm system The alarm is triggered if, with a vehicle with activated anti-theft alarm (hereinafter only warning system), the electrical connection to the trailer (accessory) is interrupted. Always switch off the anti-theft alarm system before a trailer (accessory) is coupled or uncoupled » page 54. Conditions for including a trailer (accessory) in the anti-theft alarm system. The vehicle is factory-fitted with an anti-theft alarm system and a towing device. The trailer (accessory) is electrically connected to the towing vehicle by means of the trailer socket. The electrical system of the vehicle and trailer (accessory) is functional. The vehicle is locked and the anti-theft alarm system is activated. The trailer (accessory) is not equipped with LED taillights. Towing device and trailer 159 Vehicle operation in different weather conditions General Maintenance Read and observe Care and maintenance If you would like to operate your vehicle in countries other than those with its intended weather conditions, please contact a ŠKODA Partner. He or she will advise you if certain precautions need to be taken to ensure the full functioning of the vehicle or to prevent damage (e.g. coolant, changing the battery or similar). Service work, adjustments and technical alterations Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Vehicle operation in different weather conditions Statutory checks ŠKODA service partner ŠKODA Original parts ŠKODA Original accessories Spoiler Component protection Airbags Acceptance and recycling of used vehicles 160 160 160 161 161 161 161 161 162 The instructions and guidelines from ŠKODA AUTO a.s. must be observed when using accessories or carrying out any modifications, repairs or technical alterations to your vehicle. Adhering to these instructions and guidelines helps ensure road safety and helps keep your vehicle in a good technical condition. WARNING ■ Adjustments, repairs and technical changes to the vehicle should only be carried out by a specialist. Work carried out incorrectly (including work on the electronic components and their software) can result in malfunctions there is a risk of accident and, potentially, increased wear on parts! ■ We recommend that you use only ŠKODA Original Accessories and ŠKODA Original Parts which have been expressly approved for use on your vehicle. Reliability, safety and suitability for your vehicle are guaranteed with these. ■ Do not use any products which have not been approved by ŠKODA AUTO, even though these may be products with a type approval or which have been approved by a nationally recognised testing laboratory. 160 General Maintenance on page 160 first. Statutory checks Read and observe on page 160 first. Many countries have legislation requiring the operational reliability, safety and, where applicable, roadworthiness and/or exhaust gas properties of a vehicle to be tested at regular intervals. These tests can be carried out by workshops or testing stations that have been legally authorized for this purpose. The ŠKODA Service partners can prepare your vehicle for the official inspections, so as to ensure that it passes. Even if you want to take your vehicle to an officially approved test centre for prior checking in preparation for a legally required test, we recommend that you consult your ŠKODA Service Partner beforehand. ŠKODA service partner Read and observe on page 160 first. All ŠKODA service partners work according to the instructions and guidelines from ŠKODA AUTO a.s. All service and repair work is therefore carried out on time and at the appropriate quality. Adhering to these instructions and guidelines helps ensure road safety and helps keep your vehicle in a good technical condition. We therefore advise you to have all modifications, repairs and technical alterations to your vehicle carried out by a ŠKODA Service Partner. ŠKODA Original parts Read and observe Spoiler on page 160 first. We recommend the use of ŠKODA Genuine Parts for your vehicle, as these parts are approved by ŠKODA AUTO. These parts comply wholly with ŠKODA AUTO regulations and are identical to the parts used in series production. ŠKODA AUTO is able to warrant the safety, suitability, and long life of these products. ŠKODA Service Partners are liable for any defects of ŠKODA Genuine Parts for a period of 2 years after sale in accordance with the materials defect liability, unless agreed otherwise in the purchase agreement. ŠKODA Original accessories Read and observe on page 160 first. If you wish to fit accessories to your vehicle, you should remember the following: We recommend that you use ŠKODA Genuine Accessories in your vehicle. ŠKODA AUTO has selected these accessories to ensure that they are reliable, safe and suitable for your particular vehicle. Although we constantly monitor the market, we are not able to assess or vouch the suitability of other products for your vehicle, despite the fact that some products may have operational approval or may have been approved by a nationally recognised testing laboratory. ŠKODA Service Partners are liable for any defects of ŠKODA Genuine Accessories for a period of 2 years after installation or delivery in accordance with the materials defect liability, unless agreed otherwise in the purchase agreement or any other agreements. Read and observe on page 160 first. WARNING If your vehicle is equipped with a Genuine Accessories spoiler on the front bumper in combination with the spoiler on the boot lid, the following instructions must be observed - otherwise there is a risk of accidents and serious injuries! ■ The vehicle can only be equipped with a spoiler on the front bumper in combination with the corresponding spoiler on the boot lid. ■ A Genuine Accessories spoiler cannot be fitted to the front bumper either on its own (without a spoiler on the boot lid) or in combination with an unsuitable spoiler on the boot lid. ■ We recommend that you consult the ŠKODA Service Partner for any repairs to or replacement, addition or removal of spoilers. ■ Unprofessional work carried out on the spoilers of your vehicle may result in malfunction. Component protection Read and observe on page 160 first. Some electronic vehicle components (such as the instrument cluster) are factory-equipped with component protection. This ensures the functional limitation of these components in a non-legitimate installation in another vehicle (e.g. after a theft) or operation outside the vehicle. Airbags Read and observe on page 160 first. WARNING ■ Modifications, repairs and technical alterations that have been carried out unprofessionally can cause damage and operational faults, and can also seriously impair the effectiveness of the airbag system – risk of accident and fatal injury! ■ A change to the vehicle's wheel suspension, including the use of non-approved wheels and tire combinations, can impair the functioning of the airbag system - There is a risk of accidents and fatal injury! Care and maintenance 161 WARNING ■ No changes may be made to airbag system components, the front bump- er and the bodywork. ■ Any work on the airbag system including the installation and removal of system components due to other repair work (e.g. removal of the steering wheel) must only be carried out by a specialist garage. ■ Do not manipulate individual parts of the airbag system, as this might result in the airbag being deployed. ■ If the airbag has been deployed, the airbag system must be replaced. WARNING The airbag system operates using pressure sensors located in the front doors. For this reason, no adjustments may be carried out to the doors or door panels (e.g. installation of additional loudspeakers). Resulting damage can impair the functioning of the airbag system -There is a risk of accidents and fatal injuries! The following guidelines must therefore be observed. ■ Any work on the front doors and their door panels must be carried out by a specialist garage. ■ Never drive the vehicle with the inner door panels removed or with openings in the panelling. Acceptance and recycling of used vehicles Read and observe The following is taken to mean aggravated operating conditions: ▶ Fuel containing sulphur. ▶ Frequent short trips. ▶ Longer periods of engine idling (e.g. taxis). ▶ Operation in areas with heavy dust pollution. ▶ Frequent trailer operation. ▶ Predominantly stop-and-go traffic as is e.g. often the case in city driving. ▶ Operation predominantly during winter. You will be told at the specialist garage whether the operating conditions of your vehicle may make it necessary for service work to be carried out between the normal service intervals. Note All new ŠKODA vehicles are 95% recyclable. ■ The customer is responsible for covering the cost of all services including changing or replenishing the oil, even during the warranty period, unless stated otherwise in the ŠKODA AUTO warranty terms or other agreements. ■ You will be informed about the service checks and actions at each service by the specialist garage. Service intervals Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects: 163 163 163 164 The service interval display in the display of the instrument cluster will remind you to carry out every service stipulated by the manufacturer at the right time in order to prevent you from forgetting any» page 47. 162 General Maintenance The specified service intervals are tailored to normal operating conditions. In the case of aggravated operating conditions, it will be necessary to have some service work carried out before the date of the next regular service or between the specified service intervals. This applies mainly to the cleaning or the replacement of the air filter insert in regions with heavy dust pollution as well as checking and replacing the toothed belt, but also to vehicles with diesel particle filters, which can put greater strain on the engine oil. Different service charges may apply according to the particular scope of work required, the vehicle type and specification, and your vehicle’s condition. on page 160 first. Overview of service intervals Fixed service intervals QI1 - QI4 Variable service interval QI6 Digital Service Plan The completion of services can be verified through the printed verification from the digital service schedule and the respective receipts. Inspectionb) Variant 1 Overview of service intervals Inspectionb) Variant 2 Inspectionb) Variant 3 Brake fluid change Fig. 187 Vehicle data: Service Interval a) b) In order to operate a vehicle with a variable service interval, it must only be filled and topped up with the prescribed engine oil. If this engine oil is not available, the oil change is subject to a fixed service interval. In this case, the vehicle must be changed to the fixed service interval. Note ■ The corresponding motor oil specifications » page 174. ■ For vehicles with variable service interval QI6 you can initiate a change to the Oil change service QI1 - QI4 First change after 3 years, then every 2 years. Depending on which comes first. For information about the variant that applies to your vehicle, please contact a ŠKODA partner. Variable service interval QI6 The oil change service intervals depend on the intensity at which the vehicle is driven and the local conditions in which the vehicle is used. For example, your vehicle is subjected to different demands when driven over short distances than when driven over long distances. The intervals are therefore variable. Oil change service Inspectionb) Variant 1 Inspectionb) Variant 2 Brake fluid change Fixed service intervals QI1 - QI4 Every 5 000 km or every 1 yeara). Every 7 500 km or every 1 yeara). Every 10 000 km or every 1 yeara). Every 15 000 km or every 1 yeara). Every 10 000 km or every 1 yeara). Note For diesel operation with a high sulphur content, an oil change service must be carried out every 7 500 km. Ask your specialist garage for information on the countries where diesel fuel has a high sulphur content. fixed service interval or back to the variable service interval to be carried out by a specialist garage. QI1 QI2 QI3 QI4 QI1 - QI4 Every 15 000 km or every 1 yeara). WARNING The brake fluid must always be changed after the first 3 years and then every 2 years. Longer intervals between changing the brake fluid can cause vapour bubbles to form in the brake system when braking sharply. This can impair the efficiency of the brakes –There is an risk of accident! The service interval specified by the manufacturer is indicated on the vehicle data carrier» Fig. 187 which can be found both in this Owner's Manual as well as in the vehicle. One of the following service intervals applies for your vehicle. ▶ Fixed service interval QI1. ▶ Fixed service interval QI2. ▶ Fixed service interval QI3. ▶ Fixed service interval QI4. ▶ Variable service interval QI6. After the first 30 000 km or 2 yearsa), then every 30 000 km or every 1 yeara). a) b) In accordance with the service interval display (after 30 000 km or 2 yearsa) at the latest). After the first 30 000 km or 2 yearsa), then every 30 000 km or every 1 yeara). Every 15 000 km or every 1 year. First change after 3 years, then every 2 years. Depending on which comes first. For information about the variant that applies to your vehicle, please contact a ŠKODA partner. Care and maintenance 163 WARNING The brake fluid must always be changed after the first 3 years and then every 2 years. Longer intervals between changing the brake fluid can cause vapour bubbles to form in the brake system when braking sharply. This can impair the efficiency of the brakes –There is a risk of an accident! Digital Service Plan A specialist garage will not record the work carried out in a service evidence in this Owner's Manual, but in the service information system called Digital Service Plan. The instructions for use on the packaging must be observed when using care products. We recommend that you use ŠKODA Original Accessories care products. WARNING ■ Vehicle care products may be harmful to your health if not used according to the instructions. ■ Always keep the vehicle care products safe from people who are not completely independent, e.g. children - There is a danger of poisoning! CAUTION ■ Do not use any insect sponges, rough kitchen sponges or similar cleaning We therefore recommend that you always have the record of work carried out in a service printed out for you. ■ Do not use aggressive cleaning agents or chemical solvents - danger of dam- Benefits of the Digital Service Plan aging the surface to be cleaned. ▶ High level of security preventing manipulation of the entries. ▶ Transparent documentation of service work carried out. ▶ Protection against loss or damage of the entries – you receive a complete Note We recommend that the vehicle is cleaned and maintained at a ŠKODA service partner. service record of the work carried out, if required. ▶ Option to receive the record in electronic form. ▶ The vehicle can be serviced in any specialist garage (also abroad) – the data- base is accessible worldwide. ▶ Increased transparency when purchasing a used vehicle due to entries being stored centrally. ▶ The system entries support you in making a claim on the ŠKODA extended warranty and mobility guarantees. Cleaning and care Introduction Regular and thorough care helps to retain the value of your vehicle. Car washing Read and observe and on page 164 first. The best way to protect your vehicle against harmful environmental influences is frequent washing. The longer insect residues, bird droppings, road salt and other aggressive deposits remain on the paintwork of your vehicle, the more detrimental their destructive effect can be. High temperatures, such as those caused by intensive sun's rays, accentuate this caustic effect. It is also essential to thoroughly clean the underside of the vehicle at the end of the winter. This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Car washing Exterior vehicle care Removing ice and snow from the windows Caring for the interior products – risk of damaging the paintwork surface. 164 165 166 167 Washing by hand Wash the vehicle from top to bottom, with a soft sponge or a wash mitt and plenty of water, and, if necessary, with the appropriate detergents. Wash out the sponge or washing glove thoroughly at short intervals. For wheels, door sills and lower areas of the vehicle use a different sponge. Give the vehicle a good rinse after washing it and dry it off using a chamois leather. 164 General Maintenance Automatic Car Washes The usual precautionary measures must be taken before washing the vehicle (e.g. closing the windows and the tilt/slide roof etc.). Exterior vehicle care Read and observe If your vehicle is fitted with any particular attached parts (e.g. spoiler, roof rack system, two-way radio aerial etc.) it is best to consult the operator of the car wash system beforehand. After an automatic wash with wax treatment, the wiper blades should be cleaned with cleaning agents specially designed for the purpose, and then degreased. Pressure Washers When washing the vehicle with a high-pressure cleaner, the instructions for use of the equipment must be observed. This particularly applies to instructions regarding the pressure and spraying distance from the vehicle surface. Maintain a sufficiently large distance to the parking aid sensors and soft materials such as rubber hoses or insulation material » . WARNING ■ When washing your vehicle in the winter: Water and ice in the braking system can affect the braking efficiency – risk of accident! ■ Take care when cleaning the underbody or the inside of the wheel wells there is a risk of injury from sharp metal parts! CAUTION ■ Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight, do not exert pressure on the body while washing. The temperature of the washing water should be no more than 60 °C max. - otherwise there is a risk of damaging the vehicle paint. ■ Before driving through a car wash fold in the exterior mirrors - There is a risk of damage. CAUTION Washing the vehicle with high-pressure cleaners ■ Films should not be washed with any high-pressure cleaners - risk of damage. ■ Do not aim the water jet directly at the lock cylinders or the door or opening joints when washing the vehicle in the winter – there is a risk of freezing. ■ The sensors of the parking aid can be sprayed only for a short time and there must be a minimum distance of 10 cm - there is a risk of damage. Vehicle components and on page 164 first. Circumstances Spilled fuel Remedy Clear water, cloth, (clean as soon as possible) No water dropUse hard wax preserve (at least twice a lets form on the year), apply wax to clean and dry body paint Use polish, then wax (if the polish does Paint has gone not contain any preservative ingredimatt ents) Clear water, cloth / sponge, possibly Plastic parts Soiling cleaners provided for this purpose Chrome clear water, cloth, possibly cleaners and anodised Soiling provided for this purpose, clean then parts polish with a soft dry cloth Films Soiling Soft sponge and mild soap solutiona) Windows Wash with clean water and dry with a Soiling and door mirrors wipe specifically for that purpose Head / tail lights Soiling Soft sponge and mild soap solutiona) Wash with clean water and dry with a Soiling soft cloth Reversing camera Snow/ice Hand brush / de-icer Door lock cylinDe-icing fluid specifically for that purSnow/ice ders pose Wipers / wiper Soiling Windscreen cleaner, sponge or cloth blades Clear water, then apply appropriate Wheels Soiling substance Paint a) Mild soap solution = 2 tablespoons of natural soap to 1 litre of lukewarm water. The jack is maintenance-free. If necessary, the moving parts of the jack should be lubricated with a suitable lubricant. The towing device is maintenance-free. Coat the ball head of the towing device with a suitable grease whenever necessary. Care and maintenance 165 Protection of cavities All the cavities of your vehicle which are at risk from corrosion are protected by a layer of long-lasting protective wax applied in the factory. If any small amount of wax flow out of the cavities at high temperatures, these must be removed with a plastic scraper and the stains cleaned using a petroleum cleaner. Underbody The underside of your vehicle is already permanently protected by the factory against chemical and mechanical influences. We recommend having the protective coating — preferably before the beginning of winter and at the end of winter. Product life of the films Environmental influences (e.g. sunlight, humidity, air pollution, rockfall) affect the life of the films. Films will age and become brittle – this is entirely normal; this is not a fault. Sunlight may also affect the strength of the film colour. When transporting a load on the roof rack (e.g. roof box or similar), there is an increased risk of film damage (e.g. of chipping from the secured load). CAUTION ■ Vehicle paint ■ Repair damaged areas as soon as possible. ■ Matt-painted parts should not be treated with polishes or hard waxes. ■ Do not polish in a dusty environment - risk of paint scratches. ■ Do not apply any paint care products to door seals or window guides. ■ Plastic parts ■ Do not use paint polish. ■ Chromed and anodised parts ■ Do not polish in a dusty environment - risk of surface scratches. ■ Windows and door mirrors ■ Do not clean the insides of the windows/mirrors with sharp objects - There is a risk of damage to the filaments or the antenna. ■ Do not use a cloth which has been used to polish the body - this could dirty the window and impair visibility. ■ Head / tail lights ■ Do not wipe head/tail lamps dry, do not use any sharp objects - risk of damage to the protective coating and cracks forming on the headlamp glass covers. ■ Reversing camera The following instructions must be observed, otherwise there is a risk of camera damage. ■ Do not remove snow / ice with warm / hot water. ■ To wash, never use a pressure washer or steam jet. ■ For cleaning, do not use abrasive cleaners. ■ Door lock cylinders ■ Make sure that as little water as possible gets into the locking cylinder when washing the vehicle - there is a risk of freezing the lock cylinder! ■ Wheels ■ Heavy soiling of the wheels can affect the balance of the wheels - the result can be a vibration, which can cause premature wear of the steering. Removing ice and snow from the windows Fig. 188 Installation location of the ice scraper, removing the scraper ■ Films The following instructions must be observed, otherwise there is a risk of film damage. ■ Do not use dirty cloths or sponges for cleaning. ■ Do not use a scraper or other means to remove ice and snow. ■ Do not polish the films ■ Do not use a high pressure cleaner on the films. ■ Rubber seals ■ Do not treat the door seals and window guides deal with anything - the protective varnish coating could be damaged. 166 General Maintenance Read and observe and on page 164 first. Use a plastic ice scraper for removing snow and ice from the windows and mirrors. This can be on the inside of the fuel filler flap. › Open the fuel filler flap and slide the scraper in the direction of arrow » Fig. 188. WARNING CAUTION ■ Move the scraper in one direction only, otherwise there is a risk of damage to the glass surface. ■ Do not remove snow / ice on the surface that is soiled (e.g. pea gravel, sand, road salt) - there is a risk of damaging the surface. ■ Remove snow / ice carefully, otherwise there is a risk of damaging the labels that have been fitted to the vehicle by the factory. Vehicle components and Circumstances ■ Remove fresh stains (e.g. from pens, lipstick, shoe polish and similar) as Remedy Vacuum cleaner Water, slightly damp cotton / wool cloth, if necessary, mild soap solutiona), then wipe off with a soft cloth Stubborn stains Cleaning fluid specifically for this task Treat the leather periodically with a Care (natural leather protecting fluid / use a care leather) cream with light blocker and impregnation after each cleaning Remove stubborn hair using a “cleaning Care (Alcanglove” tara® / material) Remove pills from materials with a brush Water, slightly damp cloth or sponge, if Soiling necessary cleaners specifically for this purpose Wash with clean water and dry with a Soiling wipe specifically for that purpose Soiling (fresh) Plastic parts Windows Covers on electriSoiling cally heated seats Seat belts » Soiling a) CAUTION rials by covering to prevent them from fading. on page 164 first. Dust, surface soiling Natural leather / Artificial leather / Alcantara® / material destroy the fabric. ■ Air fresheners and scents can be hazardous to heath when the temperature inside the vehicle is high. ■ Natural leather / artificial leather / Alcantara® / material ■ Avoid standing for lengthy periods in bright sunlight, and protect the mate- Caring for the interior Read and observe ■ Never clean the seat belts chemically as chemical cleaning products could Cleaners specifically for this purpose soft cloth and mild soap solutiona) Mild soap solution = 2 tablespoons of natural soap to 1 litre of lukewarm water. soon as possible. ■ Ensure that no part of the leather is soaked through during cleaning and that no water gets into the seams - There is risk of damaging the leather! ■ Do not clean the roof panelling with a brush – risk of damage to the surface of the panelling. ■ Do not use leather cleaners, floor wax, shoe cream, stain remover or similar agents on Alcantara® seat upholstery. ■ Some clothing fabrics (e.g. dark denim) do not have sufficient colour fastness - this could lead to clearly visible discolouration on the upholstery. This is not a defect in the fabric. ■ Sharp objects on garments (e.g. zips, rivets, sharp- edged belts) can damage the upholstery fabrics in the vehicle. Such damage will not be recognised as a justified complaint. ■ Plastic parts ■ Do not attach scents or air fresheners to the dash panel – risk of damage to the dash panel. ■ Windows ■ Do not attach any stickers to the filaments or glass antenna - there is risk of damage. ■ Covers on electrically heated seats ■ Do not clean either with water or with other liquids - There is a risk of damage to the heating system. ■ Do not dry by switching on the heating. ■ Seat belts ■ After cleaning the belts, allow them to dry before retracting them. Note During vehicle use, some minor changes may become visible on the leather and Alcantara®(due to e.g. folds, discolouration). Care and maintenance 167 CAUTION Inspecting and replenishing ■ Never drive until the fuel tank is completely empty! Irregular supply of fuel Fuel Introduction Fig. 189 Stickers showing the prescribed fuel can cause misfiring, which can result in damage to parts of the engine and the exhaust system. ■ Immediately remove any fuel that has spilled onto the vehicle's paintwork – risk of paint damage. ■ If you would like to operate your vehicle in a country other than the one for which it was intended, please talk to a ŠKODA Partner. They will tell you whether the fuel specified by the manufacturer is offered in that country and/or whether the manufacturer will sanction operating the vehicle with another fuel. Petrol and diesel refuelling This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Petrol and diesel refuelling Unleaded petrol Diesel fuel refuel CNG (compressed natural gas) CNG 168 169 170 171 171 The correct fuel for your vehicle is specified on the inside of the fuel filler flap» Fig. 189. The fuel tank has a capacity of about 50 litres, including a reserve of approx. 6 litres. WARNING The fuel and fuel vapours are explosive - risk to life! 168 General Maintenance Fig. 190 Open fuel filler flap/unscrew tank cap/place the tank cap on the fuel filler flap Fig. 191 Fuel filler tube on vehicles with diesel engines The diameter of the diesel pump nozzle can be identical to that of the petrol pump nozzle in some countries. When driving in these countries, the incorrect fuelling protection should be removed by a specialist company. Unleaded petrol Read and observe and on page 168 first. The correct fuel for your vehicle is specified on the inside of the fuel filler flap» Fig. 189 on page 168. Read and observe and on page 168 first. Perform the refuelling under the following conditions. The vehicle is unlocked. The ignition is switched off. The auxiliary heating and ventilation is switched off. › Press the fuel filler flap in direction of arrow 1 and fold in the direction of arrow 2 » Fig. 190. › Unscrew the tank cap in the direction of arrow 3 . › Remove the tank cap and place in the recess on top of the fuel filler flap in the direction of arrow 4 . › Insert the pump nozzle into the fuel filler neck as far as it will go, and refuel. The fuel tank is full as soon as the pump nozzle switches off for the first time. Not continue refuelling. The vehicle can only operate with unleaded petrol that meets standard EN 2281), and contains maximum 10% bioethanol (E10). Prescribed fuel 95 / min. 92 and 93 RON / ROZ We recommend using petrol 95 ROZ. Optionally, the petrol 92 or. 93 ROZ can be used (slight power loss, a slightly increased fuel consumption). In an emergency petrol 91 ROZ can be used (slight power loss, slightly increased fuel consumption) » . Specified petrol is unleaded, min. 95 RON / ROZ The petrol min. 95 Use ROZ. In an emergency, 91. 92 or93 ROZ petrol can be used (slight loss of power, slightly increased fuel consumption) » . › Remove the pump nozzle from the fuel filler tube and put it back in the Prescribed petrol 98/(95) RON / ROZ We recommend using petrol 98 ROZ. › Place the filler cap onto the fuel filler neck and turn it in the opposite direc- Optionally, petrol 95 ROZ can be used (slight power loss, a slightly increased fuel consumption). › Close the fuel filler flap until it clicks into place. In an emergency, 91. 92 or93 ROZ petrol can be used (slight loss of power, slightly increased fuel consumption) » . pump. tion to arrow 3 until it securely engages. Incorrect refuelling guard on vehicles with diesel engines The fuel filler tube on vehicles with diesel engines has been fitted with an incorrect refuelling guard » Fig. 191. If the diesel pump nozzle does not sit directly in the fuel filler tube, move it to and fro with slight pressure to insert it correctly. 1) In Germany also DIN 51626-1 or E10 for unleaded petrol with octane number 91 or 95 or DIN 51626-2 or E5 for unleaded petrol with octane number 95 and 98. Inspecting and replenishing 169 CAUTION The following instructions must be observed, otherwise there is a risk of damage to the engine and to the exhaust system. ■ When petrol with a lower than the prescribed octane is used, only continue driving at mid-range engine speeds and with minimal strain on the engine. Refuel using petrol of the prescribed octane number as soon as possible. ■ Lower than 91 octane petrol should not be used, even in an emergency! ■ If a fuel other than unleaded fuel which complies to the above mentioned standards (e.g. leaded petrol) is put in the tank by mistake, do not start the engine or switch on the ignition. CAUTION Petrol additions (additives) ■ Unleaded petrol complying with the EN 228 standard1) meets all the conditions for problem-free engine operation. We therefore do not recommend mixing fuel additives into the petrol - risk of engine damage or damage to the exhaust system. ■ The following additives may not be used - risk of engine damage or damage to the exhaust system! ■ Additives with metal components (metallic additives), in particular with manganese and iron content. ■ Fuels with metallic content (e.g. LRP - lead replacement petrol). Note ■ Unleaded petrol that has a higher octane number than that required by the engine can be used without limitations. ■ The use of petrol with an octane rating higher than 95 ROZ in does not result in either a noticeable increase in power nor lower fuel consumption in vehicles for which unleaded petrol 95/min 92 or 93 ROZ is specified. ■ On vehicles using the prescribed unleaded petrol of min. 95 ROZ, the use of petrol with a higher octane number than 95 ROZ can lead to an increase in power and reduction in fuel consumption. 1) In Germany also DIN 51626-1 or E10 for unleaded petrol with octane number 91 or 95 or DIN 51626-2 or E5 for unleaded petrol with octane number 95 and 98. In Germany DIN 51628, in Austria ÖNORM C 1590, in Russia GOST R 52368-2005 / EN 590: 2004, in India IS 1460 / Bharat IV or in an emergency IS 1460 / Bharat III. 3) In Germany according to the DIN 52638 standard, in Austria ÖNORM C 1590, in France EN 590. 2) 170 General Maintenance Diesel fuel Read and observe and on page 168 first. The correct fuel for your vehicle is specified on the inside of the fuel filler flap» Fig. 189 on page 168. The vehicle can only be operated using diesel fuel that complies with the standard EN 5902) and contains a maximum 7% biodiesel (B7)3). Operating under different weather conditions Use only diesel in accordance with the current or expected weather conditions. Ask the petrol station personnel whether the diesel fuel offered corresponds to these conditions. CAUTION The following instructions must be observed, otherwise there is a risk of damage to the engine and to the exhaust system. ■ If a different fuel other than diesel fuel, which complies to the above mentioned standards (e.g. petrol) is used, do not start the engine or switch on the ignition! ■ The biofuel RME must not be used! CAUTION Diesel fuel additives ■ The diesel fuel in accordance with the prescribed standards meets all the conditions for a smooth running engine. Therefore, we recommend that you do not add any fuel additives to the diesel - - there is a risk of engine damage or damage to the exhaust system. refuel CNG (compressed natural gas) If the vehicle is parked directly after a refuelling operation, on restart the pointer of the gas gauge may not show exactly the same level as immediately after the filling process. This is not a leak in the system, but a reduction in pressure due to the cooling of the gas in the gas tank after refuelling. The maximum lifetime of the gas tank is 20 years. The capacity of the natural gas fuel tank is approximately 15 kg. WARNING ■ Natural gas is highly explosive and highly flammable. ■ When refuelling, never get into the vehicle. If you have to get into your Fig. 192 Natural gas filler tubes Read and observe and on page 168 first. Refuel with natural gas under the following conditions. The vehicle is unlocked. The engine and the ignition are switched off. The auxiliary heating and ventilation is switched off » page 107. vehicle in exceptional cases, touch a metal surface before you touch the filling coupling again. Otherwise, electrostatic discharging may occur There is a risk of fire! Note During the filling process sounds are heard which are harmless. If you are unsure which service station staff to use, ask the petrol station staff. CNG Natural gas refuelling may vary from station to station. If refuelling with natural gas at a station is unfamiliar to you, get someone to instruct you or allow the fuelling operation to be carried out by the station staff. Refuelling operation › Open the fuel filler flap. › Remove cap A » Fig. 192in the direction of the arrow and insert connector for the refuelling system into filler neck B . The fuel tank is full when the compressor of the refuelling system automatically switches off. › Check that sealing ring C » Fig. 192has remained inserted in filler neck B . If the sealing ring has slipped on the connector, reinsert it into the filler neck. › Insert cap A into the filler neck and close the fuel filler flap until it locks into place. The natural gas refuelling systems have an overfill protection relating to the outdoor temperature. At very high outside temperatures, it may happen that the gas tank may not be fully refuelled. Fig. 193 Position of the CNG label(s). Read and observe and on page 168 first. A G-TEC-vehicle may be operated with CNG and petrol. Positioning of the CNG sticker in natural gas vehicles » Fig. 193. Inspecting and replenishing 171 Automatic switching from natural gas to petrol operation - Automatic switching from natural gas to petrol operation takes place in the following situations (examples). ▶ With an empty gas tank or not enough pressure in the tank. ▶ After refuelling with natural gas. ▶ At very low surrounding temperatures. To ensure the correct functioning of the fuel system, every 6 months the fuel tank for petrol should be run down until the warning light comes on. Gas leak If a gas leak is suspected (noticeable odour), proceed as follows. ▶ Stop the vehicle. ▶ Switch off the ignition. ▶ Extinguish cigarettes, switch off spark-producing or incendiary items and remove them from the vehicle. ▶ Open the doors and the boot lid to ventilate the vehicle sufficiently. ▶ Do not continue to drive if the odour persists. ▶ If it is not possible to leave an enclosed area with a vehicle with a gas leak (e.g. in a tunnel, underpass, garage, ferry, etc.), call the emergency services immediately. Seek help from a specialist garage to correct the gas system fault. In a traffic accident If a gas leak is suspected in a traffic accident, proceed as follows. ▶ Switch off the ignition. ▶ Extinguish cigarettes, switch off spark-producing or incendiary items and remove them from the vehicle. ▶ Have all the occupants get out. ▶ Keep all persons away from the vehicle. We recommend standing at least 10 metres from the vehicle. ▶ Inform the emergency services that it is a natural gas vehicle. Regular gas system checks Regular gas system checks must be carried out in a specialist workshop on natural gas-powered vehicles. The vehicle owner is responsible for ensuring tests are conducted properly. Every 2 years ▶ Check the filler cap. ▶ Check the condition of fuel filler tubes and the sealing ring in the fuel filler tubes, and clean the sealing ring if necessary. ▶ Check the gas system for leaks. 172 General Maintenance Every 4 years ▶ Inspect the gas tank. Every 20 years ▶ Replace the gas tank. WARNING ■ Do not underestimate the smell of gas in the car or when refuelling - risk of fire, explosion and injury. ■ The natural gas tanks in the vehicle must not be exposed to unwanted heat sources. Engine compartment Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Opening and closing the bonnet Engine compartment overview Windscreen washer fluid 173 174 174 WARNING Never cover the engine with additional insulation material (e.g. with a blanket) – risk of fire! WARNING When working in the engine compartment, the following instructions must be observed - otherwise risk of injury or fire. The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area! WARNING Instructions before beginning work in the engine compartment ■ Stop the engine and remove the ignition key, on vehicles with the KESSY system, open the driver's door. ■ Firmly apply the handbrake. ■ For vehicles with manual transmission the lever into the neutral position. For vehicles with automatic transmission, place the selector lever in the P position. WARNING (Continued) ■ Allow the engine to cool. ■ Never open the bonnet if you can see steam or coolant flowing out of the Opening and closing the bonnet engine compartment – risk of scalding! Wait until the steam or coolant has stopped escaping. WARNING Information for working in the engine compartment ■ Keep everyone away from the engine compartment. ■ Do not touch any hot engine parts – risk of burns! ■ Never touch the radiator fan. The radiator fan may still turn suddenly about 10 minutes after switching off the ignition! ■ Do not smoke in the vicinity of the engine and avoid the use of open flames or sparks. ■ Do not leave any items (e.g. cloths or tools) in the engine compartment. This presents a fire hazard and the risk of engine damage. ■ Read the information and warning instructions on the fluid containers. Fig. 194 Open the bonnet Read and observe and on page 172 first. WARNING Information for working in the engine compartment with the engine running ■ If it is necessary to work on the engine with the engine running, beware of rotating engine parts and electrical plants - There is a risk to life! ■ Never touch the electric wiring on the ignition system. ■ Avoid short circuits in the electrical system, particularly on the vehicle's battery. Open flap › Ensure that the windscreen wipers are not raised away from the windscreen - There is risk of damage to the bonnet. › Open the front door and pull the release lever below the dash panel in the direction of arrow 1 » Fig. 194. › Press the release lever in the direction of arrow 2 and the bonnet will be unlocked. › Raise the bonnet in the direction of the arrow 3 . › Remove the lid prop in the direction of arrow 4 from the holder. › Secure the open flap inserting the end of the post into the opening in the direction of arrow 5 . CAUTION Only refill using fluids with the proper specification - There is risk of damage to the vehicle! › Lift the bonnet. › Decouple the bonnet support and press into the holder designed to hold it. › Drop down the bonnet lid from a height of about 20 cm applying light pres- Note ■ Fluids with the proper specifications can be purchased from the ŠKODA Original Accessories or from the ŠKODA Genuine Parts ranges. ■ We recommend you have the operating fluids replaced by a specialist garage. If the bonnet lid is not properly closed, the display of the instrument cluster will show a representation of a vehicle with an open bonnet lid. Close the flap sure until it clicks safely into place. WARNING ■ Never drive with the bonnet lid not properly closed - risk of accident! ■ Make sure that when closing the bonnet, no body parts are crushed - there is danger of injury! Inspecting and replenishing 173 Read and observe Engine compartment overview and on page 172 first. The windscreen washer fluid reservoir A is located in the engine compartment » Fig. 196. The capacity of the reservoir is about 3 litres or about 4.7 litres on vehicles that have a headlight cleaning system1). Use a suitable windscreen washer fluid for the current or expected weather conditions. We recommend that you use windscreen washer fluid from ŠKODA Original Accessories. CAUTION ■ If the vehicle is equipped with a headlight cleaning system, then only use windscreen washer fluid types that do not attack the polycarbonate coating of the headlights - otherwise there is a risk of damage to headlights. ■ Do not remove the filter from the windscreen washer fluid reservoir when replenishing it with liquid - otherwise the liquid transportation system might be contaminated, which can cause the windscreen washer system to malfunction. Fig. 195 Arrangement (example) in the engine compartment Read and observe and on page 172 first. 176 175 175 177 177 174 Coolant expansion reservoir B Engine oil dipstick C Engine oil filler opening D Brake fluid reservoir E Vehicle battery F Windscreen washer fluid reservoir A Engine oil Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Specification Check and refill 175 175 The engine has been filled ex-factory with a high-grade oil that can be used throughout the year (except in extreme climate zones). Windscreen washer fluid Fig. 196 Windscreen washer fluid reservoir We recommend that the oil changes be carried out by a ŠKODA Service Partner. The engine oil should be changed at specified service intervals » page 162. The engine uses up some oil, depending on driving style and operating conditions (up to 0.5 l / 1 000 km). Consumption may be slightly higher than this dur ing the first 5 000 km. 1) In some countries, 4.7 ltr. applies for both variants. 174 General Maintenance WARNING The following instructions must be followed at all times when working on the engine compartment » page 172. Diesel engines Specification 1.6 l/66, 81 kW TDI 2.0 l/105, 110, 135 kW TDI VW 507 00 CAUTION Do not add any additives to the engine oil - risk of engine damage. Engine oil VW 505 01 can optionally be used in diesel engines without a DPF. Note We recommend that you use oils from ŠKODA Original Accessories. ■ If no prescribed engine oil is available, then max. 0.5 l oil of the following Specification Read and observe and CAUTION specifications can be refilled. ■ Petrol engines: ACEA A3/ACEA B4 or API SN, (API SM); ■ Diesel engines: ACEA C3 or API CJ-4. Check and refill on page 175 first. The specifications (VW standards) stated in the following can be indicated separately or together with other specifications on the bottle. Vehicles with variable service intervals Petrol engines Specification 1.0 l./85 kW TSI 1.2 l./63 kW TSI 1.4 l./110 kW TSI 1.8 l./132 kW TSI 2.0 l/162, 169 kW TSI VW 504 00 Diesel engines Specification Read and observe 1.6 l/66, 81 kW TDI 2.0 l/105, 110, 135 kW TDI VW 507 00 Check and refill oil under the following conditions. The vehicle is on a horizontal surface. The engine operating temperature is reached. The engine is turned off. Fig. 197 Dipstick variants Vehicles with fixed service intervals Petrol engines 1.0 l./85 kW TSI 1.2 l./63 kW TSI 1.4 l/81 kW TSI G-TEC 1.4 l./110 kW TSI 1.6 l./81 kW MPI 1.8 l./132 kW TSI 2.0 l/162, 169 kW TSI Specification VW 502 00 and on page 175 first. Checking the level › Wait a few minutes until the engine oil flows back into the oil trough. › Pull the dipstick out and wipe with a clean cloth. › Push the dipstick back to the stop and then pull it out again. › Read the oil level and push the dipstick back in. The oil level must lie in range A » Fig. 197. If the oil level is below range A , oil must be added. Inspecting and replenishing 175 Refilling › Unscrew the cap of the engine oil filler opening C » Fig. 195 on page 174. › Add oil of the correct specification in portions of 0.5 litres» page 175. › Check the oil level. › Screw the lid of the engine oil filler closed carefully. WARNING (Continued) ■ To protect against the coolant splashing, cover the cap with a cloth when opening. ■ Coolant and coolant fumes are harmful - avoid contact with the coolant. If CAUTION ■ The oil level must never be below range A » Fig. 197there is a risk of damage to the engine as well as to the exhaust system. ■ If a top up with oil is not possible or the oil level is above range A , stop driving! Switch off the engine and seek assistance from a specialist garage. Note An engine oil level which is too low is shown in the instrument cluster by the warning light illuminating and also indicated by the message » page 38. Nevertheless, we recommend checking the oil level on a regular basis using the dipstick. the coolant comes into contact with the eye or skin, wash the affected area with plenty of water for several minutes, and where appropriate seek medical help. CAUTION Do not cover the radiator and install any parts (e.g auxiliary lights.) in front of the air intakes - There is a risk of the engine overheating. Checking and refilling Fig. 198 Coolant expansion reservoir Coolant Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Checking and refilling 176 The coolant helps to keep the engine temperature down, and consists of water and coolant additive (with additives that protect the cooling system against corrosion and prevent furring). The proportion of coolant additive in the coolant must be 40 to 60 %. The correct mix of water and coolant additive should be checked and if necessary corrected by a specialist garage. WARNING ■ The following instructions must be followed at all times when working on the engine compartment » page 172. ■ Never open the end cover of the coolant expansion reservoir while the engine is still warm. The cooling system is pressurised - risk of scalding or injury from splashes of coolant! 176 General Maintenance Read and observe and on page 176 first. Check and refill coolant under the following conditions. The vehicle is on a horizontal surface. The engine is not warm (if the engine is warm the result of the check may be wrong). The engine is turned off. Check the coolant level - The coolant level must lie between the marks A and B » Fig. 198. If the coolant level is below the mark B , top up with coolant. Refilling The reservoir must always contain a small amount of coolant » . › Place a cloth over the cap of the coolant expansion reservoir and unscrew the cap carefully. › Always top up using coolant of the correct specification. › Turn the cap until it clicks into place. The specification for the coolant is shown in the coolant expansion reservoir » Fig. 198. If the specified coolant is not available, then refilling only with distilled or purified water, and get a specialist garage to correct the water-coolant additive mix as soon as possible. CAUTION ■ If the expansion tank is empty, do not top up with coolant. The system could aerate - There is a risk of engine damage! Stop driving! Switch off the engine and seek assistance from a specialist garage. ■ Do not fill the coolant above the mark A » Fig. 198. The coolant could, when heated, be expelled from the cooling system - There is a risk of damage to the engine parts. ■ If it is not possible to add coolant,stop driving! Switch off the engine and seek assistance from a specialist garage. ■ A coolant additive which does not correspond to the correct specification can reduce the anti-corrosion effect of the cooling system - risk of damage to the cooling system and the engine. ■ If distilled (purified) water has been used to top up, the coolant should be replaced by a specialist garage - risk of engine damage. ■ A loss of coolant indicates leaks in the cooling system - risk of engine damage. Top up with coolant and then seek assistance from a specialist garage. Note A coolant level which is too low is indicated in the instrument cluster by the warning light and shown by the relevant message » page 38. We still recommend inspecting the coolant level directly at the reservoir from time to time. Brake fluid Check the brake fluid under the following conditions. The vehicle is on a horizontal surface. The engine is turned off. Check brake fluid level - The brake fluid level must lie between the markings “MIN” and “MAX”» Fig. 199. Specification - The brake fluid must comply with the standard VW 501 14 (this standard meets the requirements of FMVSS 116 DOT4). WARNING ■ The following instructions must be followed at all times when working on the engine compartment » page 172. ■ If the fluid level drops significantly within a short time or if it drops below the “MIN” » Fig. 199mark, this may be an indication of a leak in the brake system. Do not continue driving - There is a risk of accident! Seek help from a specialist garage. Note ■ The brake fluid is changed as part of a compulsory inspection service. ■ A low brake fluid level which is too low is indicated by the warning light being shown on the display of the instrument cluster as well as the corresponding message» page 33. We still recommend inspecting the brake fluid level in the reservoir from time to time. Vehicle battery Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Fig. 199 Brake fluid reservoir Check condition 178 Charging 179 Disconnect/reconnect and change 179 The vehicle battery represents a power source for the motor to start and for the supply of electrical consumers in the car. Inspecting and replenishing 177 Automatic shutdown of consumers - vehicle battery discharge protection The on-board power supply system tries to prevent the vehicle battery from discharging in the following ways when it is subject to heavy loading. ▶ By increasing the engine idle speed. ▶ Through the power limitation of certain loads. ▶ By switching off some loads(heated seats, heated rear window) for as long as necessary. Warning symbols on the vehicle battery Symbol Meaning Always wear eye protection! Battery acid is severely caustic. Always wear gloves and eye protection! Keep fire, sparks, open flames and lit cigarettes well clear of the vehicle battery! When charging the vehicle battery, a highly explosive gas mixture is produced! Keep children away from the vehicle battery! WARNING Battery acid is highly corrosive - it can cause injury, chemical burns or poisoning! Corrosive vapours in the air irritate and damage the respiratory tract and the eyes. The following guidelines must be observed. ■ Always wear protective gloves, eye and skin protection when handling the vehicle battery. ■ If your eyes or skin come into contact with the electrolytic fluid, immediately wash the affected area for a few minutes long with a lot of water. Get medical assistance without delay. ■ Keep the vehicle battery away from people who are not completely independent (e.g. children). ■ Do not tilt the battery otherwise battery electrolyte may flow out of the battery vent openings. WARNING Working on the car battery may cause explosion, fire, injury or chemical burn! The following guidelines must be observed. ■ Do not smoke, use open flames or light or transmitting devices. ■ A discharged vehicle battery may freeze slightly. Never charge up a frozen or thawed vehicle battery. Replace a frozen vehicle battery. ■ Never use a damaged vehicle battery. ■ Do not connect the battery terminals, bridging the two poles will cause a short circuit. CAUTION Ensure that battery acid does not come into contact with the bodywork – There is a risk of damage to the vehicle. Note ■ We recommend having all work on the vehicle battery carried out by a spe- cialist garage. ■ You should replace batteries older than 5 years. Check condition Fig. 200 Vehicle battery: Open the cover / acid level indicator Read and observe and on page 178 first. The battery condition is checked regularly by a specialist garage as part of the inspection service. Check the acid level For car batteries with acid level indicator, acidity can be checked on the basis of a colour display. In vehicle batteries with the label “AGM” there is no acid level examination. 178 General Maintenance Depending on the equipment, the vehicle battery may be provided with a cover, this can be opened in the direction of arrow» Fig. 200 - . Air bubbles can influence the colour of the indicator. Therefore, carefully knock on the display before the check» Fig. 200 - . Black colour – electrolyte level is correct. Colourless or light yellow colour – electrolyte level too low, the battery must be replaced. Battery discharge If frequent short journeys are made, the vehicle battery does not recharge sufficiently. The battery capacity decreases at low temperatures. If the vehicle is not used for longer than 3 to 4 weeks, then disconnect the negative terminal of the battery or charge the battery constantly with a very low charging current. sion. An explosion can be caused through sparking while unclamping or loosening the cable plug. ■ So-called“quick-charging” of the vehicle battery is dangerous and requires a special charger and specialist knowledge. We therefore recommend that “quick-charging” is carried out by a specialist garage. Disconnect/reconnect and change Read and observe and on page 178 first. The new vehicle battery must have the same capacity, voltage, current and size as the original battery. We recommend you have the batteryreplaced by a specialist garage. › To disconnect, switch off the ignition and disconnect the negative terminal first , then disconnect the positive terminal. Charging Read and observe WARNING ■ When charging the vehicle battery, hydrogen is released - risk of explo- › When reconnecting the battery, reconnect the positive terminal first, then and on page 178 first. Only charge the battery when the ignition and all consumers are switched off. Refer to the instructions of the charger manufacturer. Charging › For vehicles withthe START-STOPsystem or auxiliary heater , connect the terminal of the charger on the battery’s -pole, the -terminal of the charger to the ground point of the engine » page 192. › For vehicleswithout the START-STOPsystem or auxiliary heating, connect the charger terminals to the corresponding battery poles ( to, to). › Plug the mains cable of the charger into the power socket and switch on the device. › After charging has been successful: Switch off the charger and remove the mains cable from the power socket. › Disconnect the terminals of the charger from the vehicle battery. A charging current of 0.1 multiple of the total vehicle battery capacity (or lower) must be used until full charging is achieved. connect the negative terminal . After disconnecting and re-connecting the vehicle battery, the following functions or devices are partially or completely inoperative. Function / device Operating measure Power windows Panorama sliding/tilting roof Sun screen Time settings » page 60 » page 61 » page 62 » page 42 CAUTION ■ Disconnect the battery only with the ignition and consumers turned off - There is a risk of damaging the electrical system of the vehicle. ■ Before disconnecting the battery, close the electric tailgate, all the windows, the sliding / tilting roof and the electric sunshade - otherwise malfunctions of equipment elements may occur. ■ Under no circumstances mix up the charging cables – There is a risk of fire. Inspecting and replenishing 179 Note After disconnecting and reconnecting the vehicle battery, we recommend having the vehicle checked by a specialist to ensure that the full functionality of the vehicle is guaranteed. Wheels Wheels and tyres Advice on tyre/wheel usage During the first 500 km, new tyres do not offer optimum grip; appropriate care should therefore be taken when driving. Tyres with the deeper profiles should always be fitted to the front wheels. Rims and wheel bolts are matched to each other in terms of design. We recommend that you use rims and wheel bolts from ŠKODA Original Accessories. Wheels and tyres should always be stored in a cool, dry and dark place. The tyres themselves should be stored vertically. Tyre life Tyres age losing their original characteristics, even if they are not used. We recommend that you do not use tyres that are more than 6 years old. The manufacturing date is indicated on the tyre sidewall (possibly on the inside). For example, DOT ... 10 16... Means that the tyre was manufactured in the 10. week of 2016. Tyre damage We recommend checking your tyres and wheel rims for damage (punctures, cuts, splits and bulges etc.) on a regular basis. Remove any foreign objects in the tyre’s profile immediately (e.g. small stones). Foreign bodies which have penetrated into the tyre (e.g. screws or nails) should not be removed and help should be sought from a specialist garage. Fitting new tyres Only fit approved radial tyres of the same type, size (rolling circumference) and the same tread pattern on one axle on all four wheels. When fitting new tyres, the tyres must be replaced axle by axle. Unidirectional tyres The direction of rotation of the tyres is marked by arrows on the wall of the tyre. 180 General Maintenance The specified running direction must be strictly adhered to, otherwise the following tyre characteristics may be degraded. ▶ Driving stability. ▶ Traction. ▶ Tyre noise and tyre wear. Tyre pressure WARNING ■ Never use tyres if you do not know anything about their condition and age - risk of accidents. ■ Never drive with damaged tyres – risk of accident. CAUTION ■ The tyres must be protected from contact with substances (e.g. oil, grease and fuel) which could damage them. If the tyres come into contact with these substances, then we recommend having them checked out in a specialist garage. ■ Do not use rims with ground or polished surfaces in winter conditions - there is a risk of rim damage (e.g through salt spreading). Note ■ We recommend that any work on the wheels or tyres be carried out by a spe- cialist garage. ■ We recommend that you use tyres, snow chains and full wheel trims from ŠKODA Original Accessories. Fig. 201 Label with a table of tyre sizes and tyre pressure value / inflate tyres The prescribed tyre inflation is on the sticker with pictograms A » Fig. 201 (for some countries, the pictograms are replaced with a text). Tyre pressure is always to match the load. B Inflation pressure for half load C Inflation pressure for environmentally friendly operation (slightly lower fuel consumption and emissions) D Inflation pressure for full load E Tyre diameter in inches This information serves merely as information for the prescribed tyre pressure. This is not a list of shared tyre sizes for your vehicle. These are in the vehicle's technical documentation, in the declaration of conformity (in socalled COC document) and listed on the vehicle data » page 208. F Tyre pressure value on the front axle G Tyre pressure value on the rear axle Checking the tyre pressures Check the tyre pressure (including that of the emergency or spare wheel) at least once a month and also before setting off on a long journey. Always check the inflation pressure when the tyres are cold. Do not reduce the higher pressure on warm tyres. In vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring, tyre pressure values must be saved each time the pressures are changed » page 148. Wheels 181 WARNING ■ Do not drive with incorrect tyre pressure, there is a risk of an accident. ■ In the event of very rapid pressure loss (e.g. in the event of tyre damage) an attempt should be made to bring the vehicle carefully to a stop without sudden steering movements and without any hard braking - risk of accident. Note The declaration of conformity (COC document) can be obtained from a ŠKODA1) partner. Tyre wear and wheel change To ensure uniform wear on all tyres, we recommend that you change the wheels every 10 000 km, in line with the schedule» Fig. 202 - . WARNING ■ Change the tyres at the latest when they are worn down to the wear indi- cators - risk of accident. ■ Faulty wheel alignment affects handling - There is a risk of an accident. ■ Unusual vibrations or the vehicle“pulling” to one side could be a sign of tyre damage. Reduce speed and stop! If there are no external signs of tyre damage, seek the help of a specialist garage. Spare wheel The size of the spare wheel is identical to that of the vehicle factory installed wheels. After changing the spare wheel, the tyre pressure must be adjusted. In vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring, save the tyre pressure values in the system » page 148. WARNING ■ If, you get a puncture and a spare tyre has to be mounted with opposite Fig. 202 Tyre wear indicator / wheel change Tyre wear increases in the following circumstances. ▶ Incorrect tyre pressures. ▶ Driving style (e.g. fast cornering, rapid acceleration / braking). ▶ Incorrect wheel balancing (you should have the wheels balanced after changing/repair tyres or if the steering “is drifting”). ▶ Wheel alignment errors. There are wear indicator markersin the tyre profiles, indicating whether the minimum permissible tread depth has been reached» Fig. 202 - . A tyre should be regarded as worn out when this indicator is flush with the tread. Markings on the walls of the tyres through the letters “TWI” and/or other symbols (e.g. ), identify the position of the wear indicators. 1) Only valid for some countries and some models. 182 General Maintenance direction of rotation, then drive carefully. The tyre no longer retains its optimal characteristics in this situation. ■ If the dimensions or design of the spare wheel differ from the tyres fitted to the vehicle (e.g. winter tyres or low-profile tyres), it must only be used briefly in the event of a puncture and if an appropriately cautious style of driving is adopted. Spare wheel Only use this emergency spare wheel to reach the nearest specialist garage, as it is not intended for permanent use. A warning label is always placed on the rim of the temporary spare wheel. Please note the following if you intend to use the temporary spare wheel. ▶ Do not cover the warning sign. ▶ Be specially attentive when driving. ▶ Inflate the temporary spare wheel to the maximum inflation pressure for the vehicle» page 181 (the prescribed tyre pressure of the spare wheel R 18 is 4.2 bar). In vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring, save the tyre pressure values in the system » page 148. Speed symbol - indicates the maximum permissible speed for a vehicle fitted with tyres in a given category Speed symbol Maximum speed (in km/h) S T U H V W Y 180 190 200 210 240 270 300 WARNING Never exceed the maximum permissible load bearing capacity and speed for the tyres fitted – risk of accident. WARNING ■ Never drive with more than one temporary spare wheel mounted! ■ Avoid full throttle acceleration, sharp braking and fast cornering when driving with the temporary spare wheel. ■ Do not use snow chains on the temporary spare wheel. ■ Observe instructions on the warning sign of the emergency wheel. Operating in winter conditions All-year (or “winter”) tyres Tyre marking All-year or “winter”tyres (indicated by an M+S or a mountain peak/snowflake symbol ) to improve the performance of the vehicle in winter conditions. Explanation of tyre markings - e.g. 195/65 R 15 91 T To get the best possible driving characteristics, all-year or “winter”tyres, with a minimum tread depth of 4 mm on all four wheels, should be fitted. 195 65 R 15 91 Tyre width in mm Height/width ratio in % Code letter for the type of tyre – Radial Diameter of wheel in inches Load index T Speed symbol If “winter” tyres are mounted, summer tyres should be fitted again in good time as they provide better handling properties, a shorter braking distance, less tyre noise and reduced tyre wear on roads which are free of snow and ice as well as at temperatures above 7 °C. 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 Speed symbol All-year or “winter”tyres (marked with M+S and a peak/snowflake symbol ) of a lower speed category than listed in the vehicle’s technical documentation can be used provided that the maximum permissible speed for these tyres is not exceeded even if the maximum possible speed of the vehicle is higher. 560 580 600 615 630 650 670 690 The speed limit for all-season or “winter”tyres can be adjusted in Infotainment » Owner´s Manual Infotainment. Load index - indicates the maximum permissible load for each individual tyre Load index Load (In kg) Wheels 183 If the vehicle tyres are of a lower speed category than maximum specified speed of the vehicle, then a warning label showing the maximum speed permitted for the tyres fitted must be affixed in a place in the driver's field of vision inside the vehicle. Where appropriate, the max. value provided for the mounted tire speed rating must be set in Infotainment1). a) Snow chains The snow chains improve handling in wintry road conditions. Remove the full wheel trims before fitting the snow chains » page 187. Snow chains must only be fitted on the front wheels and are applicable only to the following wheel / tyre combinations. Octavia a) b) Rim size Impression depth D Tyre size 6J x 15a) 6J x 15a) 6J x 16b) 6J x 16b) 6J x 17b) 6J x 17b) 43 mm 47 mm 48 mm 50 mm 45 mm 48 mm 195/65 R15 195/65 R15 205/55 R16 205/55 R16 205/50 R17 205/50 R17 Only use snow chains with links and locks which are not larger than 13 mm. Only use snow chains with links and locks which are not larger than 12 mm. Octavia Scout a) b) 1) Rim size Impression depth D Tyre size 6J x 16a) 6J x 17a) 6J x 16a) 6J x 16b) 6J x 17a) 6J x 17b) 50 mm 45 mm 48 mm 48 mm 48 mm 48 mm 205/55 R16 205/50 R17 205/55 R16 205/60 R16 205/50 R17 205/55 R17 Only use snow chains with links and locks which are not larger than 12 mm. Only use snow chains with links and locks which are not larger than 9 mm. Valid in certain countries. 184 General Maintenance Octavia RS Rim size Impression depth D Tyre size 6J x 17a) 6J x 17a) 45 mm 48 mm 205/50 R17 205/50 R17 Only use snow chains with links and locks which are not larger than 12 mm. WARNING Do not use chains on snow and ice-free routes - the handling would be impaired and there is a risk of damage to the tyres. Warning triangle – version 2 The first-aid box can be attached to the right-hand side of the boot using a strap» Fig. 203. Do-it-yourself Emergency equipment, and self-help WARNING Properly secure the first aid kit and the warning triangle, or there is a risk of injury in the event of sudden braking or a vehicle collision. Emergency equipment Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Placement of the first aid kit and warning triangle Location of reflective vest Fire extinguisher Vehicle tool kit Location of reflective vest 185 185 185 186 Fig. 204 Storage compartment for the reflective vest Placement of the first aid kit and warning triangle The reflective vest can be stored in brackets under the front seats » Fig. 204. Fire extinguisher Fig. 205 Release the fire extinguisher Fig. 203 Placement of the first aid kit and warning triangle - version 1 / version 2 The following information applies to the first-aid kit and warning triangle from the ŠKODA Original Accessories. Placing the first-aid kit The first-aid box can be attached by a strap to the right-hand side of the boot » Fig. 203. Placing of the warning triangle - variant 1 The warning triangle can be inserted into the recess under the loading edge and secured with the fastener tape» Fig. 203 . Natural gas vehicles have the warning triangle located under the floor mat in the luggage compartment. The fire extinguisher is attached by two straps in a holder underneath the driver's seat. › To remove the fire extinguisher, release the safety catches on the two belts in the direction of arrow» Fig. 205and remove the fire extinguisher. › To secure, place the fire extinguisher back in the mount and secure with the belts. The Owner´s Manual is attached to the fire extinguisher. Emergency equipment, and self-help 185 Pay attention to the expiration date of the fire extinguisher. After this date, the correct function of the device is not guaranteed. WARNING Always properly secure the fire extinguisher, there is a risk of injury in the event of sudden braking or a vehicle collision. WARNING ■ The factory-supplied lifting jack is only intended for your model of vehicle. Under no circumstances attempt to lift other vehicles or loads with it – there is a risk of injury. ■ Always stow the tool safely in the box and make sure that it is attached with the belt to the spare wheel - otherwise it could cause injury to the occupants if breaking suddenly or colliding with another vehicle. Vehicle tool kit CAUTION Screw the jack back to its starting position prior to putting it back in its box There is a risk of damage to the box. Note The declaration of conformity is included with the jack or the log folder. Changing a wheel Preliminary work Fig. 206 Vehicle tool kit The box with the tool kit is located in the storage compartment for the spare wheel and may be secured with tape, depending on specification. Depending on the equipment variant, the vehicle tool kit may not contain all of the following components. 1 Screwdriver 2 Key for removing and installing the tail light 3 Top section for the anti-theft wheel bolts 4 Towing eye 5 Clamps for removing the wheel trims 6 Jack with sign 7 Crank for the jack 8 Wheel wrench 9 Extraction pliers for the wheel bolt caps 10 Breakdown kit For safety's sake, the following instructions must be observed before changing a wheel on the road. › Park the vehicle as far as possible away from the traffic flow - choose a place with a flat and firm surface. › Switch off the engine. › For vehicles with manual transmission select 1. gear. › For vehicles with automatic transmission, place the selector lever in the P position. › Firmly apply the handbrake. › Switch on the hazard warning lights and set up the warning triangle at the prescribed distance. › Have all the occupants get out. The passengers should not stand on the road while the wheel is being changed (they should remain behind a crash barrier, for instance). › Uncouple any trailers. Changing a wheel › Take out the emergency or spare wheel » page 187. › Remove the full wheel trim» page 187or caps» page 188. › Undo the anti-theft wheel bolt» page 188 and then the other wheel bolts» page 189» 186 Do-it-yourself . › Jack up the vehicle until the wheel that needs changing is clear of the ground » page 189. › Unscrew the wheel bolts and place them on a clean surface (cloth, paper, etc.). › Remove the wheel carefully. › Attach the spare wheel and slightly screw on the wheel bolts. › Lower the vehicle. › Tighten the wheel bolts opposite each other using the wheel wrench (“pulling crossways”)» page 189. › Replace the wheel trim» page 187and caps» page 188. WARNING Tightening torque which is too high can damage the threads and this can result in permanent deformation of the contact surfaces on the rim. Where tightening torque is too low, the wheels may become loose while driving risk of accident. Therefore drive cautiously and only at a moderate speed until the tightening torque has been checked. Removing/stowing the emergency or spare wheel Fig. 207 Take out the wheel When fitting unidirectional tyres, ensure that the direction of rotation is correct » page 180. All bolts must be clean and must turn easily. If screws are corroded and difficult to move, these must be replaced. WARNING ■ Undo the wheel bolts just a little (about one turn), provided the vehicle has not yet been jacked up. Otherwise the wheel could come loose and fall off – There is a risk of an injury. ■ Under no circumstances must the bolts be greased or oiled - There is a risk of an accident. The wheel is located in a well under the floor covering in the boot and is fixed in place with special bolt B » Fig. 207. Take out the wheel Subsequent steps After changing the wheel, the following work must be carried out. › Stow the replaced wheel in the well under the floor covering of the luggage compartment and secure with a locking screw. › Stow the tool kit in the space provided and secure using the band. › Check tyre pressure on the mounted wheel and adjust if necessary and, with vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring, save the tyre pressure values in the system » page 148. › Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked as soon as possible. The prescribed tightening torque is 120 Nm. Replace the damaged wheel or consult a specialist garage about repair options. › Raise the floor covering in the boot » page 95. › Loosen the retaining belt and take out the box with the tool kit. › Remove locking A in the direction of arrow 1 » Fig. 207. › Unscrew the screw B in direction of arrow 2 and remove the wheel. Store wheel away › Place the wheel into the wheel well with the wheel rim pointing downward. › Pull the fixing band through the opposite holes in the wheel rim. › Screw in nut B in the opposite direction to arrow 2 » Fig. 207. › Insert locking A in the opposite direction to which arrow 1 is pointing. › Place the box with the tool kit back inside the wheel and secure it with the tape. › Fold back the floor in the luggage compartment. Full wheel trim Remove trim › Hang the clamps for removing the full wheel trims on the edge of the full wheel trim. Emergency equipment, and self-help 187 › Push the wheel wrench through the clamp, support on the tyre and pull off the wheel trim. Anti-theft wheel bolts Install trim › Press the wheel trim onto the wheel rim at the designated valve opening. › Then press the trim into the wheel rim until its entire circumference locks correctly in place. Fig. 209 Anti-theft wheel bolt and attachment The position of the anti-theft wheel bolt is indicated by means of a symbol on the back of the wheel trim supplied ex-factory or from the ŠKODA Original Accessories. If using the anti-theft wheel bolt it should be fitted at this point » . WARNING If wheel trims are fitted, an adequate flow of air must be assured in order to cool the brake system, or the is a risk of an accident. CAUTION ■ If the wheel trim is positioned outside the position marked for the anti-theft wheel bolt, there is a risk of damaging the wheel cover. ■ Only use manual pressure and do not hit the full wheel trim – there is a risk of damaging the trim. Note We recommend that you use hub caps from ŠKODA Original Accessories. Wheel bolts Fig. 208 Remove the cap › To remove the cap insert the extraction pliers as far as they will go on the cap and pulling them out in the direction of arrow » Fig. 208. › To install, insert the cap onto the wheel bolt as far as it will go. 188 Do-it-yourself The anti-theft wheel bolts protect the wheels from theft. This can only be B .with the attachment» Fig. 209 loosened / tightened. › Insert the attachment B » Fig. 209as far as it will go on the anti-theft wheel bolt A . › Insert the key as far as it will go onto attachment B and loosen / tighten the wheel bolt. › Remove the attachment. The attachment for the anti-theft wheel bolts must always be kept in the vehicle in case of a possible wheel change. For wheel trims supplied ex-factory or from ŠKODA Original Accessories, the anti-theft wheel bolt should be installed in the position marked on the back of the wheel trim» page 187. Note The attachment and the anti-theft wheel bolts are provided with a code number. A replacement attachment can be ordered from ŠKODA Genuine Accessories using this. Loosening/tightening wheel bolts Fig. 210 Loosening the wheel bolts Fig. 212 Positioning the jack › Insert the wheel wrench onto the wheel bolt to the stop. Use the associated attachment for the anti-theft wheel bolts » Fig. 209 on page 188. › To loosen the screws,grasp the key end and turn the screw about one turn rotation in the direction of the arrow» Fig. 210. › Totighten the screwsgrasp the key end and turn the screw about against the direction of the arrow» Fig. 210until it is tight. WARNING If it proves difficult to undo the bolts, carefully apply pressure to the end of the wrench with your foot. Keep hold of the vehicle when doing so, and make sure you keep your footing - There is a risk of injury. Before the vehicle is raised, please take note of the safety instructions » . The jack from the vehicle tool kit must be used in order to raise the vehicle. Position the car jack at the jacking point closest to the flat tyre. The runner connectors are located on the lower sill variant 1 A or. Variant 2 B » Fig. 211. › Insert the crank 7 into the mount on the jack 6 » page 186. › Position the base plate of the jack with its full area resting on level ground and ensure that the jack will fit in the jacking point when raised» Fig. 212 - . › Use the crank to raise the jack until its pawl covers the jacking point» Fig. 212- . Raising the vehicle Fig. 211 Runner connectors for the jack: Variant 1 / Variant 2 › Raise the vehicle until the wheel is a little off the floor. WARNING The following instructions must be observed, otherwise there is a risk of injury. ■ Ensure the vehicle cannot unexpectedly roll away. ■ Always ensure the base plate of the lifting jack cannot slip. ■ Place a wide and stable base material under the jack if on a loose surfaces (e.g. gravel). ■ Place an anti-slip base material (e.g. a rubber mat) under the jack if on a smooth surface (e.g. cobblestones). ■ Always raise the vehicle with the doors closed. ■ Never position any body parts (e.g. arms or legs) under the vehicle while the vehicle is raised. ■ When the vehicle is raised, never start the engine. Emergency equipment, and self-help 189 CAUTION It is important to ensure that the jack is correctly positioned against the bar of the lower beam - otherwise there is a risk of damage to the vehicle. Description of the breakdown kit Breakdown kit Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Description of the breakdown kit Preparing to use the breakdown kit Sealing and inflating tyres Information on driving with repaired tyres 190 191 191 191 The following information applies for the breakdown kit supplied ex-factory. The breakdown kit can be used to seal punctures with a diameter of up to about 4 mm. Performing a repair with the breakdown kit not at all intended to replace a permanent repair on the tyre. Its purpose is to get you to the nearest specialist garage. Replace the tyre that was repaired using the breakdown kit as soon as possible, or consult a specialist garage about repair options. Do not remove foreign bodies which have penetrated into the tyre (e.g. nails). Do not use the breakdown kit in the following cases. ▶ The rim is damaged. ▶ The outside temperature is below -20 ° C. ▶ Tyre punctures greater than 4 mm. ▶ Damage to the tyre wall. ▶ The use-by date (see inflation bottle) has passed. WARNING ■ If there is skin contact with the sealant wash the affected area immedi- ately. ■ Observe the manufacturer's usage instructions for the breakdown kit. 190 Do-it-yourself Fig. 213 Description of the breakdown kit Read and observe on page 190 first. The kit is located in a box under the floor covering in the luggage compartment. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Sticker with speed designation “max. 80 km/h”/“max. 50 mph” Valve remover Inflation hose with plug Air compressor (the layout of the controls may be different depending on the type of air compressor delivered with the vehicle) Button for tyre pressure reduction 12 volt cable connector Tyre inflation hose Tyre inflation pressure indicator ON and OFF switch Tyre inflator bottle with sealing agent Replacement valve core Note The declaration of conformity is included with the air compressor or the log folder. Preparing to use the breakdown kit Read and observe on page 190 first. For safety's sake, the following instructions must be observed before undertaking a wheel repair on a road. › Park the vehicle as far as possible away from the traffic flow - choose a place with a flat and firm surface. › Switch off the engine. › For vehicles with manual transmission select 1. gear. › For vehicles with automatic transmission, place the selector lever in the P position. › Firmly apply the handbrake. › Switch on the hazard warning lights and set up the warning triangle at the prescribed distance. › Have all the occupants get out. While the repair is being carried out, the passengers should not stand on the road (instead they should remain behind a crash barrier, for instance). › Uncouple any trailers. Sealing and inflating tyres Read and observe on page 190 first. › For vehicles with manual transmission, set the lever in the neutral position. › On vehicles with automatic transmission, place the selector lever in the P position. › Start the engine. › Plug the connector 6 into 12 volt socket » page 89. › Switch on the air compressor with the ON and OFF switch 9 . › Once tyre inflation pressure of 2.0-2.5 bar has been reached, turn off the air compressor. Maximum run time of 6 minutes » . › If you cannot reach an air pressure of 2.0 - 2.5 bar, unscrew the tyre inflation hose 7 from the tyre valve. › Drive the vehicle 10 metres forwards or backwards to allow the sealing agent to “distribute” in the tyre. › Firmly screw the tyre inflation hose 7 back onto the tyre valve and repeat the inflation process. › Stick the sticker 1 » Fig. 213 on page 190 on the dashboard in the driver's field of view. At a tyre inflation pressure of 2.0–2.5 bar, the journey can be continued at a maximum speed of 80 km/h or 50 mph. WARNING ■ If the tire does not inflate at least. 2.0 bar, the damage is too great. The sealing agent cannot be used to seal the tyre. Do not drive the vehicle. Seek help from a specialist garage. ■ The tyre inflation hose and air compressor may get hot as the tyre is being inflated – risk of burning. Sealing › Unscrew the valve cap from the damaged tyre. › Insert the valve remover 2 » Fig. 213 on page 190on the valve insert, so that the valve insert fits into the slot of the valve remover. › Unscrew the valve insert and place it on a clean base (rag, paper etc.). › Forcefully shake bottle 10 » Fig. 213 on page 190several times. › Firmly screw the inflation hose 3 onto the tyre inflater bottle 10 . The film on the bottle cap is pierced. › Remove the plug from the inflation hose 3 and insert the bottle onto the tyre valve. › Hold the bottle 10 with the bottom facing upwards and fill all of the sealing agent from the tyre inflator bottle into the tyre. › Remove the filler plug from the tyre valve. › Screw in the valve insert with the valve remover 2 . The inflation pressure of the repaired tyre must be checked after driving for 10 minutes. Inflating › Screw the tyre inflation hose 7 » Fig. 213 on page 190firmly onto the tyre valve. If the tyre inflation pressure is 1.3 bar or less › You cannot properly seal the tyre using the breakdown kit. Stop driving! Seek help from a specialist garage. CAUTION Switch off the air compressor if it has been running for as much as 6 minutes – risk of damage to the compressor! Allow the air compressor to cool a few minutes before switching it on again. Information on driving with repaired tyres Read and observe on page 190 first. Emergency equipment, and self-help 191 If the tyre inflation pressure is 1.3 bar or more › Set the tyre pressure back to the correct value » page 181. › Continue driving carefully to the nearest specialist garage at a maximum speed of 80 km/h (50 mph). Jump-starting using the battery from another vehicle WARNING A tyre filled with sealant has the same driving characteristics as a standard tyre. The following guidelines must therefore be observed. ■ Do not drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph). ■ Avoid accelerating at full throttle, sharp braking and fast cornering. Jump-starting Fig. 214 Jump-starting: - Discharged battery,- power-supplying battery / ground point of the engine for the START-STOP system Introduction Read and observe This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Jump-starting using the battery from another vehicle 192 WARNING ■ The following instructions must be followed at all times when working on the engine compartment » page 172. ■ When handling the vehicle battery, the following warnings must be observed » page 177. ■ A discharged vehicle battery may already freeze at temperatures just below 0 °C. If the battery is frozen, do not carry out a jump start with the battery of another vehicle –There is a risk of explosion and injury! ■ Never jump-start vehicle batteries with an electrolyte level that is too low – There is a risk of explosion and caustic burns! on page 192 first. If, because of a discharged battery, it is not possible to start the engine, the battery of another vehicle can be used to start the engine. To do this, jumpstart cables are required which have a sufficiently large cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. The rated voltage of the two batteries must be 12 V. The capacity (Ah) of the power-supplying battery must not be significantly lower than the capacity of the discharged battery. The jump-start cables must be attached in the following sequence. › Attach clamp 1 to the positive terminal of the discharged battery. › Attach clamp 2 to the positive terminal of the power-supplying battery. › Attach clamp 3 to the negative terminal of the power-supplying battery. › For vehicles with the START-STOPsystem, attach clamp 4 to the ground point of the engine A » Fig. 214. › For vehicles without the START-STOPsystem, attach clamp 4 to a solid metal part firmly attached to the engine block or directly to the engine block. Starting engine › Start the engine on the vehicle providing the power and allow it to idle. › Initiate the starting process in the vehicle with the discharged battery. › If the engine does not start within 10 s, then cancel the starting procedure and repeat after half a minute. › Remove the jump-start cables exactly in the reverse sequence as for attach ing. 192 Do-it-yourself WARNING ■ Never clamp the jump cable to the negative terminal of the discharged battery - There is a risk of explosion. ■ The non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps must never touch each other – risk of short circuit! ■ The jump-start cable connected to the positive terminal of the battery must not come into contact with electrically conducting parts of the vehicle – risk of short circuit! ■ Position the jump cables so that they cannot be caught in rotating parts in the engine compartment - danger of injuries and the risk of vehicle damage. Towing the vehicle Information about the towing process The maximum towing speed is 50 km/h. The vehicle must be transported on a special breakdown vehicle or trailer if it is not possible to tow in the vehicle in the way described or if the towing distance is greater than 50 km. Driver of the tow vehicle › On vehicles with manual transmission, engage gear slowly when starting. › On vehicles with automatic transmission, accelerate with particular care. › Only then approach correctly when the rope is taut. Driver of the towed vehicle › If possible, the vehicle should be towed with the engine running. The brake booster and power steering only operate if the engine is running, otherwise much greater force has to be applied to the brake pedal and more power has to be expended for steering. › If it is not possible to start the engine, switch on the ignition so that the steering wheel does not lock and so that the turn signal lights, windscreen wipers and windscreen washer system can be used. › Take the vehicle out of gear or move the selector lever into position N if the vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox. › Keep the tow rope taut at all times during the towing procedure. WARNING ■ Spiral tow ropes must not be used for towing » Fig. 215- , the towing eye may unscrew out of the vehicle - There is a risk of an accident. ■ The tow rope should not be twisted - risk of accident. Fig. 215 Braided tow ropes/spiral tow rope To tow with a tow rope, only use a braided synthetic fibre rope» Fig. 215 » . Attach the tow rope or the tow bar to thetowing eyes at the front » page 194,towing eyes at the rear» page 194or to thetowing device of the trailer device » page 149. Conditions for towing. Cars with automatic gearboxes must not be towed with the rear wheels raised - there is a risk of gearbox damage! If the gearbox has no oil, your vehicle must be towed with the front axle raised clear of the ground or on a breakdown vehicle or trailer. CAUTION ■ Do not tow-start the engine – There is a risk of damaging the engine. The battery from another vehicle can be used as a jump-start aid » page 192, Jumpstarting. ■ For off-road towing manoeuvres, there is a risk to both vehicles that the fasteners may become overloaded and damaged. Note We recommend that you use a tow rope from ŠKODA Original Accessories. Emergency equipment, and self-help 193 Front towing eye Towing eye rear Fig. 216 Remove cap / install towing eye Fig. 217 Remove cap / install towing eye - Variant 1 Cap removal/fitting › To remove, press down on the cap in the direction of arrow 1 and remove it in the direction of arrow 2 » Fig. 216. › To fit it, insert the cap in arrow range 1 and then press on the opposite edge of the cap. The cap must engage firmly. Removing/installing the towing eye › To fit, screw in the towing eye by hand in the direction of the arrow 3 » Fig. 216 until it clicks into place» . For tightening purposes, we recommend, for example, using the wheel wrench, towing eye from another vehicle or a similar object that can be pushed through the eye. › To removeit, unscrew the towing eye in the opposite direction to arrow 3 . WARNING The towing eye must always be firmly in place, otherwise the towing eye could break whilst being towed. Fig. 218 Remove cap / install towing eye - Variant 2 Cap removal/fitting › To remove, press down on the cap in the direction of arrow 1 and remove it in the direction of arrow 2 » Fig. 217. › To fit it, insert the cap in arrow range 1 and then press on the opposite edge of the cap. The cap must engage firmly. Removing/installing the towing eye › To install, screw in the towing eye by hand in the direction of the arrow 3 » Fig. 217» Fig. 218until it clicks into place» . For tightening purposes, we recommend, for example, using the wheel wrench, towing eye from another vehicle or a similar object that can be pushed through the eye. › To removeit, unscrew the towing eye in the opposite direction to arrow 3 . 194 Do-it-yourself Vehicles with a trailer device For vehicles with factory-fitted towing device, at the back there is no mount for a screw-in towing eye. Use the detachable ball rod for towing » page 149, Hitch. on page 195 first. › Pop out the key bit. › Press off the battery cover A » Fig. 219 with your thumb or by using a flat screwdriver in region B . › Open the battery in the direction of the arrow 1 . › Remove the discharged battery in the direction of arrow 2 and install a new WARNING The towing eye must always be firmly in place, otherwise the towing eye could break whilst being towed. battery. › Insert the battery cover A and press it down until it clicks audibly into place. The key has to be synchronised if the vehicle cannot be unlocked or locked with the key after replacing the battery » page 54. Remote - replacing battery Introduction Remote control of the auxiliary heating This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Remote control key Remote control of the auxiliary heating Read and observe 195 195 CAUTION ■ The replacement battery must correspond to the original specification. ■ Pay attention to the correct polarity when changing the battery. Note ■ We recommend you have the battery replaced by a specialist garage. ■ If a key has an affixed decorative cover, this will be destroyed when the bat- tery is replaced. A replacement cover can be purchased from a ŠKODA Partner. Remote control key Fig. 220 Radio remote control: Battery cover Read and observe on page 195 first. › Use a thin screwdriver to remove the cover A in the area B » Fig. 220. › Open the cover in the direction of arrow 1 and push out in the direction of arrow 2 . › Use the screwdriver to remove and replace the battery in the area C . › Insert the battery cover in the opposite direction to arrow 2 until it audibly clicks into place. Fig. 219 Remove cover/take out battery Emergency equipment, and self-help 195 CAUTION Make sure you do not damage the paint when performing an emergency locking/unlocking. Emergency unlocking / locking of doors Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Unlocking/locking the driver's door Locking the door without locking cylinders Unlock the boot lid Selector lever-emergency unlocking 196 196 196 197 Locking the door without locking cylinders Unlocking/locking the driver's door Fig. 222 Emergency locking: Left/right rear door › Open the corresponding back door remove the trim A » Fig. 222. › Insert the key into the slot and turn in the direction of the arrow (spring-loaded position). › Replace the cover A . Fig. 221 Handle on the driver's door: Open lock cover / lock cylinder with key The driver's door can be emergency unlocked / emergency locked using the key via the lock cylinder. After closing, the door is locked. Unlock the boot lid › Pull on the door handle and hold. › Insert the key into the recess on the lower side of the cover and fold up the cover in the direction of arrow » Fig. 221. › Release the door handle. › For vehicles withLHD,insert the key with the fold-out key bit with the but- tons facing upwards » Fig. 221into the lock cylinder and unlock/lock the vehicle. › For vehicles with RHD, insert the key with the fold-out key bit with the buttons facing downwards into the lock and unlock/lock the vehicle. › Pull on the door handle and hold. › Replace the cover. 196 Do-it-yourself Fig. 223 Unlocking lid: Variant 1 / Variant 2 The boot lid can be unlocked manually from inside the vehicle. › Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the recess or the opening in the WARNING Replace the windscreen wiper blades once or twice a year for safety reasons. trim» Fig. 223 as far as the stop. › Unlock the lid by moving it in the direction of the arrow. Selector lever-emergency unlocking Replacing the windscreen wiper blades Fig. 225 Setting the service position for the wiper arms Fig. 224 Remove / release the selector lever › Firmly apply the handbrake. › Open the stowage compartment in the front centre console » page 83. › Grab hold of the cover A in the area of the arrows and carefully raise it forwards in the direction of the arrow 1 and then backwards » Fig. 224. › Press on the yellow plastic part in the direction of arrow 2 , simultaneously press the lock button in the selector lever handle and put the lever in position N. If the selector lever is moved again to position P, it is once again blocked. CAUTION Make sure when lifting not to damage cover parts by the screwdriver in the shift lever environment. Fig. 226 Changing the front windscreen wiper blade Read and observe on page 197 first. Replacing windscreen wiper blades Before replacing the windscreen wiper blades, close the bonnet and put the windscreen wiper arms into the service position. Introduction Setting the service position › Switch the ignition on and off again. › Push the lever in the direction of arrow» Fig. 225within 10 seconds and hold for approximately 2 seconds. This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Replacing the windscreen wiper blades Replacing the rear window wiper blade 197 198 Removing the wiper blade › Lift the wiper arm from the window in the direction of 1 » Fig. 226. › Tilt the wiper blade to the stop in the same direction. Emergency equipment, and self-help 197 › Grip the wiper arm and press securing latch A down in the direction of arrow Fuses and light bulbs › Remove the wiper blade in the direction of the arrow 3 . Fuses 2. Attaching the windscreen wiper blade › Slide the windscreen wiper blade in the opposite direction to arrow 3 until it locks into place. Check that the windscreen wiper blade is correctly attached. › Fold the windscreen wiper arm back to the windscreen. › Turn on the ignition and press the lever in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 225. Introduction Fig. 228 Blown fuse The windscreen wiper arms move into the home position. Replacing the rear window wiper blade This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Fuses in the dashboard - LHD Fuses in the dashboard - RHD Fuse arrangement in the dash panel Fuses in the engine compartment Fuse arrangement in the engine compartment Fig. 227 Changing the rear window wiper blade Read and observe on page 197 first. Removing the wiper blade › Lift the wiper arm» page 198from the window in the direction of arrow 1 » Fig. 227. › Tilt the wiper blade to the stop in the same direction. › Grip the wiper arm and press securing latch A down in the direction of arrow 2. › Remove the wiper blade in the direction of the arrow 3 . Attaching the windscreen wiper blade › Slide the windscreen wiper blade in the opposite direction to arrow 3 until it locks into place. Check that the windscreen wiper blade is correctly attached. › Fold the windscreen wiper arm back to the windscreen. Individual electrical circuits are protected by fuses. A blown fuse is recognisable from the melted-through metal strip » Fig. 228. WARNING Always read and observe the warnings before completing any work in the engine compartment » page 172. CAUTION ■ Replace the faulty fuse with a new one of the same amperage. ■ If a newly inserted fuse again blows after a short time, then seek assistance from a specialist garage. ■ “Do not repair” the fuses and do not replace them with stronger fuses - There is a risk of fire and damage to another electrical system. Note ■ We recommend always carrying replacement fuses in the vehicle. ■ There can be several power consuming devices for one fuse. Multiple fuses may exist for a single power consuming device. 198 Do-it-yourself 199 199 200 201 201 Read and observe Fuses in the dashboard - LHD Fig. 229 Storage compartment on the driver's side Read and observe and on page 198 first. On left-hand drive vehicles, the fuse box is located behind the storage compartment in the left-hand section of the dash panel. Replacing fuses › Remove the ignition key, turn off the lights and all electrical consumers. › Open the storage compartment » page 82. › Hold the stacker laterally in the region A and open by pulling in the direction of arrow 1 (A greater force is required to open) » Fig. 229. › Remove the plastic clip under the cover of the fuse box in the engine compartment » Fig. 232 on page 201. › Use the clip to pull the fuse out, then insert a new fuse. › Replace the clamp in the original position. › Close the storage compartment by pushing in the direction of arrow 2 . Fuses in the dashboard - RHD and on page 198 first. In right-hand drive, the fuse box is located on the passenger side behind the storage compartment. Fold down the storage compartment and replace the fuse › Remove the ignition key, turn off the lights and all electrical consumers. › Insert a screwdriver under the side cover » Fig. 230. › Unlock the cover in the direction of the arrow 1 . › Push the cover out in the direction of the arrow 2 . › Open the storage compartment. › Insert a screwdriver from the side into the dash panel in the direction of arrow 3 . › Use the screwdriver to unlock the brake rod A of the storage compartment in the direction of arrow 4 . › Remove the storage compartment in the direction of the arrow 5 . › Remove the plastic clip under the cover of the fuse box in the engine compartment » Fig. 232 on page 201. › Use the clip to pull the fuse out, then insert a new fuse. › Replace the clamp in the original position. Fold back the storage compartment › Move the stop buffer B of the storage compartment behind the brackets C » Fig. 230. › Push in the storage compartment in the opposite direction of the arrow 5 . › Insert the brake rod and lock it against the arrow 4 with a screwdriver. › Push in the side cover against the direction of the arrow 2 . › Press the side cover fully against the direction of the arrow 1 . › Close the storage compartment. Fig. 230 Storage compartment on the front passenger side Fuses and light bulbs 199 No. Fuse arrangement in the dash panel Fig. 231 Fuses Adaptive Shock absorber Trailer device - electrical outlet 23 24 Light - right Panoramic tilt / slide sunroof Central locking- front left door, window - left, exterior mirrors Heating, fold-in function, setting the mirror surface Heated front seats Music amplifier Towing hitch - left lighting CNG relay Not assigned 25 Read and observe and on page 198 first. No. Consumer 1 2 3 4 5 6 Not assigned Not assigned Voltage stabilizer for taxi vehicles Not assigned Databus Sensor Alarm Air conditioning, heating, recipient of the wireless remote control for auxiliary heating, selector lever of the automatic transmission Light switch, rain sensor, diagnostic socket All-wheel drive Infotainment display Belt tensioner - driver's side Infotainment Heated rear seats Air blower for air conditioning,heating Electric steering lock Phonebox, Wireless phone charging Instrument cluster Reversing camera KESSY Operating lever underneath the steering wheel 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 200 Do-it-yourself Consumer 21 22 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 Light - left Parking aid (Park Assist) Airbag switch for hazard warning lights TCS, ESC, Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator, air conditioning, reversing light switch, mirror with automatic blackout, START-STOP, heated rear seats, 230 volt plug, Sport sound generator Headlamp levelling, diagnostic connector, camera, radar Headlight right Headlight left Towing hitch - right lighting Central - front right door, window lifter - right, right Mirrors - Heating, fold-in function, setting the mirror surface 12-Volt power socket Belt tensioner - front passenger side Central - rear doors, headlamp washers, washer Xenon headlights, ambient lighting Trailer device - electrical outlet Electrically adjustable seats 230-Volt power socket Rear window wiper Not assigned Engine starting, clutch pedal switch No. Consumer 50 51 Opening the boot lid Multi-function unit for taxi vehicles 52 53 Voltage stabilizer for taxi vehicles Rear window heating Fuse arrangement in the engine compartment Fig. 233 Fuses Fuses in the engine compartment Read and observe Fig. 232 Fuse panel cover: Removing cover / plastic clip for backups Read and observe and CAUTION The cover of the fuse box in the engine compartment must always be used correctly, otherwise water may penetrate into the fuse box – there is a danger of damage to the vehicle! on page 198 first. No. Consumer 1 2 3 ESC, ABS ESC, ABS Engine control system Radiator fan, oil temperature sensor, air mass meter, valve for fuel pressure control, electric auxiliary heater, oil pressure relief valve, valve for exhaust gas recirculation Ignition coil of CNG relay, fuel injectors, fuel metering valve Brake sensor Coolant pump, radiator shutters, oil pressure valve, gear oil valve Lambda probe Ignition, preheating unit, flue damper, heating the crankcase ventilation Fuel pump, ignition Electrical auxiliary heating Electrical auxiliary heating Automatic gearbox Heated windscreen Horn Ignition, fuel pump ABS, ESC, motor control system, Relay for heated windscreen Databus, battery data module 4 on page 198 first. Replacing fuses › Remove the ignition key, turn off the lights and all electrical consumers. › Press together the lock buttons of the cover simultaneously in the direction of arrow 1 and remove the cover in the direction of arrow 2 » Fig. 232. › Replace the defective fuse. › Replace the cover, push the lock buttons of the cover together and lock. and 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Fuses and light bulbs 201 No. ▶ Switch off the ignition and all of the lights before replacing a bulb. Consumer 19 20 Windscreen wipers Anti-theft alarm 21 22 23 24 31 32 33 34 35 Heated windscreen Engine control system, voltage stabilizer for taxi vehicles Starter Electrical auxiliary heating Vacuum pump Not assigned Not assigned All-wheel drive Not assigned 36 37 38 Not assigned Aux. heating Not assigned ▶ Faulty bulbs must only be replaced with the same type of bulbs. The designa- tion is located on the light socket or the glass bulb. We recommend having the headlight settings checked by a specialist garage after replacing a bulb in the low, high or fog beam. In the case of failure of a Xenon gas discharge bulb or an LED diode, visit a specialist garage. WARNING ■ Always read and observe the warnings before completing any work in the engine compartment » page 172. ■ Accidents can be caused if the road in front of the vehicle is not sufficiently illuminated and the vehicle cannot or can only be seen with difficulty by other road users. ■ Bulbs H7 H8 and H15 are pressurised and may burst when changing the bulb - risk of injury! We therefore recommended wearing gloves and safety glasses when changing a bulb. ■ Do not carry out any work on the Xenon gas discharge lamps - risk of death! Bulbs CAUTION Do not take hold of the glass bulb with naked fingers (even the smallest amount of dirt reduces the working life of the light bulb). Use a clean cloth, napkin, or similar. Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Bulb arrangement in the front headlights Replacing the bulb for the side light (Halogen headlights) Changing the bulb for main beam, separate daytime running lights, and parking light Replacing the bulb for the side light (Xenon headlights) Change bulb for fog lights switch - Variant 1 Change bulb for fog lights switch - Variant 2 Changing the bulb for the licence plate light Removing/installing tail light Replacing the bulbs in the tail lamp assembly - Variant 1 Replacing the bulbs in the tail lamp assembly - Variant 2 203 203 203 204 204 205 205 206 206 207 We recommend having bulbs replaced by a specialist garage or seeking other expert help in the event of any uncertainties. 202 Do-it-yourself Note ■ This Owner's Manual only describes the replacement of bulbs where it is pos- sible to replace the bulbs on your own without any complications arising. Other bulbs must be replaced by a specialist garage. ■ We recommend that a box of replacement bulbs always be carried in the vehicle. Bulb arrangement in the front headlights Fig. 234 Left headlight › Remove the connector. › Insert the connector with the new bulb so that the fixing lug A » Fig. 235fits the bulb into the recess on the reflector. › Remove the hook in the direction of arrow 3 . › Insert the protective cap A » Fig. 234 on page 203 and turn it opposite to the direction of the arrow. Changing the bulb for main beam, separate daytime running lights, and parking light Read and observe and Fig. 236 Changing the bulb for main beam, separate daytime running lights, and parking light on page 202 first. The vehicle is equipped with headlights with halogen lamps or with a xenon discharge lamp and a halogen bulb. Bulb arrangement » Fig. 234 A Low beam with halogen bulb or Xenon gas discharge bulb B Main beam, daytime running lights and parking lights/additional parking light Replacing the bulb for the side light (Halogen headlights) Read and observe and on page 202 first. › Turn the protective cap B » Fig. 234 on page 203 in direction of the arrow. › Pull the holder until it stops in the arrow direction 1 » Fig. 236. › Remove the holder in the direction of the arrow 2 . › Insert the bulb holder with the new bulb and turn opposite to arrow direction 1 as far as the stop. › Insert the protective cap B » Fig. 234 on page 203 and turn it in the direction opposite to the arrow. Fig. 235 Changing the bulb for the low beam Read and observe and on page 202 first. › Turn the protective cap A » Fig. 234 on page 203 in direction of the arrow. › Disconnect the connector with the light bulb in the direction of arrow 1 » Fig. 235. › Remove the connector to the bulb in the direction of arrow 2 . Fuses and light bulbs 203 Replacing the bulb for the side light (Xenon headlights) Change bulb for fog lights switch - Variant 1 Fig. 237 Changing the light bulb for the parking light Read and observe and on page 202 first. › Turn the protective cap B » Fig. 234 on page 203 in direction of the arrow. › Remove the bulb holder with the bulb by jiggling it out in the direction of the arrow 1 » Fig. 237. › Grasp the pedestal with the light bulb in the area A . › Remove the faulty bulb from the holder in the direction of the arrow 2 . › Insert a new bulb in the bulb holder up to the stop. › Replace the bulb holder in the headlamp with the bulb. › Insert the protective cap B » Fig. 234 on page 203 and turn it in the direction opposite to the arrow. Fig. 238 Remove the fog lamp / bulb change - variant 1 Read and observe and on page 202 first. Remove the protective grille and headlight › Insert the clamps for removing the full wheel trims into opening A » Fig. 238. › By pulling the hook in direction of arrow 1 remove the protective grille in the arrow direction 2 » Fig. 238. › Unscrew the screws B with the screwdriver from the tool kit. › With the key 2 » page 186, Vehicle tool kit unlock the locking C in direction of arrow 3 . › Remove the headlight in the direction of arrow 4 . Replacing the light bulb › Press the latch on the connector in the direction of arrow 5 . › Remove the key in the direction of the arrow 6 . › Turn the socket with the bulb to the stop in the direction of the arrow 7 . › Remove the socket with the bulb in the direction of arrow 8 . › Insert the new bulb into the headlight and turn counter to the direction of arrow 7 as far as the stop. 204 Do-it-yourself › Fit the connector. Refit the headlight and grille › Replace the fog light by inserting it in the opposite direction of the arrow 4 » Fig. 238 and tighten. › Insert the guard and push it gently until it locks into place. Change bulb for fog lights switch - Variant 2 › Turn the socket with the bulb to the stop in the direction of the arrow 6 . › Remove the socket with the bulb in the direction of arrow 7 . › Insert the new bulb into the headlight and turn counter to the direction of arrow 6 as far as the stop. › Fit the connector. Refit the headlight and cover › Replace the fog light by inserting it in the opposite direction of the arrow 3 » Fig. 239 and tighten. › Insert the guard and push it gently until it locks into place. Changing the bulb for the licence plate light Fig. 240 Remove the number plate light / replace the bulb Read and observe Fig. 239 Remove the fog lamp / bulb change - variant 2 Read and observe and on page 202 first. Remove the cover and headlight › Insert the clamps for removing the full wheel trims into opening A » Fig. 239. › Remove the cover by pulling the hook in the direction of arrow 1 . › Unscrew the screws B with the screwdriver from the tool kit. › Remove the headlight in the direction of arrow 2 . › Remove the headlight in the direction of arrow 3 . and on page 202 first. › Push in the light in the direction of arrow 1 » Fig. 240until it is detached. › Swivel out the lamp in the direction of the arrow 2 and remove it. › Remove the faulty bulb from the holder in the direction of the arrow 3 . › Insert a new bulb into the holder. › Reinsert the lamp in the opposite direction to the arrow 1 . › Push on the light until the spring clicks into place. Replacing the light bulb › Press the latch on the connector in the direction of arrow 4 . › Remove the key in the direction of the arrow 5 . Fuses and light bulbs 205 Removing/installing tail light › Insert the lamp with the pin A » Fig. 242 on page 206 into the recesses C » Fig. 241 in the body. › Carefully push the cover in » . › Screw the tail lamp into place and install the cover. The cover must engage securely. › Shut the boot lid. CAUTION ■ Ensure that the cable bundle does not become stuck between the body and the lamp when it is being refitted – or there is a risk of damage to the electrical installation and risk of water ingress. ■ If you are not sure whether the cable bundle has become pinched, we recommend that you have the light connection checked by a specialist garage. ■ Ensure that the vehicle paintwork and the tail lamp are not damaged when removing and installing the tail lamp. Replacing the bulbs in the tail lamp assembly - Variant 1 Fig. 241 Remove light / pull out connector Read and observe and on page 202 first. Removing › Open the boot lid. › Insert the clamps for removing the full wheel trims into opening A 1) » Fig. 241. › Remove the cover by pulling the hook in the direction of arrow 1 . › Unscrew the screws B with the key from the tool kit. › Hold the light and carefully remove in the direction of arrow 2 . › Press the latches on the connector2) in the direction of arrow 3 . › Carefully remove the connector from the tail lamp assembly in the direction of the arrow 4 . Fitting › Insert the connector into the light and lock it securely. 1) 2) The position of the opening may vary depending on the vehicle model. The design of the plug can vary depending on the vehicle equipment. 206 Do-it-yourself Fig. 242 Outer part of the light: Basic light/light with LED diodes Replacing the bulbs in the tail lamp assembly - Variant 2 Fig. 243 Inner part of the light: Basic light/light with LED diodes Read and observe and on page 202 first. Outer part of the lamp › Rotate the version with the light bulb B » Fig. 242counter-clockwise and remove it from the lamp housing. › Push the faulty bulb into the holder, turn in anti -clockwise direction up to the stop and remove. › Insert a new bulb into the holder and turn in a clockwise direction to the stop. › Replace the holder with the bulb into the lamp housing and turn in a clockwise direction to the stop. Inner part of the light › Unscrew the lamp holder » Fig. 242 with the screwdriver from the car tool kit, Fig. 244 Outer part of the light: Basic light/light with LED diodes Read and observe and on page 202 first. › Turn the socket with the bulb B in the direction of 1 » Fig. 244. › Remove the socket with the bulb from the lamp housing in the direction of arrow 2 . › Push the faulty bulb into the holder, turn in anti -clockwise direction up to the stop and remove. › Insert a new bulb into the holder and turn in a clockwise direction to the stop. › Reinsert the holder with the bulb into the lamp housing and turn in the opposite direction of the arrow 1 to the stop. and remove the lamp holder from the light assembly. › Turn the respective light bulb » Fig. 243 until it stops counter-clockwise and remove it from the bulb holder. › Insert a new bulb into the holder and turn in a clockwise direction to the stop. › Insert the bulb holder into the light and screw in. Fuses and light bulbs 207 Vehicle data Technical data Technical data Basic vehicle data Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Vehicle data Operating weight Payload Measurement of fuel consumption and CO2 emissions according to ECE Regulations and EU Directives Dimensions - Octavia Dimensions - Octavia estate Track gauge front/rear Departure angle 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 The details given in the vehicle's technical documentation always take precedence over the details in the Owner's Manual. The performance values listed were determined without performance-reducing equipment, e.g. air conditioning system. The values given have been determined in accordance with regulations and in conditions prescribed by legal or technical provisions for determining the operating and technical data of vehicles. The values listed are for the basic model without optional equipment. Fig. 245 Vehicle data sticker/type plate Vehicle data sticker The vehicle data sticker» Fig. 245 - is located on the base of the luggage compartment and is also stuck into the Owner's Manual. The vehicle data sticker contains the following data. 1 Vehicle identification number (VIN) 2 Vehicle type 3 Gearbox code/paint number/interior equipment/engine output/engine code 4 Partial vehicle description 5 Approved tyre diameter in inches1) The approved tyres and rim sizes for your vehicle are listed in the vehicle's technical documentation (the so called COC document) and this also states the declaration of conformity. Type plate The type plate » Fig. 245 - is located at the bottom of the B-pillar on the right driver's side. The type plate contains the following data. 6 Vehicle manufacturers 7 Vehicle identification number (VIN) 8 Maximum permissible gross weight 9 Maximum permissible towed weight (towing vehicle and trailer) 1) Only valid for some countries. 208 Technical data 10 11 Maximum permissible front axle load Maximum permissible rear axle load Vehicle identification number (VIN) The vehicle identification number - VIN (vehicle body number) is stamped into the engine compartment on the right hand suspension strut dome. This number is also located on a sign on the lower left hand edge below the windscreen (together with a VIN bar code), and on the type plate. Operating weight - Octavia Engine 1.0 l./85 kW TSI 1.2 l./63 kW TSI 1.4 l/81 kW TSI G-TEC The VIN number can also be displayed in Infotainment » Owner´s Manual Infotainment. Engine number The engine number (three-digit identifier and serial number) is stamped on the engine block. 1.4 l./110 kW TSI Supplementary Information (applies to Russia) The full type approval number of the means of transport is indicated in the registration documents, field 17. 1.6 l./81 kW MPI Maximum permissible trailer weight The listed maximum allowable trailer weight is only valid for altitudes up to 1000 m above sea level. The engine output falls as the height increases, as does the ability to climb. Therefore, for every additional 1000 m in height (or part), the maximum permissible towed weight must be reduced by 10%. 1.8 l./132 kW TSI 1.6 l. / 66 kW TDI CR The towed weight is made up of the actual weights of the loaded towing vehicle and the loaded trailer. 1.6 l. / 81 kW TDI CR WARNING Do not exceed the specified maximum permissible weights – risk of accident and damage! 2.0 l. / 105 kW TDI CR Operating weight This value is only a guide value and corresponds to the lowest possible operating weight without any equipment added that would also increase the weight (e.g. air conditioning, emergency or spare wheel etc.). It also includes a weight allowance for the driver (75 kg), the weight of the operating fluids, the tool kit and a fuel tank filled to 90 % capacity. 2.0 l. / 110 kW TDI CR 2.0 l. / 135 kW TDI CR a) Transmission Operating weight (kg) MG DSG MG MG DSG MG (EU5) MG (EU6) DSG (EU4, EU5) DSG (EU6) MG AG 1225 1250 1225 1394 1419 1250 1255 1265 1270 1210 1250 MG (EU4, EU5) MG (EU6) DSG 4x4 DSG (EU4, EU5) DSG (EU6) MG MG5 MG6 MG 4x4 DSG MG DSG MG MG 4x4 DSG DSG 4x4 1315 1320/1315a) 1428 1330 1335/1330a) 1305 1305 1280 1413 1320 1325 1345 1332 1438 1352 1463 Only valid for some countries. Technical data 209 Operating weight - Octavia RS Engine Engine Transmission Operating weight (kg) MG DSG MG DSG 1420 1440 1445 1465 MG DSG DSG 4x4 1445 1465 1550 Transmission Operating weight (kg) MG DSG MG MG DSG MG (EU5) MG (EU6) DSG (EU4, EU5) DSG (EU6) MG AG MG (EU4, EU5) MG (EU6) DSG 4x4 DSG (EU4, EU5) DSG (EU6) MG MG5 MG6 MG 4x4 DSG 1247 1272 1247 1416 1441 1272 1277 1287 1292 1232 1272 1337 1342/1337a) 1450 1352 1357/1352a) 1327 1327 1280 1435 1342 2.0 l/162 kW TSI 2.0 l./169 kW TSI 2.0 l. / 135 kW TDI CR Warning triangle – Octavia Combi Engine 1.0 l./85 kW TSI 1.2 l./63 kW TSI 1.4 l/81 kW TSI G-TEC 1.4 l./110 kW TSI 1.6 l./81 kW MPI 1.8 l./132 kW TSI 1.6 l. / 66 kW TDI CR 1.6 l. / 81 kW TDI CR 210 Technical data Transmission Operating weight (kg) MG DSG 1347 1367 2.0 l. / 110 kW TDI CR MG MG 4x4 1354 1458 2.0 l. / 135 kW TDI CR DSG DSG 4x4 1374 1485 2.0 l. / 105 kW TDI CR a) Only valid for some countries. Operating weight - Octavia Combi RS Engine 2.0 l/162 kW TSI 2.0 l./169 kW TSI 2.0 l. / 135 kW TDI CR Transmission Operating weight (kg) MG DSG MG DSG MG DSG DSG 4x4 1442 1462 1467 1487 1467 1487 1572 Operating weight - Octavia Combi Scout Engine 1.8 l/132 kW TSI 1.6 l. / 81 kW TDI CR 2.0 l. / 110 kW TDI CR 2.0 l. / 135 kW TDI CR Transmission Operating weight (kg) DSG 4x4 MG 4x4 MG 4x4 DSG 4x4 1522 1505 1526 1559 Note If required, you can find out the precise weight of your vehicle at a specialist garage. Payload It is possible to calculate the approximate maximum payload from the difference between the permissible total weight and the operating weight. The payload consists of the following weights. ▶ The weight of the passengers. ▶ The weight of all items of luggage and other loads. ▶ The weight of the roof, including the roof rack system. ▶ The weight of the equipment that is excluded from the operating weight. ▶ The trailer drawbar load with trailer operation (max. 75 kg or 80 kg for vehi- cles with 4-wheel drive or 56 kg for G-TEC vehicles). Measurement of fuel consumption and CO2 emissions according to ECE Regulations and EU Directives The data on fuel consumption and CO2 emissions were not available at the time of going to press. The data on fuel consumption and CO2 emissions are given on the ŠKODA websites or in the sales and technical vehicle documentation. The measurement of the intra-urban cycle begins with a cold start of the engine. Afterwards urban driving is simulated. In the extra-urban driving cycle, the vehicle is accelerated and decelerated in all gears, corresponding to daily routine driving conditions. The driving speed varies between 0 and 120 km/h. The calculation of the combined fuel consumption considers a weighting of about 37 % for the intra-urban cycle and 63 % for the extra-urban cycle. Note ■ The emission and fuel consumption figures given on the ŠKODA websites or in the commercial and technical vehicle documentation have been established in accordance with rules and under conditions that are set out by statutory or technical rules for the determination of operational and technical data of motor vehicles. ■ Depending on the extent of the equipment, the driving style, traffic conditions, weather influences and vehicle condition, consumption values can in practice result in fuel economy figures in the use of the vehicle that differ from the fuel consumption values listed on the ŠKODA websites or in the commercial and technical vehicle documentation. Technical data 211 Dimensions - Octavia Fig. 246 Vehicle dimensions Vehicle dimensions for operating weight without driver (in mm) » Fig. 246 Specification A B C D E F G H 212 Height Front track » page 214 Width Rear track » page 214 Width including exterior mirrors Clearance Basic dimension Wheelbase Vehicles with 1.8 l/132 kW TSI engine G-TEC vehicles Length Technical data Octavia Octavia 4x4 Octavia RS 1461 1460 1449 1814 1814 1814 2017 140 2686 2680 2680 4659 2017 138 2680 4659 2017 128 2680 4685 Dimensions - Octavia estate Fig. 247 Vehicle dimensions Vehicle dimensions for operating weight without driver (in mm) » Fig. 247 Specification A B C D E F G H Height Front track » page 214 Width Rear track » page 214 Width including exterior mirrors Clearance Basic dimension Wheelbase Vehicles with 1.8 l/132 kW TSI engine G-TEC vehicles Length Octavia Estate OCTAVIA Estate 4x4 OCTAVIA Estate RS Octavia Combi Scout 1465 1465 1452 1531 1814 1814 1814 1814 2017 140 2686 2680 2680 4659 2017 139 2680 4659 2017 127 2680 4685 2017 171 2679 4685 Technical data 213 Track gauge front/rear Engine Front track Rear track 1.0 l./85 kW TSI 1.2 l./63 kW TSI 1.4 l/81 kW TSI G-TEC 1.4 l./110 kW TSI 1.6 l./81 kW MPI 1.8 l./132 kW TSI 2.0 l./162 kW TSI 2.0 l./169 kW TSI 1.6 l. / 66 kW TDI CR 1.6 l. / 81 kW TDI CR 2.0 l. / 105 kW TDI CR 1549 1549 1543 1543 1549 1543/1538a) 1535 1535 1549 1549/1538a) 1543 1520 1520 1515 1514 1520 1512/1506a) 1506 1506 1520 1520/1518b)/ 1506a) 1514 2.0 l. / 110 kW TDI CR 2.0 l. / 135 kW TDI CR 1543/1538a) 1535/1538a)/ 1543b) 1514/1506a)/ 1512b) 1506/1512b) a) b) Applies to Octavia Combi Scout vehicles. Applies to Octavia 4x4/Octavia Combi 4x4 vehicles. 214 Technical data Departure angle Angle » Fig. 248 A Overhang angle, front B Overhang angle, rear The overhang angle values indicate the maximum incline of a slope, up which the vehicle can drive at a slow speed without the bumper or underbody making contact with the slope. The values listed correspond to the maximum axle load, front or back. Fig. 248 Octavia/Octavia Combi Departure angle (°) - Octavia Octavia » Fig. 248 Basic dimension Vehicles with off-road package Vehicles with SPORT package a) Octavia 4x4 Octavia RS A B A B A B 14 15.1 12.9 12.3 13 12.5 14.1 15.3 - 12.4 12.2 - 14.1a) 12.9 12.8a) 12.4 Only valid for some countries. Departure angle (°) - Octavia Combi » Fig. 248 Basic dimension Vehicles with off-road package Vehicles with SPORT package a) Octavia Estate OCTAVIA Estate 4x4 OCTAVIA Estate RS Octavia Combi Scout A B A B A B A B 13.9 14.9 12.8 12.2 13.2 12.4 14.2 15.3 - 12.5 12.4 - 14.1a) 12.8 12.6a) 12.3 16.7 - 13.8 - Only valid for some countries. Technical data 215 Vehicle-specific details per engine type Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects: 1.0 l/85 kW TSI engine 1.2 ltr. / 63 kW TSI engine 1.4 l/81 kW TSI G-TEC engine 1.4 ltr./110 kW TSI engine 1.6 l/81 kW MPI engine 1.8 l/132 kW TSI engine 216 216 217 217 217 218 2.0 l/162 kW TSI engine 2.0 ltr./169 kW TSI engine 1.6 ltr./66 kW TDI CR engine 1.6 ltr./81 kW TDI CR engine 2.0 l/105 kW TDI CR engine 2.0 ltr./110 kW TDI CR engine 2.0 ltr./135 kW TDI CR engine 218 218 219 219 219 220 220 The specified values have been determined in accordance with rules and under conditions set out by legal or technical requirements for determining operational and technical data for motor vehicles. The emissions standard is detailed in the technical vehicle documentation as well as in the certificate of conformity (COC document), which can be obtained from a ŠKODA partnera). a) Only valid for some countries and some models. 1.0 l/85 kW TSI engine Output (kW/rpm) Maximum torque (Nm at 1/rpm) Number of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Body Gearbox Top speed (km/h) Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 85/5500 200/2000-3500 3/999 Octavia MG 202 9.9 Octavia Estate DSG 202 10 MG 200 10.1 DSG 200 10.2 1.2 ltr. / 63 kW TSI engine Output (kW/rpm) Maximum torque (Nm at 1/rpm) Number of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Body Gearbox Top speed (km/h) Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 216 Technical data 63/4300-5300 160/1400-3500 4/1197 Octavia MG 181 12 Octavia Estate MG 178 12.2 1.4 l/81 kW TSI G-TEC engine Performance (kW at 1/min) Maximum torque (Nm at 1/rpm) Number of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Body Gearbox Top speed (km/h) Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 81/4800-6000 200/1500-3500 4/1395 Octavia MG 195 10.9 Octavia Estate DSG 195 11 MG 193 11 DSG 193 11.1 1.4 ltr./110 kW TSI engine Output (kW/rpm) Maximum torque (Nm at 1/rpm) Number of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Body Gearbox Top speed (km/h) Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 110/5000-6000 250/1500-3500 4/1395 Octavia MG 219 8.1 Octavia Estate DSG 219 8.2 MG 216 8.2 DSG 216 8.3 1.6 l/81 kW MPI engine Output (kW/rpm) Maximum torque (Nm at 1/rpm) Number of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Body Gearbox Top speed (km/h) Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 81/5800 155/3800-4000 4/1598 Octavia MG 192 10.6 Octavia Estate AG 190 12 MG 191 10.8 AG 188 12.2 Technical data 217 1.8 l/132 kW TSI engine Output (kW/rpm) Maximum torque (Nm at 1/rpm) Number of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Body Octavia 132/5100-6200 (132/4500-6200)a) 250/1250-5000 (280/1350-4500)a) 4/1798 Octavia Estate Transmission MG DSG DSG 4x4 MG DSG DSG 4x4 Top speed (km/h) Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 231 7.3 231 7.4 229 7.4 229 7.4 229 7.5 227 7.5 a) DSG 4x4 Scout 216 7.8 Applies to 4x4 vehicles. 2.0 l/162 kW TSI engine Output (kW/rpm) Maximum torque (Nm at 1/rpm) Number of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Body Gearbox Top speed (km/h) Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 162/4500-6200 350/1500-4400 4/1984 Octavia RS MG 248 6.8 Octavia Combi RS DSG 245 6.9 MG 244 6.9 DSG 242 7.1 2.0 ltr./169 kW TSI engine Output (kW/rpm) Maximum torque (Nm at 1/rpm) Number of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Body Gearbox Top speed (km/h) Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 218 Technical data 169/4700-6200 350/1500-4600 4/1984 Octavia RS MG 250 6.7 Octavia Combi RS DSG 249 6.8 MG 247 6.8 DSG 245 7 1.6 ltr./66 kW TDI CR engine Output (kW/rpm) Maximum torque (Nm at 1/rpm) Number of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Body Gearbox Top speed (km/h) Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 66/2750-4800 230/1400-2700 4/1598 Octavia MG 186 12.2 Octavia Estate MG 183 12.3 1.6 ltr./81 kW TDI CR engine Performance (kW at 1/min) Maximum torque (Nm at 1/rpm) Number of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Body 81/3200-4000 250/1500-3000 4/1598 Octavia Octavia Estate Gearbox MG5 MG6 MG 4x4 DSG MG5 MG6 MG 4x4 Top speed (km/h) Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 197 10.6 206 10.6 193 11.3 197 10.7 194 10.8 204 10.7 191 11.5 MG 4x4 Scout 187 11.7 DSG 194 10.9 2.0 l/105 kW TDI CR engine Output (kW/rpm) Maximum torque (Nm at 1/rpm) Number of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Body Gearbox Top speed (km/h) Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 105/3500-4000 320/1750-3000 4/1968 Octavia MG 215 8.7 Octavia Estate DSG 212 8.9 MG 213 8.7 DSG 210 9 Technical data 219 2.0 ltr./110 kW TDI CR engine Output (kW/rpm) Maximum torque (Nm at 1/rpm) Number of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Body Gearbox Top speed (km/h) Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) a) Octavia 110/3500-4000 320/1750-3000 (340/1750-3000)a) 4/1968 Octavia Estate MG MG 4x4 DSG MG MG 4x4 218 8.5/8.4a) 215 8.5 215 8.6/8.5a) 216 8.6/8.5a) 213 8.6 MG 4x4 Scout 207 9.1 DSG 213 8.7/8.6a) Applies to cars with the EU6 emission standard. 2.0 ltr./135 kW TDI CR engine Output (kW/rpm) Maximum torque (Nm at 1/rpm) Number of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Body Transmission Top speed (km/h) Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 220 Technical data 135/3500-4000 380/1750-3250 4/1968 Octavia MG RS 232 7.9 DSG RS 230 7.9 Octavia Estate DSG 4x4 228 7.1 DSG 4x4 RS 228 7.6 MG RS 230 8 DSG RS 228 8 DSG 4x4 226 7.2 DSG 4x4 Scout 219 7.8 DSG 4x4 RS 224 7.7 Index A ABS Operation Warning light ACC Acceptance and recycling of used vehicles Accessories Adaptive Chassis Control Warning light Adaptive Chassis Control (DCC) Adaptive cruise control automatic stop-start Operation Set/change the desired speed. special driving conditions Start control Stop/resume control Adaptive Cruise Control Malfunctions Operation overview Overtaking Radar sensor Set the clearance level Trailer towing Adaptive headlight see xenon headlight Adjusting Steering wheel Adjusting seats manually Adjusting the seats Advance warning / emergency braking Advice on tyre/wheel usage AHL see xenon headlight Air-conditioning system Air outlet vents air bag 121 34 134 162 160 40 141 135 135 137 137 136 136 134 138 136 138 120 137 138 65 12 75 11 40 180 65 106 17 Airbag Adjustments and impairments to the airbag 161 system Deactivation 20 Deployment 18 Warning light 35 Airbag system 17 Air conditioning 103 Air distribution control 105 Climatronic 104 Manual air conditioning 104 Air distribution control 105 Air outlet vents 106 54 Alarm Trailer 158 All-year tyres 183 Anti-lock braking system (ABS) 121 Anti-theft alarm system 54 Trailer 158 Anti-theft wheel bolts 188 Armrest Front 78 Rear 79 Ashtray 90 Assembling the bar ball, Step 1 151 bar ball, Step 2 152 120 Assist systems Auto-check control 42 Automatic Distance Control Warning lights 33, 40 Automatic drive Selector lever 115 Automatic driving light control 65 Automatic gearbox 115 Kickdown 117 Launch control 117 Malfunction 37 Manual shifting on the multifunction steering wheel 116 197 Selector lever-emergency unlocking Selector lever lock 116 Starting-off and driving 117 Tiptronic 116 Warning light 37 Automatic shutdown of consumers 178 Automatic transmission Selector lever lock 116 AUX 84 Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventilation) 107 119 Avoiding damage to your vehicle B ball bar 151 ready position Ball head Check fitting 152 Ready position 150 Battery Change in key 195 Replace the battery in the remote control in the auxiliary heating 195 Belts 14 Belt tensioners 16 Bonnet Closing 173 Opening 173 Boot Class N1 vehicles 99 see boot lid 55 Stow roof rack 102 Boot lid 55, 56 Automatic locking 56 Open/close 57 Open/Close 55 Brake Assist (HBA) 123 Index 221 Brake booster Brake fluid Check specification Brake linings warning light Brake pads new Brake pedal (automatic transmission) Warning light Brakes Brake booster Brake fluid Braking and stabilisation systems Handbrake Information on braking Warning lights Brake system Braking Running in Breakdown kit Breakdown service see Help in an emergency Bulbs Replacing Button in driver's door electric windows 112 177 177 177 36 112 37 112 177 121 113 112 33 121 118 190 9 202 59 C Camera See reversing camera car battery warning light Car battery Check condition Cover Disconnecting and reconnecting Replacing Winter operation 222 Index 128 37 178 178 179 179 178 Car care Exterior Interior Outside Car computer see multifunction display Care and maintenance Cargo element Car washing Interior washing Central locking Problems Central locking button Change battery Changing Windscreen wiper blades Changing a wheel Changing Changing gear Selector lever Tiptronic Changing wheels Wheels Charging a vehicle battery Check Brake fluid Engine oil Fit ball head properly Oil level Checking Battery status Coolant Checks Statutory checks Children and safety Child safety lock 165 167 166 43 160 98 164 167 164 50 54 52 195 198 186 186 115 116 186 179 177 175 152 175 178 176 160 21 53 Child seat Classification Installation location in the passenger seat ISOFIX on the front passenger seat on the passenger seat TOP TETHER Cigarette lighter Cleaning the vehicle Outside Windows Climatronic air distribution control Automatic operation Operating elements Clothes hook CNG Gas gauge Gas leaks In an accident refuel Regular checks Sticker warning light cockpit Cockpit Lighting Comfort signalling COMING HOME Compartments Component protection Compressed natural gas see CNG Computer see multifunction display Convenience operation sliding / tilting roof Window 21 23 23, 25 23 24, 25 22 23 26 90 166 166 103 105 105 104 87 171 31 171 171 171 171 171 37 29 68 64 67 81 161 171 43 61 60 Coolant Checking Refilling Temperature display Warning light CORNER See Fog lights with the CORNER function Correct routing of seat belt Correct seated position Correct seating position Crew Protect Assist Cruise control Cruise control system Warning light Cruise Control System Cup holders 176 176 176 31 38 67 15 11 13 143 133 37 132 84 D DAY LIGHT see Daylight running lights Daylight running lights DCC Warning light Deactivation Airbag Delayed locking of the boot lid See boot lid Departure angle Diesel Diesel fuel Diesel particle filter (DPF) Digital Clock Digital Service Plan Dipped beam Dipstick display natural gas supply Petrol / diesel storage 64 64 141 40 20 56 215 170 170 39 42 164 63 175 31 31 Display Cardinal points Coolant temperature Gear changes In the instrument cluster Service interval Disposal Acceptance and recycling of used vehicles Distance warning Warning light Door Child safety lock Emergency locking Emergency locking of the driver's door Opening/Closing Door warning double hooks Drive Driving through water DriveGreen Driver Steering Recommendation (DSR) Driving Emissions Fuel consumption Maximum speed through water driving mode Offroad Driving mode Adaptive Chassis Control (DCC) Comfort Eco Individual Mode selection and Infotainment display Normal Settings for mode Individual Sport Driving Mode Selection DSR 41 31 42 41 47 162 139 40 53 196 196 53 41 95 119 118 122 211 211 216 119 142 140 141 141 141 142 142 141 143 141 140 122 E Economical driving 118 ECO TIP 41 Eco tips 41 EDL 122 Electrical boot lid 57 set the top position of the lid Electric boot lid Force limiter 56 Manual operation 56 Open/close 57 Electric luggage compartment lid Malfunctions 57 58, 60 Electric power windows Malfunctions 60 Electric Windows Button in driver’s door’ 59 Electronic differential lock (EDL, XDS) 122 Electronic immobilizer 109 Emergency Hazard warning light system 67 Jump-starting 192 Selector lever-unlocking 197 Starting / stopping the engine with the push of a button 110 Starting the engine / stopping with the push of a button 111 Towing the vehicle 193 Towing the vehicle using the trailer device 195 Tyre repair 190 Unlocking/locking the door 196 Unlocking / locking the door 196 Emergency equipment Fire extinguisher 185 First aid kit 185 Jack 186 Reflective vest 185 Vehicle tool kit 186 Warning triangle 185 Index 223 Emergency spare Removing / stowing Emission control system Emissions Engine Information messages Running in Engine compartment Brake fluid Coolant Engine oil Overview Vehicle battery Windscreen washer fluid Engine drag torque control (MSR) Engine number engine oil specification Engine oil Check Oil changing Refilling warning light Warning light EPC ESC ESC Sport Function Warning light Extended warranty 187 35 211 38 118 172 177 176 174 174 177 174 122 208 175 174 175 174 175 38 38 35 121 121 34 6 F Fastening elements Fatigue detection Films Fire extinguisher First aid kit Flashing Floor covering in the luggage compartment 224 Index 93 147 165 185 185 64 95 Flooring in the luggage compartment Fog lights warning light Fog lights/rear fog light Fog lights with the CORNER function Footmats see footmats Force limiter Electric boot lid Window Front Assist Deactivation/activation Distance warning Malfunctions Operation Radar sensor Warning and automatic braking Warning light Front seats fuel Fuel - natural gas Gas gauge Gasoline / Diesel gauge warning light Fuel Diesel refer to Fuel Refuelling Unleaded petrol Fuel consumption Fuel filter information messages Fuel Reserve Fuses in the dashboard in the dash panel in the engine compartment Plastic clip 95 G 37 66 67 115 115 Gearbox Information messages Gear change Gear recommendation Information on the selected gear Gear changing Gear stick Genuine parts Glasses compartment 56 59 138 140 139 140 139 120 139 40 75 171 31 31 36 168 170 168 168 169 211 39 36 198 199 200 201 201 37 42 42 114 161 85 H Handbrake Warning light Hazard warning light system HBA Headrests Heating Air distribution control Mirrors Seats Windscreen and rear window Help in an emergency HHC High-beam assistant High beam assistant Warning light Hill Start Assist (HHC) hitch Hitch Hook horn 113 33 67 123 79 103, 104 105 73 80 70 9 123 66 39 123 154 149 95 29 I I-PAD holder Ignition lock Immobilizer 91 110 109 In an emergency Changing a wheel Inertia reel Information about the towing process Information system Auto Check Control Door alarm Eco tips Gear recommendation Lap timer MAXI DOT-Display Multifunction display Service interval display Stop watch Infotainment Instrument cluster Auto-check control Warning lights interior light Interior lighting Interior monitor ISOFIX 186 16 193 41 41 41 41 42 46 45 43 47 46 7 30 42 32 68 69 55 24, 25 J Jack Jump-starting 186 192 K KESSY Unlocking/locking key Starting / stopping the engine Switch on/off ignition Key Change battery Locking Unlocking Key CAR see Infotainment 51 110 110 195 50 50 7 L Lamp failure Warning light Lamps Warning light Lane Assist Malfunctions see Lane Departure Warning Warning light Lane Departure Warning Activation / deactivation Operation Lap timer LEAVING HOME lever Turn signal/main beam Lever ACC Cruise control Front Assist Operation of the information system Windscreen wipers light Flash Fog lights/rear fog light High-beam assistant Light COMING HOME / LEAVING HOME Replacing bulbs Turn signal/main beam Xenon headlight Light Assist see High-beam assistant lighting entry space Lighting Interior lighting Luggage compartment 38 38 145 143 36 143 145 144 46 67 64 136 133 140 42 71, 72 64 66 66 67 202 64 65 66 68 68 92 Lights 63 Abroad 68 65 Automatic driving light control Cockpit 68 Daylight running 64 Dipped beam 63 Fog lights with the CORNER function 67 Hazard warning light system 67 Headlight cleaning system 72 Headlight range control 63 Parking lights 63, 67 Switching on and off 63 Warning lights 32 Load 210 Lock 52 Individual settings Locking Central locking button 52 in case of emergency 196 KESSY 51 Key 50 Remote control 51 Lock steering lock 109 Long cargo channel 88 Low tyre pressure warning See tyre pressure monitoring 148 Luggage compartment 92 98 Compartment with cargo element Cover 96 Fastening elements 93 Fastening the flooring 95 Fixing nets 94 Floor covering on both sides 95 foldable hook 95 Folding double hooks 95 Lighting 92 Net on the luggage compartment cover 96 Net partition 101 Roll-up cover 97 Storage compartments under the floor covering 98 Index 225 unlock manually Unlock the boot lid Variable loading floor Luggage compartment cover Roll-up cover Luggage storage Multi-function pocket 196 196 99 96 97 99 M Main beam Warning light Manual air conditioning Air distribution control Controls Manual gear changing see gear changing Materials defect liability MAXI DOT see MAXI DOT-Display MAXI DOT-Display Main menu MAXI DOT display Lap timer Menu item assist systems Menu item Audio Menu item navigation Menu item telephone Operation Stop watch Maximum speed MCB Mechanical window lifters open/close Media AUX see Infotainment USB Memory Memory Function for the seat 226 Index 64 37 105 104 114 5 45 45 45 46 46 45 45 46 42, 43 46 216 123 58 84 7 84 44 76 Mirror Vanity mobility warranty MODE button See driving mode selection Modes of the automatic transmission Modifications and technical alterations MSR Multi-function pocket Multi collision brake (MCB) Multifunction display Functions Information Memory Multifunction pocket Multifunction steering wheel Multimedia holder 72 70 6 140 115 160 122 99 123 43 43 44 94 43 85 N N1 Nameplate natural gas operation warning light Navigation see Infotainment Net partition Nets NGVs see CNG 99 208 37 7 101 94, 96 171 O OFF ROAD ABS EDS ESC hill descent assistant operation TCS 123 125 125 125 124 124 125 OFF ROAD mode warning light oil see Engine oil Oil Information messages Oil changing Engine oil On-board computer see multifunction display Operating weight Original accessories overview cockpit Overview Engine compartment Fuses Warning lights 123 40 175 38 174 43 209 161 29 174 198 32 P Park assist 132 Departing from a parallel parking space Parking 131 Park Assist 129 Automatic brake assist 132 Malfunctions 132 Operation 130 Parking space search 131 Parking 114 Park Assist 129 Parking aid 125 Reversing camera 128 Parking aid 125 Automatic system activation when moving forward 128 Function 126 Parking assistance Activation / deactivation 127 Display in the Infotainment display 127 Parking lights 63 Parking the vehicle see Parking Park Pilot Parts replacement Passive safety Before setting off Driving safety Passive Safety Pedals Footmats Petrol Phonebox Pockets Pockets in the luggage compartment Positioning the jack Power limit sliding/tilting roof Tilt / slide sunroof Power steering Power windows Button in the front passenger door Button in the rear doors Practical features Pockets Seat backrest with long cargo channel Storage compartment for umbrella Waste container Preheating unit Proactive passenger protection Warning light 114 125 160 11 11 11 115 115 169 83 87 94 189 61 61 33 59 59 87 88 86 84 35 143 35 R Rack Radiator shutters Radio see Infotainment Raising the vehicle 102 119 7 189 Rear fog light 66 Warning light 34 78 Rear seats Rear View Camera Function keys 129 Operation 128 Orientation Lines 129 Rear view mirror 72 Rear window - heating 70 Refilling Coolant 176 Engine oil 175 Windscreen washer fluid 174 185 Reflective vest Refuelling 168 Fuel 168 Regulation Headlight beam 63 remote Synchronization process 54 Remote Change battery 195 Remote control Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventilation) 108 Unlocking/locking the vehicle 51 Removable through-loading bag 88 Removing the 152 bar ball, Step 1 bar ball, Step 2 153 Repairs and technical alterations 160 Replace Battery 195 Replacing Bulbs 202 Fuses 198 Windscreen wiper blades 197 Rev counter 30 Reversing camera 128 Rims Roller blind Luggage compartment cover Roof Weight Roof rack Running in Brake pads Engine Tyres 180 97 102 102 112 118 180 S SafeLock safety air bag Safety Child safety Child safety seats Correct seated position Headrests ISOFIX TOP TETHER SAFE, SAFELOCK See SafeLock Saving electrical energy Saving fuel Seat belt height adjustment Warning light Seat belts Belt tensioners fastening and unfastening Seatbelts Inertia reels Seat belts Warning light Seat electrical adjustment 52 17 11 21 21 11 79 24, 25 26 52 118 118 15 37 14 16 15 16 33 76 Index 227 Seats Electrical adjustment 76 77 Folding front passenger seat front 75 Front armrest 78 Headrests 79 Heating 80 Manually adjusting 75 Memory Function of the electrically adjustable seat 76 Rear 78 Rear armrest 79 Rear seat backrests 78 Setting 75 77 Storing in memory of remote control key Seats and head restraint 75 see Instrument cluster see Instrument cluster 30 Selector lever 115 Selector lever control 115 Selector lever lock Warning light 37 service 160 Service Service interval display 47 Warning light 40 Service intervals 162, 163 164 Service Plan Setting Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventilation) 107 Headrests 79 Mirror 73 Positions of the variable loading floor 100 Seat belt height 15 Seats 75 Setting the Clock 42 228 Index Sliding/tilting roof Activating operation of the sunshade Sunshade SmartGate connection using Wi-Fi direct Connection via Wi-Fi introductory information Password/PIN code change Setting SmartLink see Infotainment Snow chains sockets 12-volt power socket in the luggage compartment 12-volt socket in the interior Sockets 230 V Spare wheel Removing / stowing Speed symbol Spoiler Stabilisation control (ESC) Stabilisation system START-STOP Jump-starting Manually deactivating/activating the system operation Warning light START-STOP system Start engine Immobilizer Starter button Lock / unlock the steering lock Problems with the engine start Starting / stopping the engine Switch on/off ignition Starting engine Jump-starting 62 62 49 48 48 49 49 7 184 89 89 89 182 187 183 161 121 121 111 192 112 111 39 111 109 109 111 110 110 192 Starting the engine Jump-starting Key Starter button Steering lock (KESSY system) warning light steering wheel Correct posture Steering wheel Buttons setting Stopping see Parking Stopping the engine Key Starter button Stop watch Storage Storage compartment Glasses compartment in the front centre console in the rear centre console on the driver's side on the front passenger side under the front arm rest Storage compartments Storing seats Storing skis Stowage compartments in the doors Sunblind for the tilt / slide sunroof Sunshade of the sliding/tilting roof Sun visors Switch Car battery Switching the lights on and off Switch off Alarm 192 110 110 33 12 43 12 114 110 110 46 81 85 83 87 82 86 85 81 76 88 82 62 62 70 179 63 54 Switch off ignition Key Switch on ignition Key 110 110 110 110 T Tablet holder TCS Deactivate/activate Function Warning light TCS - off Warning light Technical data Telephone see Infotainment Through-loading bag Ticket holder Tilt / slide sunroof Activate operation Operation Sunblind Time Tiptronic Tools TOP TETHER Towing Towing away Towing device Accessories Description Vertical load Towing eye Towing protection Towing the vehicle Traction control (TCS) Traffic sign recognition Function 91 122 122 34 34 208 7 88 82 61 61 62 42 116 186 26 194 193 154 150 149 194 55 193 34, 122 145 146 Traffic Sign Recognition Additional display Information messages Malfunctions Traffic signs see Traffic sign recognition Trailer Connect and disconnect Load loading Trailer operation Trailer operation Trailer stabilization system (TSA) Trailer towing Transport Luggage compartment Roof rack Towing device and trailer Transporting children Triangle TSA Turn signal Turn signal system Warning light Tyre load capacity Tyre pressure Warning light Tyre pressure monitoring Warning light Tyre repair Tyres damage Explanation of the label new Tyre pressure Wear indicator Tyre size 147 147 147 145 154 155 155 158 158 123 149 92 102 149 21 185 123 64 36 183 181 35 148 35 190 180 180 183 180 181 182 183 U Umbrella Tray Unlock Individual settings Unlocking Central locking button In case of emergency KESSY Key Remote control Unlocking and locking Unlock steering lock USB Used vehicles Acceptance and recycling Useful equipment 230-volt socket Clothes hook Cup holders Glasses compartment Multimedia holder Removable through-loading bag Useful features Storage compartment Useful Features 12-volt power socket in the luggage compartment 12-volt socket in the interior Ashtray Cigarette lighter Reflective vest Ticket holder 86 52 52 196 51 50 51 50 109 84 162 89 87 84 85 85 88 81 89 89 90 90 185 82 V Variable loading floor 99 Index 229 Vehicle battery Automatic shutdown of consumers charging Safety instructions Vehicle care Vehicle cleaning Vehicle condition see Auto-check control Vehicle data sticker Vehicle data sticker and nameplate Vehicle data sticker and nameplate Vehicle dimensions Vehicle height Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) Vehicle length Vehicle tool kit Vehicle washing Exterior Vehicle width Vest VIN Vehicle Identification Number Visibility Visors 178 179 177 164 164 42 208 208 212, 213 212, 213 208 212, 213 186 165 212, 213 185 208 69 70 W Warning a low temperature Warning lights Warning symbols see Warning lights Warning triangle warning when speeding Warranty Waste container Water in the fuel filter Weather conditions Weights 230 Index 39 32 32 185 44 5 84 39 160 208, 209, 210 Wheel bolts Anti-theft wheel bolts 188 188 Caps Loosening and tightening 189 Wheels 180 Full trim 187 Load Index 183 Low-profile tyres 180 Snow chains 184 Speed symbol 183 Tyre age 180 Tyre damage 180 Tyre pressure 181 Tyre storage 180 183 Winter tyres Wi-Fi 48 see Infotainment 7 Wi-Fi direct 49 Window operation 58 Window operation 58 Windscreen - heating 70 Windscreen and rear window heating 70 Windscreen washer fluid Refilling 174 Warning light 39 Windscreen washer system 71 71 Windscreen wipers and washers Activation 71 Add fluid 174 Automatic rear window wiper 72 Operation 72 Replacing the windscreen wiper blade 198 Replacing the windscreen wiper blades 197 Service position of the windscreen wiper arms 197 winter operation 183 Winter operation All-year tyres 183 Car battery 178 Diesel fuel 170 Snow chains 184 Winter tyres 183 183 Winter tyres Wipers and washer Warning light for windscreen washer fluid level 39 Wiping interval 71 X XDS Xenon headlight 122 65 Reprinting, duplicating, translating and any other use, either in whole or in part, is not permitted without the written consent of ŠKODA AUTO a.s.. ŠKODA AUTO a.s. expressly reserves all rights relating to copyright laws. Subject to change. Issued by: ŠKODA AUTO a.s. © ŠKODA AUTO a.s. 2016 www.skoda-auto.com Návod k obsluze Octavia anglicky 05.2016 S65.5610.26.20 5E0012720AJ 5E0012720AJ ">
/
Download
Just a friendly reminder. You can view the document right here. But most importantly, our AI has already read it. It can explain complex things in simple terms, answer your questions in any language, and help you quickly navigate even the longest or most compilcated documents.
Public link updated
The public link to your chat has been updated. You may view and manage your chat links after registration here.
Document public link
Advertisement
Key features
Explains safety systems like seatbelts, airbags, and child safety
Provides guidance on driving modes, braking, and parking assistance
Covers maintenance like checking fluid levels and tire pressure
Details operation of lights, wipers, seats, and infotainment features
Frequently asked questions
Adjust the seat so you can fully depress the pedals with slightly bent legs. Maintain at least 25 cm distance from the steering wheel and at least 10 cm from the dashboard near the knee airbag. Ensure the steering wheel can be reached with your arms at a slight angle.
If damage to any parts of the seat belt system is detected, the seat belt should be replaced immediately by a specialist garage.
The airbag system provides additional occupant protection during severe frontal and side-on collisions. It works in conjunction with the seat belts and deploys to cushion occupants in the event of a significant impact.
Airbags are deployed in the event of severe frontal and side collisions. The specific deployment conditions depend on factors such as the object's hardness, angle of impact, and vehicle speed. Minor collisions or rollovers may not trigger airbag deployment.